Electrical Specification For CP-03 (08 11 2015)

DHAKA MASS RAPID TRANSIT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
SPECIFICATION OF SUPPLY, INSTALLATION,

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL,BMS, FIRE DETECTION AND FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS, DG SET OF ELEVATED
STATIONS OF DHAKA MRTS PROJECT OF LINE-6
TENDER CP- 03
CP-03 DHAKA MRTS PROJECT Techenical Specification
TABLE OF CONTENT
Section Description Page No.
E 00 Electrical Works – General 2
E 01 MV Switchgear 21
E 02 Distribution Boards 42
E 03 MV Cabling 47
E 04 Conduit Wiring 56
E 05 Indoor Lighting & Fans 67
E 06 Protective Earthing 75
E 07 Lightning Protection 80
E 08 External Lighting 82
E 09 Uninterrupted Power Supply System 89
E 10 Air-Conditioning & Ventilation System 96
E 11 Viaduct lighting and Viaduct Power socket 106
E 12 Diesel Generator 109
S 51 Fire Alarm & Annunciation System 139
S 52 Fire Hydrant System 149
S 53 Piping for Fire Fighting System 153
S 54 Sprinkler System 159
S 55 Portable Fire Extinguishers 161
S 56 Clean Agent Based Fire Trace Tube System 163
Annexure 1 Interface Matrix 166
Annexure 2 List of Approved Makes 175
Confidential Page 2 of 185 R-0

Electrical Work
SECTION: E.00
1.0 GENERAL
1.1 Scope of Work
1.1.1 The scope of work under these specifications generally covers supply, fabrication,
installation/fixing, necessary touch up painting, testing and commissioning of the
following. The contractor shall carryout and completes the said work under this
contract in every respect in conformity with the current rules and regulations of the
Local Electricity Authority, the International Standard Institution, Bangladase Electricity
Rules and Act and with the directions of and to the satisfaction of the Employer or his
representative. The contractor shall furnish all labour and install all materials,
appliances, equipment (except those items which will be supplied by the owner to the
contractor at site) necessary for the complete provision and testing of the installation
as specified herein and shown on the drawings. This also includes any material,
appliances, equipment not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the drawings as
being furnished or installed but which are necessary and customary to make complete
installation properly connected and in working condition. The work shall include all
incidental jobs / minor civil works connected with installation such as excavation in
trenches and backfilling, cutting, drilling and grouting etc.
 Conduiting, wiring, supply & fixing of modular type switches etc. for lighting, fans
etc.
 Conduiting, wiring, supply & fixing of modular type sockets and switches including
industrial socket outlets wherever required and as per drawings.
 External lighting including its feeder pillar, cabling, poles all complete, High Mast
(as applicable)
 Lighting fixture for internal areas (including verification of lux level achievable in
various areas) and external areas
 Fire detection and alarm system including conduiting and wiring/Cabling
 Safety equipment
 All panels & DBs including Main Distribution Panel, Essential Power Panel, AC
Power Panel, Main Lighting Panel, Escalator Power Panel, Passenger Amenities
/Property development Panel, Fire Pump Panel, Water Pump Panel, Emergency
Power Panel (UPS), Lighting Distribution Boards including any other panel/DB as
required.
 Various distribution boards / panels as required with automatic source transfer

system/Automatic Transfer switch /Contactor relay based automatic change over
system etc.
 Power supply for signage.

 DC control supply system as required
 1.1 kV grade power cables and control cables, cable trays, raceways and ducting
 Exhaust fans and ceiling fans
 Ventilation of basement & generator rooms, substation & pump room, air-
conditioning of equipment rooms/other rooms etc.
 Protective earthing and lightning protection
 Cabling, hume pipes, cable termination, RCC trenches, Poles etc. for external
lighting
 Uninterrupted power supply system
 Protection and interlocks
 Fire pumps, fire hydrants, sprinklers and fire system piping
 fire trace tube system in electrical panels and fire extinguishers
 interface with other contractor.
 Preparation Of Drawings and Design Verification complete as required.
1.2 Definitions and Abbreviations

1.2.1 Definitions
(V) “Voltage” means the difference of electric potential measured in volts between
any two conductors or between any part of either conductor and the earth as
measured by a suitable voltmeter and is said to be:
“Low” where the voltage does not exceed 250 volts under normal conditions subject,
however, to the percentage variation allowed by the rules.
“Medium” where the voltage does not exceed 650 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by the rules.
“High" where the voltage does not exceed 33,000 volts under normal conditions
subject, however, to the percentage variation allowed by the rules.
1.2.2 Abbreviations
Abbreviations used in this specification include:
HV High voltage
MV Medium voltage
LV Low voltage
ac or AC Alternating current
dc or DC Direct current
k Kilo
Kg Kilogram
KVA Kilo volt-amp
KW Kilowatt

V Volt
A Amp
mm Millimetre
M or m Metre
Cm or cm Centimetre
M2 or m2 Square Metre
SqM or Sqm Square Metre
sqmm Square millimetre
FRLS Fire Retardant Low Smoke
FR Fire Retardence
dBA Decibel (sound pressure level) A Scale
NC Noise criterion
FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel
FAP Fire Alarm Panel
SD Smoke Detector
HD Heat Detector
RI Response Indicator
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
BMS Building Management System
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
MCC Motor Control Center
ASTS Automatic Source Transfer System
TC/TB Terminal Connector/Terminal Block
ACOS Automatic Change Over Switch
COS Change Over Switch
MDB Main Distribution Board
CP Control Panel
SWA Steel Wire Armoured
MS Mild Steel
SB Switch Board
T Temperature
C Celsius or Centigrade
PP Power Panel
XLPE Cross Link Poly Ethylene
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
HT High Tension
LT Low Tension
BOQ Bill of Quantities
CT Current Transformer
PT Potential Transformer
HRC High Rupturing Capacity
APFC Automatic Power Factor Control
PF or pf Power Factor
GA General Arrangement
AFC Automatic Fare Collection
S&T Signal & Telecommunication
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
DG Diesel Generator
PWD Public Works Department
BEPA Bangladesh Environment Protection Act
I/C or i/c Incoming
O/G or o/g Outgoing

Ph Phase
N Neutral
1.3 Applicable Codes and Regulations
1.3.1 Electrical arrangement shall be based on BS: 7671 - 2001 "Requirements for electrical
installations. IEE Wiring Regulations - Sixteenth edition" or other internationally
recognized equivalent standard approved by the Employer’s representative examples
of which are:
BER Bangladesh Electricity Rules
BEA Bangladesh Electricity Act
EN Euronorm Standard
ISO International Standards Organization
IES Illumination Engineering Society, UK
BNBC Bangladesh National Building Code
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
DIN Deutsche Industrie Normen
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
JIS Japanese Industrial Standards.
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
VDE Verband Deutsche Elektrotechniker
IS/BIS Bureau of Indian Standards
1.3.2 Local Codes, Regulations and Standards
1.3.2.1 Unless otherwise stated, the electrical system shall be governed by all applicable
local codes, code of practices regulations and standards (all latest) issued by the
local agencies such as:
Bangladesh Electricity Rules
Bangladesh Electricity Act
Bangladesh National Building Code
Dhaka Police & Fire Brigade
Public Works Department
Regulations for Electrical crossings of Rail Track
Electricity Authority
Dhaka Administration
National Safety Council
Central Pollution Control Board

Chief Electrical Inspector

1.3.2.2 The Contractor shall ensure compliance with the regulations laid down by local
authorities i.e., Government, Municipal, Chief Electrical Inspector, and all other
statutory agencies including fire safety regulations, fire insurance regulations or other
local codes and obtain approvals from relevant authorities at appropriate stages of
work as required.
1.3.3 Additional Codes, Standards, Specifications and Manuals
1.3.3.1 In addition to local requirements, electrical system shall comply with the codes of
practice and standards specified in herein. Local codes, regulations and standards
shall take precedence where their standards or requirements are more onerous than
other national standards.
1.3.3.2 It is to be noted that updated and current standards shall be applicable irrespective of
dates mentioned with references/ standards in the tender documents.
1.4 Technical Requirements
1.4.1 The design, supply, installation, testing & commissioning of main items of equipment
and materials viz. MV / LV switch boards / lighting panels, batteries, battery chargers,
UPS, conduit wiring, luminaries, electronic chokes, XLPE cables and outdoor lighting
equipment, lighting poles, high lighting mast etc. shall be made in accordance with the
particular specifications, latest codes & standards specified in these documents.
1.4.2 Specifications shall find precedence over the relevant standards indicated. In case of
doubt or no mention of specification or standards, the PWD specifications shall be
followed. However the decision or clarifications of Employer's representative or the
Engineer on above shall be final & binding. No deviation from the agreed designs shall
be accepted unless specifically agreed to by Employer’s representative and notified.
1.4.3 The other items of equipment and all components and materials shall meet or exceed the
referred standards / specifications (latest revision) or equivalent:
IEC 60404-8-4:1998 General requirements for the supply of metallurgical

materials. Aluminium and aluminium alloy ingots and
castings for general engineering purposes
IEC 60502 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 1 For
working voltages up to and including 1100 V
IEC 60227 PVC Insulated cables for working voltages up to and

including 1100 V
IEC. 60502-1, BS 7655. Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed

cables: Part 1 For working voltage up to and including
1100 V
IEC 60391(1972) Guide for marking of insulated conductors
IEC 61439-2:2011) Enclosed distribution fuse boards and cutouts for

voltages not exceeding 1000 V ac and 1200 V dc
IEC 61035-2-1(1993) Fittings for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring
IEC 60614-1(1978) Conduits for electrical installations: Part 1 General

requirements
Conduits for electrical installations: Part 3 Rigid plain

IEC 60614-2-2(1980)
conduits of insulating materials
Conduits for Electrical Installations - Part 5 : Pliable

IEC 60614-2-3(1990)
Conduits of Insulating Material
Conduits for Electrical Installations - Specification -:

IEC 60614-2-6(1992)
Pliable Conduits of Metal or Composite Materials
Specification for Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control

IEC 60439-1(1985) gear Assemblies - Part 1 : Requirements for Type-
Tested and Partially Type-Tested Assemblies
Specification for Low-voltage Switchgear and Control

IEC 60439-2(1987) gear Assemblies - Part 2 : Particular Requirements
for Busbar Trunking Systems (Busway)
Specification for Low-voltage Switchgear and

ISO 7574-1:1985
Controlgear - Part 1 : General Rules

ISO 7574-2:1985
Controlgear - Part 2 : Circuit Breakers

ISO 7574-3:1985 Controlgear - Part 3 : Switches, Disconnections,
Switch Disconnections and Fuse Combination Units
Specification for Low-Voltage Switchgear and

Controlgear - Part 4 : Contractors and Motor-Starters
ISO 7574-1985
- Section 1 : Electromechanical Contactors and Motor
Starters
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear -

Specification - Part 5 : Control Circuit Devices and
IEC 60947-5-1(2000)
Switching Elements - Section 1 : Electromechanical
Control Circuit Devices

IEC 60947-5-2(2000) Specification - Part 5 : Control Circuit Devices and
Switching Elements - Section 2 : Proximity Switches
BS:3871 MCCBs
IEC 60898-1:2002 Electrical Accessories - Circuit Breakers for Over

Current Protection for Household and Similar
Installations
IEC 255-4 (1976) Specification for Electrical Relays for Power System
Protection
IEC 60445(1973) Guide for Uniform System of Marking and Identification

of Conductors and Apparatus Terminals
IEC 600 51-(All Parts) Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical Measuring
(1997) Instruments and their Accessories - Specification
IEC 61036:1996 AC Static Watthour Meters, Class 1 and 2 –

Specification
IEC 60332 (Various Tests on electric cables under fire conditions

parts)
IEC 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
BS:5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings
1.5 Service Life of the Equipments

The quality of the material, equipments, cables shall be so as to secure a service life as shown
below:
Main Switch Boards 30 years
Transformers 30 years
Sub-main switch boards / distribution boards/ panels 30 years
Cables 30 years
Fire alarm main panel 30 years
Luminaires 10 years
Tray, trunking and supports 30 years
Lightning protection 30 years
Sub-assemblies and components 30 years
DG set 20 years
UPS 20 years
VRV AC 15 Years
Split /Window AC 5 Years
Batteries 10 years
All other equipment 20 years

Above service life of the equipment is the normal life expectancy of the equipment
subject to its maintenance and preservations as per the recommended maintenance
practice.
Contractor shall furnish manufacture’s certificate for secured service life of the
equipment.
1.6 Designation of Equipments
1.6.1 Equipment designation shall be identified and labeled in conformity with the plans,
schematics, block and single-line diagrams and as built drawings for easy
identification, reference & subsequent maintenance. The Contractor shall get the
Material and letter sizing (Font Size) approved from the Employer's representative
before use.
1.6.2 Numbers - Each piece of equipment shall be numbered according to the number of
the circuit breaker feeding the piece of equipment. Terminal cabinets shall be
numbered sequentially.
1.6.3 Equipment, cables, boards, panels shall be numbered for type and serial number.
Each equipment number shall be preceded by a suitable letter designation. A list may
be drawn & got approved to adopt in all references.
1.6.4 Letters - Each equipment number shall be preceded by a suitable letter designation uniformly
adopted viz.:
Description Abbreviation/
Designation
Automatic Source Transfer System ASTS
Automatic Transfer Switch ATS
Automatic change over switch/ Change over switch ACOS/COS
Main Distribution Board MDB
Control Panel CP
Disconnect Switch DS
Isolator I
Automatic Fare Collection/signaling & Telecom Power AFC/S&T

Panel
Diesel Generator/ Uninterrupted power system DG/UPS
Normal/Emergency/ Lighting N/E/L
Motor M
Motor Control Centre MCC
Motor Starter MS

Power Panel PP
Distribution Board/Sub Distribution board DB/SDB
Switchboards SB
Switchgear S
Terminal Cabinet/Terminal Block TC/TB
Transformer Tr
Other devices/boards in use As approved
These designations shall be subject to modifications and shall be got approved from
Employer's representative, during execution of works.
1.7 Operating Parameters
Operating parameters for electrical works shall generally be 3-phase, 4-wire, 415V,
50Hz unless specified otherwise.

1.8 Rating, Sizes and Calculations

1.8.1 Power system shall be provided to suit the equipment chosen for voltage, capacity,
and fault duty to which it is exposed.
1.8.2 Switchboards, equipment and components shall conform to rated operation in ambient
temperatures of 45C and humidity up to 95% for indoor equipments and 50°C and
100% humidity for outdoor equipments unless specified/approved otherwise.
1.9 General Features
1.9.1 All equipments & components must be capable of performing continuous duty at full
load
1.9.2 The panel/boards shall be aesthetic design, dust & vermin proof, modular /extendable
maintenance friendly construction so that the defective equipment can be readily
replaced/ trouble-shot with ease & speed, when required. The arrangement of
controlling switches in the MV/LV Switch Boards / Distribution boards / Panels and
their marking shall be such that these are prominent, easily identifiable and
accessible. Single line power / control diagrams shall be placed at the back of door or
other accessible locations in the board/panels with complete details as required and
directed to facilitate easy maintenance
1.9.3 Prior to shipment of equipment, the Employers' representative reserves the right to
inspect the equipment at the manufacturers’ works and the Contractor shall provide
and secure for the Employers' representative every reasonable access and facility at
the manufacturers’ works for such inspection
1.10 Quality control of equipments, components and material
1.10.1 All major equipments and materials such as LV switch gear, distribution/sub-
distribution boards, switchboards, battery, UPS, battery chargers, change over
switches, luminaires, electronic chokes, street lighting poles, PVC/XLPE cables etc.
as required for the work shall be subject to Quality Assurance Programme to ensure
proper supply and use of raw materials, processes, installation/execution and tests.
1.10.2 The contractor shall furnish the Quality Assurance Programme prior to fabrication of
various assemblies and their supplies for installation. A well-documented quality plan
shall be charted indicating all the activities and interfaces relating to the sustained
check on quality of workmanship and materials used in various stages of the work and
get approval from employer.
1.10.3 All makes of components & accessories shall be got approved before use including
the enclosure design before fabrication. Progressive inspections shall be arranged as
desired by the employer's representative
1.10.4 The Contractor shall incorporate adequate standardization to ensure minimum variety
and sizes of equipment, accessories, sub-assemblies, systems and practices
1.11 Corrosion Protection
All ferrous components and fittings exposed to the atmosphere shall be hot-dip
galvanized unless specified otherwise.

1.12 Acoustic Criteria

1.13 Noise emanating from the equipment / service installations shall not exceed as per
provision given in the relevant international standards for each of the equipment.
Spares, Special Tools and Test Equipments
1.13.1 The Contractor shall recommend a list of special tools and test equipments, which are
essential for day-to-day use in both corrective and preventive maintenance beyond
DLP/Maintenance period and for workshop use in the overhaul of all modules and
units likely to be required over the full service life of the installation
1.13.2 During construction/commissioning DLP/ Maintenance period, all such tools & test
equipments & material required for repair/ replacement/ making good, shall be
arranged by the contractor whether explicitly mentioned or not without any financial
implication on employer
1.13.3 The Contractor shall recommend stockholding considering lead-time for procurement
of the respective items
1.14 Service / Working Conditions
1.14.1 All the equipments, material shall be designed/ provided to suit/ work continuously
under conditions of ambient temperature of 45C and relative humidity up to 95% for
indoor equipments and 50°C and 100% humidity for outdoor equipments unless
specified otherwise
1.14.2 All the equipments shall be capable of continuous operation under environmental and
power supply conditions of Voltage and frequency variation
1.15 Approved makes
1.15.1 Contractor shall use the material/ components / products of approved make as
indicated in 'list of approved makes' enclosed vide annex-'Elect-I', unless specified
otherwise or as approved by the Employer's representative.
1.15.2 The Contractor shall quote the rates for material and equipments as per the list of
approved makes. In the event of contractor wanting to use alternate makes other than
those stipulated for any reason, the contractor can send a proposal after ensuring that
what he proposes meets both the quality, safety standard of the tender
specifications/requirements and key dates. He shall also stand full guarantee to his
alternate proposal. The alternate makes can be used only after an approval accorded
by the Employer, whose decision will be final in the matter.
2.0 PREAMBLE TO OF RATES ITEMS
2.1 General
2.1.1 All materials shall be strictly as per relevant standards. Samples of materials, light
fixtures, fans or any item sought shall be got approved before use from Employer's
representative or 'the Engineer' and all approved samples shall be duly and properly
exhibited at the site of work for verification from time to time during the execution.
Wherever required, necessary proof of origin of the various materials shall be
submitted
2.1.2 Good and neat workmanship and total compliance with the safety and other statutory
rules and regulation, are the prime requirements under this contract

2.1.3 All quoted rates shall cover supply of all materials, handling of material, labour,
appurtenant civil works, taxes and duties, fabrication, installation, testing,
commissioning and handing over, training and free maintenance during the Defects
Liability Period. The rates shall be applicable for working at all heights and levels at
the site and shall include cost of any fees payable for inspection by the Statutory
bodies, rectification wherever ordered by such authorities. Installation also includes
the foundation, fixing, securing as per application duty
2.1.4 Quantities shown in the schedule are best estimates. The rate for each item shall be
self-sustaining such that any variation in the estimated quantities shall not vitiate the
tender
2.1.5 All the enclosures shall be of adequate size with a provision of 15% spare space to
accommodate possible future additional switch-gear
2.1.6 Final painting to the equipments, panels, boards, Structure etc. as required shall be
done as per approved colour scheme
2.1.7 Shop drawings – The contractor shall prepare and furnish all shop drawings in (size
as decided by engineer in charge)at no extra cost for approval by the Employer before
commencing fabrication, manufacturing of the equipment and before carrying out any
work at site as required after issue of award of contract & initial set of working
drawings. The shop drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD or by other suitable
means. Such shop drawings shall be based on the Architect / Consultant drawings
and requirements laid down in the specifications and as per site conditions. The shop
drawings shall also indicate other services which are coming in the same area. It shall
be the responsibility of the contractor to take the approved shop drawings of other
services contractor and coordinate / incorporate the other services in their shop
drawings. The manufacture of equipment and work at site shall be commenced only
after the shop drawings are approved in writing by the Employer. Such drawings shall
be coordinated with all disciplines of work. The shop drawing should clearly indicate
the work to be carried out by other agencies e.g. civil works required for equipment
foundation, trenches, equipment rooms etc.
2.1.7.1 Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval sufficiently in advance of planned
delivery and installation of any materials to allow Employer or his representative
ample time for scrutiny. No claims for extension of time shall be entertained because
of any delay in the work due to his failure to produce shop drawings at the right time,
in accordance with the approved programme.
2.1.7.2 Manufacturer drawings, catalogues, pamphlets and other documents submitted for
approval shall be in two sets. Each item in each set shall be properly labeled,
indicating the specific services for which material or equipment is to be used, giving
reference to the governing section and clause number and clearly identifying in ink the
items and the operating characteristics. Data of general nature shall not be accepted.
2.1.7.3 Approval of shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements
or of building dimensions. Where drawings are approved, said approval does not
mean that the drawings supercede the contract requirements, nor does it in any way
relieve the contractor of the responsibility or requirement to furnish material and
perform work as required by the contractor.

2.1.7.4 Where the contractor proposes to use an item of equipment, other than that specified
or detailed on the drawings, which require any redesign of the structure, partitions,
foundation, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical or architectural
layouts; he shall inform the Employer well in advance and no delays resulting from
such redesign shall be admissible. He shall also submit all related information as may
be required for such redesign to the Employer.
2.1.7.5 Where the work of the contractor has to be installed in close proximity to, or will
interfere with work of other trades, he shall assist in working out space conditions to
make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the Employer or his representative,
the contractor shall prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable
scale not less than 1:50 clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to
the work of other trades. If the contractor installs his work before coordinating with
other trades, or so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, he shall
make all the necessary changes without extra cost to the owners.
2.1.7.6 After approval of all the relevant shop drawings, the contractor shall submit four
copies of a comprehensive variation in quantity statement.
2.1.7.7 The contractor should also submit two copies of Catalogues, Manufacturer’s
drawings, equipment characteristics data, performance chart etc. as required by the
Engineer.
2.2 Switchboards
2.2.1 All panels/boards shall be dead front, front operated, dust, vermin proof, extensible,
top/bottom cable entry, compartmentalized made of CRCA sheet steel of thickness of
2.0mm & rigid supports for components and with lockable hinged doors
2.2.2 All components like, circuit breakers, switches, hook-up wiring etc. shall be compatible
with the short-circuit levels. Bus bar supporting systems shall withstand without
deflection or deformation, the short circuit forces due to the stated short circuits. All
inter wiring shall be with suitable stranded copper conductor FR insulated wire
2.2.3 All bus bars shall be electrolytic copper with purity of 99.9% and rated for the incoming
switch or breaker rating. Current density shall be 1.4 amp/sq. mm up to 500 amp and
1.2 amp/sqmm beyond 500 amp. The Bus Bar temperature should not exceed 850C
i.e. 350C temperature rise over 500C ambient. The calculations for temperature rise
should be furnished for approval
2.2.4 Indicating lamps shall be multiple LED/neon type preferably
2.2.5 All CT’s & PT’s shall be resin cast
2.2.6 All relays, meters & switches shall be flush mounted
2.2.7 All metering equipments shall be digital unless specified otherwise or as approved by
the employers' representative
2.3 Cabling
2.3.1 All cables used on this work shall meet the requirements of specifications and
standards specified
2.3.2 Cables up to 10-sqmm shall be of copper conductor and be of aluminium for higher
cross sections and cables up to size 25-sqmm shall be 4 core type or as specified.
2.3.3 Cables shall be laid in air/ surface/ recess/ pipes/ trench etc as required
2.4 Conduit Wiring
2.4.1 All conduits and all the accessories there with shall be Hot-dip galvanized .

2.4.2 All wires shall be fire retardant (FR) whether so stated or not either in the drawings,
specifications or BOQ.
2.5 Earthing
2.5.1 The earthing system is primarily of galvanized steel and the earthing configuration is
IEEE std 142-2007 and earth mats shall be designed and constructed in accordance
with IEEE 80 – 2000 to limit the grid resistance, maximum attainable grid potential and
step / touch potentials within the safe limits. The contractor should ensure that the
intents of the earthing configuration are met with by providing a single-phase-ground
fault current sufficient enough to trip all the circuit breakers and fuses in the system.
2.5.2 Based on ground strata, the number of earth stations may be varied to achieve the
above objective
2.6 Mode of measurement - Mode of measurement for various items has been spelt out
broadly as under, however it does not dilute in any manner the specifications,
application duties and site requirements. This shall also include all the associated
items explicitly or implicitly mentioned/ required as per the specifications, standards,
code of practice, and drawings for successful installation (including foundation if any),
testing and commissioning of the work.
2.6.1 MV Switchgear
2.6.1.1 Panels shall be considered as one unit for the purpose of measurement and shall
include the following:
i. Incoming and Outgoing feeder terminals
ii. Interconnections , controls and interlocks
iii. instrument wiring with necessary protective isolation and auxiliary contacts
iv. Meters, Relays, Indicating lamps, CT’s control MCBs etc.
v. Busbars
vi. Supporting structure including minor civil works if any, sheet steel enclosure,
internal earthbus etc.
vii. Misc. like capacitor bank with APFCR if any, space heater, panel illumination,
etc.
viii. Installation, testing and commissioning.

2.6.1.2 Protective earthing of the panel/Isolator from the equipment to earthing system will be
measured separately and paid at unit rates as specified in BOQ
2.6.1.3 Outgoing and incoming feeder terminations will be paid at the unit rates separately as
specified under cabling.
2.6.2 Distribution Boards
2.6.2.1 Supply, installation/fixing, testing & commissioning of distribution board complete with
the various components specified, indicating lamps, supporting frame, internal wiring,
erection etc., will be treated as one unit for the purpose of measurement and payment
2.6.2.2 Protective earthing of the boards to earthing system will be measured separately and
paid at unit rates as specified in BOQ
2.6.3 Medium Voltage Cabling
2.6.3.1 Procurement of cables shall be on the basis of actual site measurements and the
quantities shown in the schedule of work shall be regarded as a guide only. The cable
runs shall be free of joints measured up to the outer end of the boxes without any
allowances for over lap in joints, if unavoidable. The actual run of the cables shall be
measured and the rate shall include all the above mentioned material, labour etc for
laying as required
2.6.3.2 Cable will be measured on the basis of a common rate per unit length indoor or
outdoor and shall include the following:
For cables laid indoors:
(i) Supply of Cables, clamps, securing arrangement
(ii) Installation, commissioning and testing
(iii) Cable marking, tags & route indicator
AND
For cable buried underground :
(i) Supply and laying of cables
(ii) Protective bricks / tiles, sand cushioning above & below cable along with
installation and Cable markers per unit length of cable laid underground
(iii) Excavation & refilling payable in CUM payable separately
2.6.3.3 Cable trays/racks will be measured on the basis of unit length for individual sizes as
specified in BOQ. These shall be paid for separately.
2.6.3.4 Each cable termination, i.e. termination of both end of cable will be measured as one
unit for payment. The item shall include the following:
(i) Cable glands, lugs, bolts, nuts.
(ii) All jointing materials.
(iii) Earthing the glands with armour.
(iv) Installation, testing and commissioning.

2.6.4 Conduit Wiring

2.6.4.1 Wiring for light, ceiling fan, exhaust fan, call bell, socket etc. outlet shall be carried out
as per tender specification, shall be measured and paid on loop point basis only as
described below. Rates quoted for point wiring items shall be based on parameters
stipulated in BOQ. Contractor may verify the site requirement and drawings to form
the basis of point wiring rates. No claim for extra payment on account of electrical
layouts in parts of projects requiring larger average wiring and conduit length per
point, whether specifically shown in tender drawings or not, shall be entertained after
the award of contract
2.6.4.2 All circuit wiring commencing from the distribution board to the first switch box in the
case of switch controlled lights and from distribution board to first light point (Circuit
Point) in case of MCB controlled lights shall be measured in point along the center line
of the conduit and shall include all junction boxes, connectors, earth wire, fixing
accessories, connection to all light fittings, switches, fish wires etc. as specified and
shown on drawings but excluding switches, sockets with their boxes and light fittings.
Cost of MCB is also not included as this cost is included in the item of DB.
2.6.4.3 Further wiring from the circuit point/switch box to the further lights or fans or sockets
will be a secondary or looping point and paid for per point. This should include all
fixing accessories, JB’s connections, terminal boxes and terminating accessories etc
2.6.4.4 All switches sockets with boxes, earthing interconnection and modular type silver
contact switch shall be paid for per unit of 1 switch, 2 switch, 3 switch, 4 switch units,
2 way switch, 6A/16A switch-sockets, 20A/30A/60A M.C sockets generally as
specified in the BOQ
2.6.4.5 .The cost of conduits (including flexible conduit as required) with fish wires, junction /
pull boxes are included in the rate of point / loop / control wiring.
2.6.4.6 All other conduit runs, including junction boxes, fish wires etc. shall be paid on the
basis of unit length.
2.6.4.7 The rate of supply and laying of other conduits, point / loop / control wiring shall
include the cost of fish wire (pull wire) in conduits complete with junction boxes, pull
boxes, etc.
2.6.5 Indoor Lighting & Fans
2.6.5.1 Each fixture shall be measured as a unit, complete with accessories, connectors,
earthing, mounting arrangement, clamps etc
2.6.5.2 Suspension stems required if any for light fittings shall be measured as bare conduits
and paid at the rate per unit length. The conduit length shall include threading, other
operations and other accessories as required
2.6.5.3 Fans shall be measured as a unit complete with all accessories, 30-cm suspension
rods, fan hook or wall bracket
2.6.6 Protective Earthing
2.6.6.1 Providing earthing station complete as per specification and BOQ shall be treated as
one unit of measurement for plate and pipe earthing
2.6.6.2 For earth mat, the payment shall constitute horizontal conductor laying and vertical
conductor laying in per unit length including brazing, excavation and backfilling as per
the drawings and BOQ.
2.6.6.3 The following items of work shall be measured and paid per unit length covering the
cost of the earth wires/strips clamps, labour etc.

(i) Main equipment earthing grid and connections to the earthing stations
(ii) Connections to the switchboard, power panels, distribution boards etc.
2.6.6.4 The cost of earthing the following items shall become part of the cost of the item itself
and no separate payment for earthing shall be made
(i) Motors, Isolating switches and starters should form part of mounting frame,
switch starter etc.
(ii) Light fittings - form part of installation of the light fittings.
(iii) Conduit wiring cabling - should form part of the wiring or cabling.
(iv) Street lighting - should form part of the external cable armouring which shall
incorporate a protective earth-conductor which shall be used for earthing of the
pole etc.
2.6.6.5 Other items shall be paid as explained in BOQ
2.6.7 Lightning Protection
2.6.7.1 Each air termination shall be measured as one unit for payment and shall include
(i) Elevation rod and Multiple point head air termination
(ii) Base plate and concrete block
(iii) Terminal connection
(iv) Bimetallic connection, if any
2.6.7.2 Each earth station shall be measured as one unit for payment and shall include
(i) Electrode, lead wire & fixing accessories
(ii) Soil treatment with salt and such materials
(iii) Excavation and refilling
(iv) Masonry chamber and RCC cover
(v) Watering pipe
(vi) Painting, numbering and marking measured resistance value with date
2.6.7.3 Earthing down conductor shall be measured on the basis of unit length for payment
and shall include
(i) Earth lead, clamps and fixing accessories
(ii) Excavation and corrosion treatment of the earth leads at the earth
termination.
(iii) Terminal connection at air and earth termination.
2.6.7.4 Earthing termination
(i) Earth lead including end terminations clamps and fixing accessories
(ii) Excavation and corrosion treatment/bituminous coating and PVC taping
of the earth leads at the earth termination.

2.6.8 External Lighting

2.6.8.1 Each light fittings with lamp, controlgear, earthing etc. shall be considered as one
unit for measurement and payment
2.6.8.2 Each lighting pole including cross arm, concrete foundation/coping, base plate
earthing, wiring from the terminal block to the light fitting shall be considered as one
unit for measurement.
2.6.8.3 Each aircraft warning light shall be measured as one unit for payment and shall
include
(i) Light fittings, lamp and accessories
(ii) Internal wiring
(iii) Installation with all fixing accessories
(iv) Wiring up to fitting shall be covered under Point wiring
2.6.8.4 High mast lighting shall be paid as per unit complete with supply, erection, testing and
commissioning as specified in BOQ including luminaire with lamps and foundation etc.

2.7 Mode of Measurement of Point Wiring

2.7.1 In case of points with more than one light point controlled by the same switch, such
point shall be measured in two parts i.e. from the switch to the first point called as light
point. First point to second point, second point to third point etc. are called as loop
point. No circuit wiring shall be paid extra i.e. the point wiring shall include the wiring
of light / fan / outlet of any length from the distribution board via switch to the point.
Measurements shall be in numbers.
2.7.2 The supply of following shall be deemed to be included as part of the point wiring rate
- light wires, conduits with all accessories, junction and inspection boxes.
2.7.3 Wiring shall be carried out as per IEC / PWD and local bodies regulations.
2.7.4 Earthing wire of 2.5-sqmm FR PVC insulated copper conductor is also included in the
point wiring rate and nothing extra shall be paid for it.
2.7.5 The point wiring rate shall also include the rate of 20mm diameter GI rigid/ flexible
conduit including check nut and fixing on both sides, fixing the GI conduit and required
wiring from the junction box to the fixture.
2.7.6 With regard to 6 Amp and 16 Amp outlets, these shall be measured in numbers and
rate shall include wires, conduits with all accessories, junction and inspection boxes
and earthing wires.
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
2.8 All equipments shall conform with the objectives of the European Directive on EMC
(89/335/EEC) wherever applicable and where appropriate shall be affixed with the CE
mark.
Equipment shall be tested and the level of conducted interference transmitted, level of
immunity to conducted and radiated interference received shall be established for all
equipments to conform to the required levels.
2.9 Machinery shall comply with the requirements of EN 55081, IEC 801 Part-1 to 3 and
BS 6667 Part-1 to 3.
STANDARDIZATION
2.10 Where practical and as part of the general design philosophy to minimize the number
of different components used on the plant and equipment supplied for the Contract,
similar plant and equipment will be replaceable / interchangeable, of modular design
and adaptable and extendable. To this end the following principles will apply:
(i) Technical specifications and design standards will be uniform
(ii) Operating system will be uniform for all system / sub-systems
(iii) Standards for maintenance planning will be uniformly categorized
(iv) Uniform standards will be designated for procurement, replacement, stocking
and availability
(v) Equipment and accessories will be provided with uniform standard spare
capacity and protection.
(vi) Piping, cabling etc. will carry standard colour coding for identification and
categorization for each kind of use / type. Similarly, a standard procedure will
be followed for identification of each category of equipment while marking and
numbering each category of equipment.

Test standards will be framed such that all the plant and equipment meets the same
test criteria. To ensure that this will be the case the following will apply:
a. Type testing, routine testing and endurance tests will be carried out as per
relevent standards.
b. Test evaluation and performance will be compared with standardized
acceptance criteria

SECTION: E.01
MV SWITCHGEAR
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work shall cover the design, manufacture, supply, installation, testing
and commissioning of all power panels, suitable for 415 volts, 3-phase, 50 Hz, 4-wire
system incorporating circuit breakers of various types, bus bars, interconnections,
metering, protection, earthing etc., meeting the requirements shown in schematic
diagrams, schedule of quantities and as specified.
2.0 Standards
2.1 All equipments, components, materials and entire work shall be carried out in
conformity with applicable and relevant BS/IEC Standards and Codes of Practice.In
addition relevant clause of Bangladesh electricity act and Bangladesh electricity rule
amended up to date shall apply.
2.2 It is to be noted that updated and current standards shall be applicable irrespective of
dates mentioned with references/ standards in the tender documents.
2.2.1 Some of the applicable standards are listed below:

IEC 60947-1(2007)
Controlgear - Part 1 : General Rules

IEC 60947-2: (2003)
Controlgear - Part 2 : Circuit Breakers

IEC 60947-3:1999 Controlgear - Part 3 : Switches, Disconnectors, Switch
Disconnectors and Fuse Combination Units

Controlgear - Part 4 : Contractors and Motor-Starters -
IEC 60947-4-1:2000
Section 1 : Electromechanical Contactors and Motor
Starters

Specification - Part 5 : Control Circuit Devices and
IEC 60947-5-1(2000)
Switching Elements - Section 1 : Electromechanical
Control Circuit Devices

IEC 60947-5-2(2000) Specification - Part 5 : Control Circuit Devices and
Switching Elements - Section 2 : Proximity Switches
IEC 255 1976 Specification for Electrical Relays for Power System
Protection
IEC 60445(1973) Guide for Uniform System of Marking and Identification

of Conductors and Apparatus Terminals
IEC -60439-1 1985 Specification for Low-Voltage Switchgear and

Controlgear Assemblies - Part 1 : Requirements for

Type-Tested and Partially Type-Tested Assemblies

IEC 60439-2 1987 Controlgear Assemblies - Part 2 : Particular
Requirements for Busbar Trunking Systems (Busway)
IEC 60898 2002 Electrical Accessories - Circuit Breakers for Over

Installations
2.2.2 In case of any conflict between specifications & the standards, the
instructions/decision of 'the Engineer' or Employer's authorized representative shall be
binding.
2.2.3 If any of the above standards has been amended or replaced by new standard then
amended/replaced standard would apply in consultation with Engineer or the
employer’s representative.
3.0 Air Circuit Breakers
3.1 Air Circuit breakers shall be air break, moulded case horizontal electrical draw-out
type fully interlocked and meeting the requirements of IEC standards. Breakers shall
be rated for a operating voltage Ue of 415/690 V & insulation voltage U i: 1000 V, and
rated full load amperes as indicated on drawings. Breaker shall be capable of making
and breaking system short circuits as specified. Total discrimination should be
available among the breaker upto design fault level.
3.2 Breakers shall be electrically operated with remote operation facility, complete with
front-of-the-panel operating handle, isolating plug with safety shutters, mechanical
ON/OFF indicator, silver plated arching and main contacts, arc chutes suitably
designed to provide larger arc elongation, trip free operation. Breakers shall be
capable of being racked out into ‘Testing’, ‘Isolated’, and 'Service' and Maintenance
position and kept locked in any position. Breakers for remote operation shall be 240
volt ac motor operated spring charged accessory fitted in it. All the poles shall have
completely insulated from each other internally and double insulation as standard
feature. All 4 Pole ACB shall be capable of setting Neutral protection to N or N/2 to
ensure precise neutral protection.
3.3 Technical parameters - The Circuit Breaker shall be of air break type of robust and
compact moulded case design, with class 2 front facia, suitable for indoor mounting
with symmetrical rupturing capacity at 415 Volts as per BOQ and drawings. All circuit
breakers shall be provided with over current/ short circuit and earth fault releases. The
ACBs should have a short time withstand capacity of not less than 50 kA for 1 second.
Shunt trip and closing coil of continuous rating, suitable for 24 volt dc / 240 volt ac as
per drawing shall be provided. The ACBs shall have I cs = Icu = Icw for 1 second. The
circuit shall comply with the isolating function requirements of IEC 60947-2 section to
facilitate the safety of person.
3.4 Constructional features
3.4.1 Each Circuit Breaker shall be housed in a separate compartment enclosed on all
sides. The Circuit Breaker cradle shall be designed and constructed to permit smooth
withdrawal and insertion. The movement shall be free of jerks, easy to operate and
positive.

3.4.2 Air Circuit Breakers shall be provided in fully drawout cubicles. These cubicles shall
be such that drawout is possible without disconnection of the wires and cables. The
power and control circuits shall have self-aligning and self-isolating contacts. The fixed
and moving contacts shall be easily accessible for operation and maintenance.
Mechanical door interlocks shall be provided on the drawout cubicles to ensure safety
and compliance to relevant Standards. Door interlock shall be true door interlock as
per relevant standards.
3.4.3 Self-aligning cluster type isolating contacts shall be provided for the Circuit Breaker
with automatically operated shutters to screen live cluster contacts when the Breaker
is withdrawn from the cubicle. Sliding connections including those for the auxiliary
contacts and control wiring shall also be of the self aligning type. The fixed portion of
the sliding connections shall have easy access for maintenance purposes.
3.4.4 The automatic shutters should be integral part of breaker & locking arrangement
should be provided as per standards.
3.4.5 Contacts should be self aligning type requiring no special effort to align them.
3.4.6 The ACBs shall be fitted with arc chutes on each pole designed to permit rapid
dispersion, cooling and extinction of the arc.
3.4.7 ACBs shall have separate main and arcing contacts. Arcing contacts shall be hard
wearing material of copper tungsten or silver tungsten. Main contacts shall be of Silver
Cadmium Oxide.
3.4.8 The insulation material shall confirm to Glow wire test as per IEC 60695.
3.4.9 ACBs shall be CE marked.
3.4.10 ACB shall have minimum watt losses in order to restrict temperature rise inside the
breaker.
3.5 Operating mechanism
3.5.1 The Circuit Breaker shall be trip free with stored energy type operating mechanism,
closing spring shall be able to manually charged by operating the front lever with
mechanical ON/OFF indication. Breaker shall be convertible from manual to Electrical
at site. The operating mechanism shall be such that the circuit breaker is at all times
free to open immediately the trip coil is energized. The operating handle and
mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of and integral with the Circuit
Breaker.
3.5.2 The Circuit Breaker shall have the following three distinct and separate positions,
which shall be indicated on the face of the panel. Service/Test/Isolated position shall
be positively achieved only through the racking motion of draw out mechanism and
not by trial & error.
"Service" -- Both main and secondary isolating contacts closed
"Test" --Main isolating contacts open and secondary isolating contacts closed
"Isolated" -- Both main and secondary isolating contacts open.
3.6 Circuit breaker interlocking
3.6.1 Sequence type strain free interlocks shall be provided to ensure the following:
a) It shall not be possible for the Breaker to be withdrawn from the cubicle when in
the "ON" position. To achieve this, suitable mechanism shall be provided to lock
the Breaker in the tripped position before the Breaker is isolated.

b) It shall not be possible for the Breaker to be switched "ON" until it is either in the
fully inserted position or for testing purposes it is in the fully isolated position.
c) It shall not be possible for the Circuit Breaker to be plugged in unless it is in the
OFF position.
d) A safety latch shall be provided to ensure that the movement of the breaker, as it
is withdrawn, is checked before it is completely out of the cubicle, thus preventing
its accidental fall due to its weight.
3.7 Circuit Breaker auxiliary contacts
The Circuit Breaker shall have minimum 4 changeover auxiliary contacts rated at 10 A
220 volts 50 Hz. The auxiliary contacts could be used as NO or NC as per
requirement & there should be provision to add minimum 6 aux. contacts for future
use. They shall close before the main contacts when the circuit breaker is plugged in
and vice versa. When the circuit breaker is drawn out of the cubicle. The changeover
contact should be replacable without disturbing any critical parts like trip
unit/mechanism of breaker.
3.8 Anti-pumping.
Mechanical and electrical anti-pumping devices shall be incorporated in the
circuit breakers as required.
3.9 Mechanical & Electrical life.
The Circuit Breaker shall have minimum Mechanical life of 20000 operations.
3.10 Type Test Certificates
The ACBs shall be type tested and certified for compliance to IES 60947 2003
Equivelent IEC from International Testing Authorities. Supplier should submit
certificates for the same. All ACB shall confirm to EMC & shall be immune to
harmonics to avoid nuisance tripping.
3.11 ACBs shall be provided with RS 485 ports for BMS (Building Management System)
connectivity through MODBUS protocol.
3.12 Protection
The true RMS sensing microprocessor based communication inbuilt numerical
release with intrinsic RS 485 port for communication by open protocol shall be
provided on circuit breaker for offering protection against overload (long time), short
circuit (short time) with intentional delay, earth fault protections with intentional time
delay& instantaneous protection all with adjustable settings. There shall be graphical
display and bar graph or actual value display for showing the percentage loading in
each phase built in the trip unit. The release shall have an LCD display to show RMS
current in all three phases, neutral & earth (4 pole). The release should have
individual fault detection by LCDs for faster fault diagnosis and reduce down time. The
release shall be self diagnostic with indication. All the adjustment should be on line
and the circuit breaker need not be switched of while adjusting the setting. The control
unit shall have thermal memory throughout the range to store temperature rise data in
case of repetitive overload or earth fault for protecting the cables and loads. The
Release shall provide zone selective interlocking for short circuit and
earth fault protection zones to reduce thermal stress on the system. The release
should provide fault history including cause of fault as well level of fault current.
Acknowledgement of settings should be visible on the screen of release.
Communication feature should be independent of trip unit i.e. any outside

disturbances should not affect the trip unit of circuit breaker. The trip unit should be
self powered.
4.0 MCCBs.
4.1 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be standard products of established
manufacturers as indicated in list of approved makes best suited to the application
duty and shall conform to IEC 60947-2, MCCBs shall be suitable for fault levels as
specified in BOQ/drawings or higher. Upstream breakers shall be of higher kA rating
compared to downstream breakers to ensure total discrimination, coordinated
protection of the distribution system. MCCB’s shall be provided in fixed type cubicles .
4.2 MCCBs shall be current limiting type with trip time of less than 10 millisecond suitable
for 3 phase 415 Volts AC 50 HZ supply with neutral 4P/3P/2P as required and rated
for insulation voltage 690- 750 V, operating voltage of 415V for 3 Phase, Service short
circuit breaking capacity (Ics) as specified and required as per relevant standards. All
Breakers/MCCBs shall incorporate front adjustable interchangeable trip units with
adjustable overload and adjustable short circuit faults. All the MCCBs shall have
microprocessor based releases. All MCCB’s offered shall have double insulation
feature as standard. MCCB’s offered shall be from the same series to have a
commonality of appearance and spares management. No mixing of series is allowed
within a manufacturer’s range of MCCBs. Four pole MCCBs shall have flexibility of
setting neutral current N or N/2. The mechanical operations MCCBs shall be > 15000
operations.
4.3 MCCB cover and case shall be made of high strength heat resisting and flame
retardant thermosetting insulating material. Operating handle shall be double quick
make/break, trip-free type having suitable ON, OFF and TRIPPED indicators and a
common handle for simultaneous operation of all the phases. Suitable arc
extinguishing device shall be provided for each contact. Tripping unit shall be
connected by a common trip bar such that tripping of any one pole causes three poles
to open simultaneously. Contact tips shall be made of suitable arc resistant alloy.
Terminals shall be with adequate clearances.
4.4 MCCBs shall be provided with continuous rated releases accessories as specified in
the drawings and BOQ to avoid the burning due to sustained command. In addition,
MCCBs shall be provided with following interlocking devices with the compartment
door.
(i) Door interlock to prevent door being opened when the breaker is in ON position
(extendable rotary handle to be invariable provided).
(ii) Interlock to prevent the breaker being switch ON with the door open.
4.5 All MCCBs shall have suitably rated minimum 1 changeover auxiliary contacts unless
specified otherwise. All Models 3&4 Poles versions shall be of same type, design and
make and utilization category ‘A’.
4.6 MCCBs shall have trip free mechanism such that tripping command always overrides
the closing command. MCCBs shall have disconnection capability to ensure that
handle does not return to off position in case of contacts getting welded. Compartment
doors shall clearly indicate the state of MCCB i.e. ON/OFF/TRIP MCCBs shall be
provided with test function (push button or equivalent) to check the correct
functionality of the MCCBs.
4.7 Each MCCB shall have a facility for padlocking in the off position.
4.8 MCCBs shall have spreader links with phase barriers as standard feature.

4.9 MCCBs protection releases should be shrouded to avoid unauthorized tampering.

(i) In-built RMS sensing
(ii) Central front from O/L S/C adjustments.
4.10 MCCBs shall have cross bolted/shrouded terminals to withstand thermodynamic
stress at higher short circuit current.
4.11 MCCBs shall be CE marked.
4.12 MCCBs shall not have any load line biasing.
4.13 MCCBs shall be type tested and certified from local/International testing authorities for
conformance to IEC standards.
4.14 All releases shall be tamper proof.
4.15 There should be total discrimination between ACBs and MCCBs upto the design fault
level of the downstream devices.
4.16 Earth fault protection shall be inbuilt feature of MCCB where earth fault has been
asked for in BOQ .
5.0 Switch Fuse Units & Disconnects/Isolators (Where applicable)
5.1 Switch fuse units shall have quick-make, quick-break silver plated preferably double
break contacts with operating mechanism suitable for rotary operation in the case of
cubicle mounting. All switches shall be rated according to the equipment schedule or
drawings and shall withstand the system prospective fault current let through. Cam
operated rotary switches with adequate terminal adaptors up to 25A are acceptable
but for all higher rating switch fuse units shall be heavy-duty type.
5.2 Fuses shall be HRC cartridge type conforming to IEC 60269- 1993 with a breaking
capacity corresponding to system fault level. Fuses shall be link type with visible
indication. Screw type fuses are not acceptable for any ratings.
5.3 All disconnects shall consist of switch units quick-make, quick-break type with silver
plated contacts. The switches shall preferably have double breaks. The switches shall
preferably have sheet steel enclosure, which in turn is mounted on suitable angle iron
frame work. In wet locations enclosures shall be IP56 rated. Disconnects shall have a
minimum breaking capacity of 5KA at 415 Volts.
5.4 Switch contacts shall be designed with arc repelling features to extinguish the arc
quickly to provide long contact life.
6.0 Isolators
6.1 Isolators shall be fixed on wall, on self-supported galvanized angle iron frame work as
required and mounted as near to the motor as possible. Where several motors are
installed, isolators if required shall be provided at a central location on a common
frame work with prior approval at site. The Isolator shall be provided in IP 65
enclosures from the Isolator manufacturer only.
6.2 Painting, earthing and labels shall be provided as generally indicating for MV
Switchgear and as shown on drawings.

7.0 Metering, Instrumentation & protection

7.1 The metering required to be provided for each incoming feeder shall be as per the
drawing & Bill/schedule of quantities. Such metering shall not be provided on the front
panel of the Circuit Breaker compartment. A separate compartment shall be provided
for the Metering and Protective relays as required. Instrument testing plugs shall be
provided for testing the kWH meters and relays.
7.2 Current Transformers (CT)
7.2.1 Current transformers shall comply with approved standard and shall be compatible with
and provide the necessary accuracy, over current factors, characteristics, performance
and VA rating for the satisfactory operation of the relevant protection devices,
instruments and meters.
7.2.2 Current transformers shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short time
withstand current for the value and duration specified for the assembly within which it is
mounted.
7.2.3 CTs shall be cast resin type conforming to IEC 60185(1966) (with all amendments) in all
respects. CT’s shall be non-hygroscopic, tropicalised and noncombustible. CT’s shall
be single piece epoxy resin moulding, windings and magnetic core being embedded in
epoxy resin under vacuum to provide total encapsulation. Partial discharge
measurement as per IEC 44-4 shall be carried out as a routine test to ensure insulation
reliability. CTs shall have rated primary current, rated burden and class of accuracy as
specified in Schedule of Quantities and drawings. Rated secondary current shall be 5A
unless otherwise stated. Accuracy class for metering CT’s shall be 1.0 and for
protection CT’s 5P10. Terminals of CTs shall be paired permanently for easy
identification of poles. CTs shall be provided with earthing terminals for earthing
chassis, frame-work and fixed part of metal casing (if any). Each CT shall be provided
with rating plate indicating:
 Name and make
 Serial number
 Transformation ratio
 Number of cores
 Rated burden
 Rated voltage
 Accuracy class
7.2.4 Test links shall be provided in the secondary connections of all current transformers to
facilitate testing of instruments, meters and protection devices. These shall be so
arranged as to ensure that the transformers secondary winding cannot be open
circuited.
7.2.5 CTs shall be mounted such that they are easily accessible for inspection, maintenance
and replacement. Wiring for CT shall be with 2.5-sqmm copper conductor, FR, PVC
insulated wires with proper terminations and wiring shall be bunched with cable straps
and fixed to the panel structure in a neat manner.
7.3 Potential Transformer (PT)
7.3.1 PTs shall be cast resin type conforming to IEC 60186(1987) (Part-I,II and III) in all
respects. PT’s shall be rated for 33/11 KV/110 volts and shall be connected star/star.
Primary winding shall be impregnated polyester resin under vacuum to provide high
dielectric strength between the terminals as well as adjacent layers. After resin
impregnation, the winding is encapsulated under vacuum in epoxy resin. The magnetic
Confidential Page 29 R0 of 185

core laminations shall be made up of cold rolled grain oriented steel having high
permeability and low hysteresis loss. All material shall be non-hygroscopic, non-
combustible, resistant to power arc and suitable of tropical environment. Partial
discharge measurement as per IEC 44-4 shall be incorporated as a routine test for
ensuring high insulation reliability.
7.4 Meters
7.4.1 Direct reading electrical meters shall conform to IEC 61036:1996 suitable for single
phase/three phase supply system in all respects. Accuracy of direct reading shall be
class 1.0 for voltmeter and 1.0 for ammeters. Other instruments shall have accuracy of
1.5.
7.4.2 Meters shall be digital with menu driven selection and required level of protection
having auxiliary contacts and connectivity to RS485 to suit SCADA/BMS connectivity
and arrange metering information in real time mode including suitable Memory &
software as required.
7.4.3 Meters shall be suitable for continuous operation between 0oC and +500C.
7.4.4 Meters shall be flush mounting and shall be enclosed in dust tight housing. The
housing shall be of steel or phenolic mould. Design and manufacture of meters shall
ensure prevention of fogging of instrument glass. Selector switches shall be provided
for ammeters and voltmeters used in three-phase system.
7.4.5 Energy meters shall be electronic type with TOD facility, switch board mounting type
suitable for unbalanced loads. In case of two incoming feeders, a summation CT shall
be provided with the meter.
7.4.6 The energy meters for DG Set & Transformers shall be calibrated and got certified by
appropriate agency as required.
7.4.7 Ammeters shall normally be suitable for 5 A secondary of current transformers.
7.4.8 Voltmeter circuits shall be provided with protection through MCB as required
7.4.9 Wattmeter shall be of 3-phase Digital type and shall be provided with a maximum
demand indicator as required and with RS-485/RS232 connectivity.
7.4.10 Three phase power factor meters shall be of Digital type with current and potential coils
suitable for operation with current and potential transformers provided in the panel.
Scale shall be calibrated for 50% lag - 100% - 50% lead readings.
7.4.11 Trivector meters shall be two element, integrating type. Meters shall conform to IEC
62052 and 62053 in all respects. Energy meters, KVAH, kVA, and kVARH meters shall
be provided with integrating registers. The registers shall be able to record energy
consumption of 500 hours corresponding to maximum current at rated voltage and
unity power factor. Meters shall be suitable for operation with current and potential
transformers available in the panel.
7.4.12 Square / rectangular pattern flush mounting meters complying with the requirements of
the relevant international Standards shall only be used.
7.4.13 Multi Function Meter
7.4.14 The display for single meters i.e. ammeter or voltmeters shall be 3.5 digits and integral
meters shall be page display type as specified in BOQ.
7.5 Relays
7.5.1 Protection relays shall be equipped to indicate cause of tripping. Relays shall be
designed to make or break the normal circuit current with which they are associated.
Relay contacts shall be of silver or platinum alloy and shall be designed to withstand
repeated operation without damage. Relays shall be of draw out type to facilitate

testing and maintenance. Draw out case shall be dust tight. Relays shall be capable of
disconnecting faulty section of network without causing interruption to remaining
sections. Analysis of setting shall be made considering relay errors, pickup and
overshoot errors and shall be submitted to employers' representative for approval. All
relays shall be hand reset type from front of panel.
7.5.2 The relays shall be duly compensated against fluctuation in ambient temperature and
frequency and shall have single phase prevention feature.
7.5.3 Over current relays shall be induction type with inverse definite minimum time lag
characteristics. Relays shall be provided with adjustable current and time settings.
Setting for current shall be 50 to 200 % in steps of 25%. The IDMT relay shall have
time lag (delay) of 0 to 3 seconds. The time setting multiplier shall be adjustable from
0.1 to unity. Over current relays shall be fitted with suitable tripping device with trip coil
being suitable for operation on 5 amps.
7.5.4 Earth fault relays shall be same as over current relay except the current setting shall be
10% to 40% in steps of 5%.
7.5.5 Under voltage relays shall be of induction type and shall have inverse limit operation
characteristics with pickup voltage range of 40 to 80% of the rated voltage.
7.6 Indicating lamps - Multiple LED type indicating lamps shall be provided for indication of
phases and Breaker position 'OFF', or 'ON', as required in the BOQ.
7.7 Control Wiring - All control circuits shall be provided with protective MCBs. Instrument
testing plugs shall be provided for testing the meters. Cables intended for wiring of
control, instrumentation, metering equipments shall conform to relevant IEC and shall
be suitable for max. operating temperature 90° C.
8.0 Switch Board Construction
8.1 General – The panel manufacturer should have ISO 9001/9002 – 2000 certification.
8.1.1 All medium voltage switchboards shall be suitable for operation at three phase/three
phase 4 wire, 415 volt, 50 Hz, neutral grounded system with a symmetrical short circuit
level as BOQ.
8.1.2 The Switch Boards shall comply with the latest edition with upto date amendments of
relevant IEC, BS and Bangladesh Electricity Rules and Regulations.
8.2 Switch board configuration
8.2.1 The Switch Board shall be configured with Air Circuit Breakers, MCCB's, Switch Fuse
units and other equipment & material as called for in the Schedule of Quantities.
8.2.2 The MCCB's and Switch Fuse units shall be arranged in multi-tier formation whereas
the Air Circuit Breakers shall be arranged in Single tier formation only to facilitate
operation and maintenance.
8.3 Constructional features
8.3.1 All the electrical distribution and sub distribution boards/ panel shall be sturdy and
robust, modular, extendable, metal enclosed, moisture, dust, termite & vermin proof
rigid, free standing or wall mounting dead front welded structure of sheet steel cubicle
pattern, single front, and suitable for indoor mounting to accommodate and support all
equipment mounted on them without vibration or movement. Structural members shall
not obstruct access to equipment, units nor sub-assemblies. Checking and removal of
components shall be possible without disturbing adjacent equipment.
8.3.2 Enclosure shall comply with IEC 60947-1:2007. All adjoining units, doors and covers
shall be fully Neoprene gasketted unless specified/approved otherwise and equipped
with integral lock. The enclosure protection shall be not less than the following or as
specified in BOQ:

Installations at platforms : IP 54
Installation at concourse level : IP 54
8.3.3 All panels/boards shall be dead front, front operated, dust, vermin proof, extensible,
top/bottom cable entry, compartmentalized made of CRCA sheet steel of thickness
2.0mm & rigid supports for components and with lockable hinged doors. Joints of any
kind in sheet metal shall be seam welded and all welding slag ground off and welding
pits wiped smooth with plumber metal. All holes in metalwork shall be protected by
substantial grommets or bushes to protect wiring passing through them. The maximum
overall height of panels and the maximum/minimum height of the operating handles
from floor level shall be as per standard norms.
8.3.4 The frame work shall be finished with standard two coats of final paint of approved
color shade after necessary chemical degreasing and primer coating as per standard
practice.
8.3.5 All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and secured with the frame. Fixing screws
shall enter holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal or provided with hank
nuts. Self threading screws shall not be used in the construction of the Switch Boards.
8.3.6 The switchboard shall be designed for the incoming and Outgoing LV feeders as per
the provisions of IEC 61439-0:2010, IEC 60947-1:2007 and IEC Pub 947-5-1 to latest
version. Generous space shall be provided for vertical rising cables, their bending and
termination.
8.3.7 The switchboard panel shall have provision for top / bottom in coming and bottom / top
out going to suit site conditions of cable entries.
8.3.8 The switch board / panel shall be divided into cubicles and all front doors of cubicles
containing MCCBs shall be inter-locked so that the doors can not be opened unless the
MCCB is off. Protection against shock in normal service shall be achieved by the
provision of barriers or enclosures both vertical and horizontal and between adjacent
units to ensure segregation and prevent accidental contact with live parts, or by
complete insulation of live parts.
8.3.9 The layout of the equipment and the components shall be such as to ensure creepage
distances and isolating distances specified in the latest version of IEC 61439:2010). The
sub-assemblies of similar equipment shall be interchangeable.
8.3.10 All connections shall normally be accessible from the front side of the panel. Where
connections are not accessible from the front, the back side shall be provided with
doors with handles and panel type locks. Required number of lifting lugs fixed on
separate sections of the framework shall be provided. Two earthing studs shall be
provided on the framework.
8.3.11 All panels shall have digital meters connected through RS 485 port to BMS. All other
BMS connections, unless specified otherwise, shall be through potential free contacts
and it should be ensured that all such connection points are brought to one place at a
suitable terminal strip duly numbered, easily accessible for the purpose. BMS wiring
shall start from this designated terminal strip.
8.4 Switchboard dimensional limitations
8.4.1 A base channel of minimum size 75 mm x 40 mm x 3 mm thick shall be provided at
the bottom.
8.4.2 A minimum of 200 mm blank space between the floor of switch board and bottom most
units shall be provided. The overall height of the Switch Board shall be limited to 2500
mm. The height of the operating handle, push buttons etc shall be restricted between
300 mm and 1850 mm from finished floor level.

8.5 Switch board compartmentalization - The Switch Board shall be divided into distinct
separate compartments comprising:
8.5.1 A completely enclosed ventilated dust and vermin proof bus bar compartment for the
horizontal and vertical busbars.
8.5.2 Each circuit breaker, switch fuse units and MCCB housed in separate compartments
enclosed on all sides.
8.5.3 Sheet steel hinged lockable doors for each separate compartment provided and duly
interlocked with the breaker/switch fuse unit in "on" and "off" position.
8.5.4 Separate and adequate compartments for all Circuit Breakers provided for
accommodating instruments, indicating lamps, control contactors and control fuses etc.
These shall be accessible for testing and maintenance without any danger of
accidental contact with live parts of the circuit breaker, busbars and connections.
8.5.5 A horizontal wire way with screwed cover provided at the top to take interconnecting
control wiring between vertical sections.
8.5.6 Separate cable compartments running the height of the Switch Board in the case of
front access Boards provided for incoming and outgoing cables.
8.5.7 Cable compartments of adequate size for easy termination of all incoming and outgoing
cables entering from bottom or top.
8.5.8 Adequate and proper support provided in cable compartments to support cables.
8.5.9 Inter-changeable feeder compartments for all identical feeders of same rating.
8.6 Switch board bus bars
8.6.1 The bus bar and interconnections shall be of electrolytic tinned copper and of
rectangular cross sections suitable for full load current for phase bus bars and half/full
rated current for neutral bus bar as specified in BOQ and shown on drawings and rated
for a temperature rise of 30C over the ambient temperature specified, based on
insulated conductor rating and the maximum current density for copper shall be 1.4
amp per mm2 for ratings up to 500 Amp and beyond 500 amp maximum current density
shall be 1.2 amp per mm2. Bus bar supporting system shall be suitable to withstand the
stresses of a 31 MVA sustained symmetrical fault level at 415 volts for 1 second or as
per schedule of quantities.
8.6.2 The bus bars shall be insulated with coloured, heat shrinkable PVC Sleeves.
Accessible bus bar joints shall be shrouded in an approved manner. Minimum
clearances between phase to phase and between phases and neutral (including
protruding nuts and bolts if any) shall be 25 mm. Minimum clearance between phases
and earth (including protruding nuts and bolts if any) shall be 20 mm.
8.6.3 While providing the bus-bar section, the total load with 25% over load margin may be
considered which may be transferred to an individual panel through the inter-
connection between panels in the event of failure of incoming supply to the other
panels. The diversity factor of various loads shall be taken as 1 for design purposes.
The bus bar shall be designed for easy extension in future at either end.
8.6.4 An earthing bus made of Copper/Aluminum/GI as approved shall be provided through
out the switchboard/panel with securely connected earthing terminals at both ends.
8.6.5 Protective earthing shall be related to the incoming feeder as follows:
Phase conductor Protective conductor
upto 16 sqmm equal size

16 to 35 sqmm 16 sqmm
over 35 sqmm 50% of phase conductor
8.6.6 In case of dissimilar materials the Protective Conductor shall be suitably sized for equal
conductance.
8.6.7 All internal wiring, busbar metering etc. shall conform to IEC 60391(1972) with all
amendments.
8.6.8 All bus bar connections in Switch Boards shall be bolted with high tensile strength steel
bolts and nuts. Additional cross section of bus bars shall be provided wherever holes
are drilled in the bus bars. No insulation tape shall be used in the busbars /
interconnections.
8.6.9 Feeder connections shall be solid copper bars duly insulated with bimetallic clamps
wherever required.
8.6.10 Shrouds for bus bar joints /tapping points shall be FRP only. Bus insulators shall be
flame retardant, track resistant type with high creapage surface and non-hygroscopic
material such as epoxy/SMC/. Busbars shall be supported and braced to withstand the
stress due to max. short circuit current and also the thermal expansion
8.7 Components installed in the assembly
8.7.1 All components shall conform to respective IEC specifications and shall be suitable for
the particular requirements of rated current, voltage, service life, making and breaking
capacity and short-circuit withstand strength. Co-ordination of component matching
shall be observed. The Employer’s Representative shall be empowered to choose
compact component/ accessories as deemed fit out of the list of the approved makes.
8.7.2 Separate current transformers shall be provided for each protection device and for
instrumentation.
8.7.3 All assemblies of switchgear and control gear shall comply with IEC 60439 or approved
equivalent. The clearance in front, back and side of all assemblies of switchgear and
control gear shall be not less than 1.2 metres or minimum specified in standards, while
switchgear considered in the fully drawn out condition.
8.7.4 All push buttons shall be of the push to actuate type and provided with number of
contacts as required.
8.7.5 Control & selector switch - Control & selector switches shall be rotary type having
enclosed (in removable cover) contacts, stay put maintenance type, provided with
escutchean plates clearly marked to show the position.
8.7.6 Auxiliary contacts including push button contacts – All main as well as auxiliary
contacts should be rated for 10A minimum.
8.8 Instrument accommodation
8.8.1 Instruments and indicating lamps shall not be mounted on the Circuit Breaker
Compartment door. The current transformers for metering and for protection shall be
mounted on the solid copper busbars with proper supports.
8.8.2 For MCCB's/SFU’s, instrument, handles and indicating lamps can be provided on the
compartment doors.
8.9 Terminal arrangement
8.9.1 Both incoming and outgoing cables shall have top / bottom entry depending on site
requirement.

8.9.2 The marking and arranging of switchgear, bus bars, connections and small wiring shall
be clear and comply with an approved international standard. Terminal blocks for low
voltage wiring shall be of the rail mounted type moulded from high-grade non-
hygroscopic melamine having all live parts fully shrouded and assembled in banks with
marking tags to fit into moulded tag slots.
8.9.3 Terminals for final connections for indication, instrumentation and metering circuitry
shall have test probe facilities.
8.10 Contactors
8.10.1 Contactors shall comply with IEC 60947-4-1 and shall be of the break type having an
uninterrupted rated duty, and utilization category AC 3. The contractors shall be
capable of frequent switching & shall operate at 55 deg for AC3 applications
8.10.2 Contactor operating coils shall be AC suitable for the phase to neutral voltage of the
supply and shall be protected by means of a low current MCB/cartridge fuse.
8.10.3 Main contactors shall be silver faced.
8.10.4 The rated voltage of the contactors shall be equal or superior at 690 V and rated
insulation voltage shall be 1000 V. The rated impulse voltage of the contractor shall be
8 kV.
8.10.5 Contactors shall not dropout at voltage at 70% of rated voltage and minimum pickup
voltage shall be 85% or as specified.
8.10.6 The contactor should be modular in design and should be suitable for the addition of
auxiliary contacts and other electrical auxiliaries without any compromise on the
performance or the operation of the contactors. The contactors from 4 kW to 400 kW
will be associated with the same auxiliary contact block range.
8.11 Wiring
8.11.1 All wiring for relays and meters and other associated equipments shall be with FR,
PVC insulated, stranded copper conductor wires.
8.11.2 The wiring shall be colour coded and labeled with approved ferrules for identification.
PVC ferrules yellow in colour, locked to avoid movement & with black engraved letters
shall be provided at each end of all wires marked to correspond with equipment/circuit
designation & termination numbers as specified / approved or as required.
8.11.3 A separate bunching & separate route shall be followed for AC& DC wiring.
8.11.4 The minimum size of copper conductor control wires for switch-boards shall be 1.5
mm2.
8.11.5 Wiring shall be terminated through cage clamps or using crimping lugs where former
not feasible, without joints or Tee on their run. Wiring shall be run on sides of panels,
neatly bunched, secured without affecting equipment mounting.
8.12 Cable terminations
8.12.1 The Switch Boards shall be complete with supporting clamps and brackets etc for
termination of 1100 volt grade aluminium/copper conductor PVC/PVCA cables,
Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the Switch Board
in conformity with the location of incoming and outgoing conduits/cables. Gland plates,
gland-brackets and extension boxes shall be removable and shall be of adequate size
for the particular cables to be terminated.
8.12.2 The cable terminations for the MCCB’s shall be brought out to the rear in the case of
rear access switchboards or in the cable compartment in the case of front access
Switch-Boards. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the cable sizes and corresponding

crimping type copper lugs for each Incomer and Outgoing feeders and correct size lugs
shall be provided bolted up in the switchboard.
8.13 Space heaters - The Switch Board shall have in each panel thermostatically
controlled space heaters adjustable in the range of 30° C to 100° C with a controlling
15 amp 230 volt switch socket outlet to eliminate condensation.
8.14 Earthing
8.14.1 All switch panels shall be provided with protective earthing as specified.
8.14.2 A main earth bar of GI or aluminium as required shall be provided throughout the full
length of the Switch Board to earth all switchgears with a provision to make
connections to the sub-station earth’s on both sides.
8.14.3 The frame of the Circuit Breaker shall be positively earthed when racked into the
cubicle. Protective earthing of the switch-boards shall be connected to the building
earth.
8.15 Sheet steel treatment and painting
8.15.1 Sheet Steel materials used in the construction of these units should have undergone a
rigorous rust proofing process comprising of alkaline degreasing, descaling in dilute
sulfuric acid and a recognized phosphating process. The steel work shall then receive
two dip-coats of oxide filler/ primer before final painting. Castings shall be scrupulously
cleaned and fettled before receiving a similar oxide primer coat. The manufacturer is
required to have 7 tank treatment facility for this.
8.15.2 All sheet steel shall after metal treatment be powder coated with two coats of shade as
approved by engineer inside and outside. Each coat of paint shall be properly stoved
and the paint thickness shall not be less than 80 microns. The panel manufacturer
should have in-house power coating facility.
8.16 Name plates and labels - Suitable computerized laminated powder coated name-
plates and identification labels of metal for all Switch Boards and Circuits shall be
provided. These shall indicate the feeder number and feeder designation.
9.0 Installation & Foundation (if required)
9.1 The location of each foundation shall be correctly set out in accordance with the
approved foundation layout drawing. Base channels shall be grouted, leveled in
cement concrete pad for switchgear and other cubicle panels, etc. with reference to a
bench mark in the building. Pedestal type panels and superstructures shall be erected
by grouting foundation bolts into the foundation in cured holes left in foundation blocks.
For concreting on existing floors, a proper bonding surface shall be made by chipping
the floor. The final finish to the surface of the floor shall be given after all equipment
has been installed. If floor is broken for installation of equipment, it shall be restored to
original finish after completion of installation.
9.2 The concreting shall be done in accordance with the provision of Internation Standard
Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete as approved by engineer incharge.
9.3 Suitable grooves or niches shall be provided in the foundation block at the time of
casting to enable embodiment of earth strips without calling for chipping of the blocks.
Subsequently conduits of appropriate size shall be embedded in the foundation blocks
for cabling, in the first instance, wherever required.
9.4 All foundations shall be cast in the presence of the Employer's representatives. All
foundation and grouted bolts shall be cured for a minimum period of 48 hrs.
9.5 Foundations shall be prepared as per manufacturers drawing, shall be leveled,
checked for accuracy and the switchboards installed. Busbar connections shall be
checked with a feeler gauge after installation. Tightness of accessible bolted bus joints

shall be checked using calibrated torque wrench. Sealing of cable and boxes to prevent
moisture entry shall be checked. Switchboard earth bars shall be connected to the
earth grid.
9.6 Fabrication drawings of all panels shall be approved by the Employer's representative
before fabrication.
10.0 Testing and Inspection
10.1 All switchboards shall be factory inspected by Employers’ representative before
finishing and dispatch.
10.2 Certificate for all routine and type tests for circuit breakers in accordance with the IEC
shall be furnished.
10.3 All panels shall be meggered phase to phase and phase to neutral using a 1000/500V
megger with all outgoing feeders in closed position. The megger value should not be
less than 2.5 MΩ between phases and 1.5 MΩ between phases and neutral.
10.4 All meters and relays shall be calibrated and tested through secondary injection tests.
10.5 All field tests shall be witnessed by authorized representative of the Employer and
recorded. The contractor shall give due prior notice. An appropriate format shall be
prepared by the Contractor for this purpose. The test format shall have prior approval
from Employer. Test results will be witnessed and signed by the Contractor and
Employer’s representative.
11.0 Tests on switch board / panels
11.1 Type and Routine Test - Routine tests shall be carried out on the assembly in
accordance with IEC 60439-1(1985). Recently concluded Type test certificates not more
than 5 years old from a reputed independent laboratory, especially those related to
short circuit level and IP Protection will have to be submitted.
11.1.1 Type test certificates from the manufacturers for the switch board / lighting panel
components viz. ACBs, MCCBs, MCBs, change-over switches shall be furnished.
These shall include following but not limited to:
(i) Temperature rise of bus bars and components (not to exceed 300C )
(ii) Dielectric strength of electrical parts
(iii) Short circuit capacity of bus-bars and components
(iv) Continuity of protective circuits
(v) Mechanical operation of switchgear
(vi) Degree of protection and protective measures against direct and indirect
contact
(vii) Clearances and creepage distances
11.2 Acceptance Tests - Following minimum tests but not limited to shall be carried out as
follows for ensuring integrity of the cable anchorage during handling and installation:
(i) General visual check, including measurement of overall dimensions, location,
number and types of devices, terminal boxes, etc.
(ii) Manual and electrical operation of circuit breakers etc. and
electrical operation of contactors/automatic change-over switches.
(iii) Dry insulation test with power frequency voltage.
(iv) Insulation resistance of circuits.
12.0 Submittals

12.1 The Submittals to be submitted by the contractor for approval and before ordering for
procurement shall include following guaranteed performance particulars:
(i) Switch boards/panels' Name & Make
(ii) Bus Bar: i) Size, ii) Material, iii) Rated capacity, iv) Busbar supporting
system and the Short circuit with-stand capacity
(iii) Moulded case circuit breakers: Rated capacity, Rupturing capacity, Make, No.
of NO/NC contacts, Conformity to Standards.
(iv) Miniature circuit breakers: Rated capacity, Rupturing capacity, Conformity to
Standards
(v) Voltmeter & Ammeter: Make, size, Range, accuracy class, Indication type
(vi) Residual current devices: Name, Make, rated capacity, Range, sensitivity,
(vii) Air Circuit Breakers: capacity, rupturing capacity, Protections, Auxiliary contacts
& accessories, Conformity to specifications
13.0 List of Switch Boards - Switch boards and panels as per following list need be provided.
The incoming & outgoing feeders, indications, metering and protection details are shown on
various drawings as also referred in BOQ.
A Main Distribution Board MDB
B Essential power panel EPP
C Main Lighting Panel MLP
D Emergency Power Panel (UPS) EMLP
E Air conditioning Power panel ACPP
F Escalator Power Panel ESPP
G Fire pump panel FPP
H Water pump panel WPP
I Passenger Amenities Panel PAP
J Light Distribution Boards LDB
H Capacitor Panel CAP
I Main Distribution Board for Property MDB (PD)

Development panel
14.0 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

14.1 PF Improvement Capacitors - Capacitor units shall be indoor type, 3-Phase delta
connected with manual & automatic power factor control panels. Capacitor shall
conform to IEC 60831-1 2002, IEC 60831-2 1995 & IEC 60871-1:2005.
14.2 Capacitors shall be in multiples as specified and shown on drawings. Capacitor shall
be hermetically sealed heavy duty (MPP)type. Capacitor should be suitable for
application with non-linear load up to 15% of total kVA rating. Units shall have

metalized polypropylene dielectric media and hermetically sealed in closed sheet steel
containers, galvanized both internally and externally. Each unit shall have a discharge
resister and silvered fuse. Units shall be of low loss and be able to withstand 10% over
voltage and also suitable for continuous operation at 135% of rated KVAR. Tenderer
should indicate the loss factor of the capacitor offered.
14.3 Capacitors shall be suitable for 3 phase 415 volts 50 HZ supply and shall be available
in single and three phase units of 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 37.5, 40 and 50 kVAR sizes.
Capacitor shall be usable for indoor use, permissible overloads being as below:
14.3.1 Voltage overloads shall be 10% for continuous operation and 15% for six hours in a 24
hours cycle.
14.3.2 Current overloads shall be 15 % for continuous operations and 50% for six hours in a
24 hours cycle.
14.3.3 Over load of 35% continuously and 45% for six hours in a 24 hours cycle.
14.3.4 Upper limit of operating maximum temperature 85° C
14.3.5 Maximum permissible Voltage and current shall conform to relevant standard.
14.3.6 Capacitors shall have suitable discharge device to reduce the residual voltage from
crest value of the rated voltage to 50 volts or less within one minute after capacitor is
disconnected from the source of supply. The loss factor of capacitor shall not exceed
0.005 for capacitors with synthetic impregnants. The capacitors shall withstand power
frequency test voltage of 2500 volts AC for one minute. Insulation resistance between
capacitor terminals and containers when a test voltage of 500 volts DC is applied
shall not be less than 50 mega-ohms.
14.3.7 The capacitor & capacitor terminals must be rated for the temperature seen in the end
user application and leads provided on capacitors shall be insulated and rated for
current and voltage involved in application. The insulated leads shall comply UL62.
14.4 Capacitors shall become part of the control panel and shall be located preferably at the
top tier /rear side with substantial ventilation louvers for the dissipation of heat energy
from the capacitor losses. The lower/front tiers of the panel shall accommodate
switches, MCB's, contactors, and power factor control relay for the automatic
switching of the capacitors. The panel shall be cubicle type generally following the
specifications for “MV Switchgear”.
14.5 The automatic power factor control relay (APFCR) shall be a microprocessor based
static unit with output relays equal to the no. of capacitor steps. Minimum no. of relays
shall be six/eight (6/8) or as specified in BOQ. The switching ON and OFF of the
capacitor unit shall be done in a sequence so that even wear takes place on the
contactors and relays over one week of operation. The control panel shall provide:
i. No voltage cut off
ii. Over voltage protection
iii. Remote status and alarm
iv. Digital display of maintained power factor
v. Manual switching facility
vi. Auto manual selectivity
vii. LED status indications for each capacitor and power ON & OFF.
viii. Automatic correction of PF should be done to achieve 0.95 PF at different
loads.

14.6 The panel shall be provided with two earth terminals, and continuous earth bar of
appropriate size.
14.7 Markings: Capacitors shall be certified under UL810 recognition program and marked
as under:
 Manufacturer’s name
 Trade mark
 Date of manufacture
 Capacitance
 Voltage rating
 Frequency
 Temperature rating
 Maximum fault current rating
14.8 Testing & Commissioning
14.8.1 Capacitors shall be subject to test program as per UL810 to evaluate protection
devices within the capacitor, dielectric strength, life etc. Capacitors units shall be tested
to withstand 2500V AC for one minute and shall yield an IR value of 50 MΩ after one
minute charge with 500V DC. The sequence switching wherever specified shall be
functionally tested.
14.8.2 All test readings shall be duly recorded and presented.
15.0 Automatic Source Transfer System.
15.1 Scope – The scope of work covers supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
automatic source transfer systems meeting the intents of these specification.
15.2 System Features.
15.3 The system basically controls 2 nos. circuit breakers (MCCB’s or ACB’s) where one
breaker is connected to the ‘normal’ source and the other breaker to the ‘second’
source. The breakers are electrically & mechanically interlocked through internal or
external connections so that only one of the two breakers is ‘ON’ to the load. The
breakers shall be 3PN if the ‘normal’ and ‘second’ sources of supply are from the same
transformer. They should be 4 P if the ‘second’ source is from the diesel generator or
any other independent generating source.
15.4 In an automatic transfer system there shall be an electrical and mechanical interlocking
system, auxiliary control unit with high rupturing capacity MCB’s and relay contactors
and a changeover controller. The controller shall provide the following facilities :
Auto Operation 1) Monitor ‘normal’ source
2) Effect auto changeover in
i) ‘normal’ source failure
ii) phase failure
3) DG set control wherever shown and required.
4) Load shedding & Reconnection of non-primary circuits
Changeover R
5) Replacement sources if one of the phase of ‘Normal’
source is absent.
Position Switch &

Indication 4 Position selector switch with setting for Automatic/forced

operation on normal source/ force operation on
Emergency source/switch of both Normal & Emergency
source operations.
Other Facilities 1) Manual transfer to ‘second’ source
2) Adjustable time set point from1 to 30 sec
3) Option for communication bus.
The controllers should be self powered & should not depend on any auxiliary supply.
The common O/G bus bars should be insulated.
15.5 Panel Construction
15.5.1 The Automatic Source Transfer Systems shall be incorporated as part of the panel
concerned. The system shall become one vertical column with all the components
including the auxiliary supplies and the other columns shall accommodate the outgoing
feeders.
15.5.2 Construction of panels shall conform to the specifications under section ‘MV
switchgear’. All panels with ASTS shall be front operating and totally maintainable from
the front without accessing from the rear of the panel.
15.5.3 The ASTS shall not be measured separately and it shall be regarded as a part of the
panel in which it is incorporated. ACB or MCCBs as required are already considered in
the panels accordingly the price of ASTS be quoted along with the panel cost.
15.5.4 In the ASTS if electrical interlocking fails, the ASTS shall have an in-built permanent
mechanism to prevent accidental paralleling of two sources of supply.
16.0 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
16.1 General
This covers scope to provide automatic transfer switches (ATS) and enclosed ATS By-
Pass equipment, comprising an ATS with a microprocessor controller for auto-
operation and, a By-Pass line for ATS Isolation /Maintenance, with amperage, voltage,
number of poles ( 3 and 4 poles ) and withstand values as per the Schedule of
Quantities. The automatic Transfer switching equipment is designed to be used in low
voltage power systems for Open transition transfer applications, with simultaneous
closing of all 4 poles (three phases and neutral).
16.2 DESIGN PREREQUISITE
The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The
electrical operator shall be a motorized unit or a double solenoid mechanism,
momentarily energized. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked on a single shaft.
The system shall incorporate switch position indicator, with provision of manual
emergency operation, having 3 stable positions – Normal, Isolated and Emergency. To
prevent source overlapping the transfer is operated through distinct isolated position.
The sensing and logic shall be built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability and with
option of serial communications feature. To facilitate flexibility of installation there shall
be provision of Line/ Load reversibility.
ATS system shall have following characteristics:-
System Operational Voltage 415 V
Rated Insulation Voltage 1000 V
Impulse withstand Voltage 12 KV
Thermal Rating of Switch At 40 deg. C

Storage temperature -20 to +70 ° C
Operating temperature -20 to +70 ° C

16.3 STANDARDS & CODES

General standard
IEC 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - General rules
IEC 60947-6-1 Multiple function equipment –Transfer switching Equipment
IEC 60947-3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Switches &

disconnectors
Emission General standard

EN 55022 Conductor Emission
EN 55022 Radiated Emission
Immunity General standard

EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
EN 61000-4-3 Radiated electromagnetic field
EN 61000-4-4 Electrical fast transient (EFT)
EN 61000-4-5 Surges
EN 61000-4-6 Conducted radio frequency field
EN 61000-4-8 Power frequency magnetic field
EN 61000-4-11 Voltage dips, short interruptions and variations
EN 61000-4-13 Harmonics and inter harmonics
IEC 61010-1 Electromagnetic compatibility
16.4 Normal / Emergency sequences must integrate following timers :
Loss of Mains Timer to validate Main source failure before starting loss of Mains
sequence
Delay to transfer Timer (Emergency source availability Timer ) to validate emergency
source stability before transferring
Cool Down Timer in case of Genset application, to allow genset cooling down period
after transferring back the load to the Main source
It shall be possible to block the re-transfer operation (from Emergency to Main source)
via programming.
16.5 SAFETY
An in-built Auto/Manual selector must inhibit any automatic command in manual
position
It must also be possible to equip the product with a key selector to allow secure access
to the operational mode selection
Padlocking of the product in Isolation position must be included, and padlocking of the
system in all 3 positions must be possible on request
16.6 CONSTRUCTION AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
16.6.1 Transfer Switch
The Switching contacts of ATS must be silver plated and of the self cleaning type,
which optimizes the quality of the contacts during operation and also to render a
maintenance free system.

A manual operating handle made of one piece only shall be provided for emergency
transfer purposes. The handle shall be located on the ATS itself to ensure ease of
locating that and for quick operation for maximum efficiency during power outages.
Manual transfer shall be possible on load
Manual retransfer function must be possible either locally or from remote.
The switch shall have simultaneous closing of all 4 poles of ATS to minimize effect
of transient voltages
The Neutral pole of ATS shall be fully rated (100% rating for all 4 poles).
16.6.2 Controller
ATS Controller should have selectable Single phase or Three phase control on
Sources
The control unit shall direct operation of the switch. The controller’s sensing and
logic shall be a built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum
maintenance and to facilitate serial communication capabilities
It shall be possible to block the re-transfer operation when selected. The transfer
back operation to the main source must be voluntarily validated
The Frequency setting shall be possible in steps of 0.10 % whereas Voltage to be
settable in steps of 1%
It shall be possible to have Voltage sensing on all three phase as well as for single
phase
There shall be 300 distinct nominal voltage settings, for precise settings over a wide
voltage band
16.6.3 Settings
Both Voltage and Frequency settings shall be field adjustable either Locally though
display and keypad, or remotely through serial communication ( voltage in 1% steps
and frequency in 0.1% steps )
16.6.4 Events & Alarms
It shall be possible to programme the minimum and maximum voltage and
frequency thresholds, and associated hysteresis levels to avoid any nuisance
triggering of the switch operation. It shall also be possible to closely monitor Phase
rotation of both the sources to check for any flaws. It shall be possible to configure
unbalance level for both Mains and Backup source to ensure phase loss detection
17.0 Specification for contactor based auto power supply changeover system
This system ensures power supply availability to the load at all time from different
incomers (two/three sources) by transferring the source supply from one to another
depending on availability. Its control circuit shall be working on 230 volts, A C,
single phase, 50Hz.
This system operates with MCCBs, power contactors, auxiliary contactors, timers ,
SPPR, UVR etc. This system should also having auto/manual selection option for
operation in auto / manual mode. For manual switching ON/OFF, each supply
source should be operated through ON/OFF push button and consists of
ON/OFF /TRIP indications. There should be interlocking such that two supplies
donot get parallel with each other, i.e. only one supply should be available for load.
In normal case priority of the power supply shall be available as follows:-
1) EPP: - Incomer-1 (MDB), Incomer-2 (MDB), DG
2) Rest panels with dual supply :- Incomer -1 (EPP) & Incomer -2 (MDB)×××

SECTION: E.02
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work shall cover the design, manufacture, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of distribution boards as specified and shown in respective drawings.
Associated minor civil works required for the erection of the DB’s such as niche in walls
etc. are also included in the scope of this contract.
2.0 Standards
2.1 The following updated and current International Standard Specifications and Codes of
Practice will apply to the equipment and the work covered by the scope of this contract
irrespective of those listed.
IEC 60898-1:2002 Electrical Accessories - Circuit Breakers for Over

Installations

Controlgear Assemblies - Part 1 : Requirements
IEC 60439-1(1985)
for Type-Tested and Partially Type-Tested
Assemblies

Controlgear Assemblies - Part 2 : Particular
IEC 60439-2 (1985)
Requirements for Busbar Trunking Systems
(Busway)
IEC 60947- (2000) Specification for Low-voltage Switchgear and

Controlgear
conformity with applicable and relevant BS/IEC Standards and Codes of Practice.In
2.3 Necessary test certificates in support of the certification shall be submitted prior to
supply of the equipment.
3 Miniature Circuit Breakers
3.1 The MCBs shall be of the completely moulded design suitable for operation at 240/415
Volts 50 Hz, single phase/3-phase and neutral system. MCBs shall be quick make and
break type conforming to relevant standards. Housing shall be heat resistant and have
high impact strength. MCBs shall be flush mounting type and shall be provided with trip
free manual operating liver with ON/OFF indications
3.2 MCBs shall be provided with magnetic thermal releases for over current and short
circuit protection.
3.3 MCBs shall have quick make and break non-welding self wiping silver alloy contacts
rated for 10 kA or 15 kA (as applicable in BOQ) short circuit at 230/415 volts in
accordance with IEC 60898 as per the schedule & the drawing both on the manual and
automatic operation. The MCB shall confirm to Class 3 Energy Limitation. The MCB

shall be confirm to Class 3 Energy Limitation. Each pole on the breaker shall be
provided with inverse time thermal over load and instantaneous over current tripping
elements, with trip-free mechanism. In case of multi-pole breakers, the tripping must
be on all the poles and operating handle shall be common.
3.4 Breakers must conform to IEC 60898 with facility for locking using padlock with hasp in
OFF position. Copper Pressure clamp terminals for stranded/solid conductor insertion
are acceptable up to 10-sqmm size and for higher ratings, the terminals shall be
suitably shrouded.
3.5 MCB shall have a minimum life expectancy of 20,000 operations.
4 Residual Current Circuit Breaker
4.1 RCCBs shall be double pole or four-pole current-operated, housed in a totally enclosed
moulded case, manufactured and tested in compliance with IEC 61008 or EN 61008.
4.2 RCCBs shall meet the following requirements:
a) Number of poles: double-pole or four-pole as specified on the Drawings,
b) Rated current (ln): as shown on the Drawings,
c) Rated residual operating current: 30 mA or 100 mA or 300 mA as shown on the
drawings or as per approval of the Engineer.
d) Rated voltage: 240 / 415 V AC,
e) Rated frequency: 50 Hz,
f) Rated short-circuit capacity: not less than 1.5 kA unless otherwise specified,
g) Operating characteristics in case of residual currents with DC components: as specified,
h) Method of mounting: distribution board type,
i) Method of connection: connection shall be made with proper size of thimbles and
number ferruring for circuit identification,
j) I2t characteristic: suitable for equipment and circuit being protected,
k) Degree of protection: IP 3X to IEC 60529 or EN 60529, and
l) Reference ambient temperature: 50 °C.
4.3 The tripping mechanism shall be of trip-free so that the unit cannot be held closed
against an earth fault. Tripping devices utilizing electronic amplifiers or rectifiers are not
acceptable.
4.4 Provision shall be made for testing the automatic earth - leakage tripping by an integral
test device. A device shall be fitted for prevention against reclosing after the device has
tripped on earth leakage.
5 Construction of Distribution Boards
5.1 The distribution equipment, as detailed in schedule of quantities and forming a part of
the Distribution Boards, shall comply to the relevant Standards and Codes of the
International Standards.
5.2 Distribution boards shall be made of 2.0 mm thick CRCA sheet Box with hinged
lockable spring loaded door suitable for recessed, flush mounting, totally enclosed,
dust and vermin proof duly rust inhibited through a process of degreasing, acid
pickling, phosphating and spray painted to an approved colour over a coat of red oxide
primer and shall comprise of controlling miniature circuit breakers, earth leakage circuit
breakers, neutral link etc as detailed in the schedule of quantities & drawings.

5.3 All DB’s should have minimum IP 54 construction. All Cutouts/Conduit knockouts on
top and bottom and covers shall be provided with PE sealed gaskets to provide
minimum IP 54 degree of protection.
5.4 Three phase boards shall have phase barriers and a wire channel on three sides
generally as shown on approved working drawings. Neutral bars shall be solid tinned
copper bars with tapped holes and cheese headed screws. For 3 phase DB’s, 3nos
independent neutral bars shall be provided. All DB’s shall be internally pre-wired using
copper conductor FR PVC insulated wires brought to a terminal strip of appropriate
rating for outgoing feeders.
5.5 Board shall meet with the requirements of IEC 61439-2:2011 and marking arrangement
of busbars shall be in accordance with IEC 60391(1972).
5.6 Bus Bars shall be heat shrinkable PVC insulated electrical grade copper and suitable
for the incomer switch rating and sized for a temperature rise of 30C over the ambient.
5.7 Each board shall have two separate earthing terminals. One earthing terminal for single
phase and two terminals for 3 phase DBs shall be provided with an earth strip
connecting the studs and the outgoing earth bar.
5.8 Circuit diagram indicating the load distribution shall be pasted on the inside of the DB
as instructed. Each circuit shall be clearly numbered from left to right to correspond
with wiring diagrams.
5.9 All outgoing feeders shall terminate on a terminal strip which in turn is pre-wired to the MCB
by means of insulated single conductor FR PVC insulated copper wires as follows:
Up to 10A 2.5-sqmm
Over 10A and up to 16A 4.0-sqmm
Over 16A and up to 32A 6.0-sqmm
5.10 Each DB shall have multiple LED type indicating lamps complete with fuses on the in-
comer and all outgoing feeders denoting power availability in the board after the switch.
5.11 All the internal connections shall be with solid/multi-stranded copper conductor PVC
insulated wires with heavy duty ferrules of adequate temperature rating. All the internal
connections shall be concealed by providing a hinged protective panel to avoid
accidental contact with live points. All outgoing equipment mounted on a frame work for
easy removal and maintenance shall be connected direct to the bus bar on the live
side. Knock out holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided a top and
bottom to facilitate conduit connection.
5.12 MCBs shall be provided on the phases of each circuits. Individual banks of MCB’s shall
be detached. There shall be ample space behind the backs of MCB’s to accommodate
all the wiring. All the DB’s shall be completely factory wired, ready for connections.
5.13 All the terminals shall have adequate current rating and size to suit individual feeder
requirement.
5.14 All circuits shall be distinctly marked/ferruled with description of service installed.
5.15 All the circuits shall have an independent neutral insulated wire, one per circuit, and
shall be numbered and marked.
5.16 Sample of the finished DB shall be got approved by the Employers' representative
before bulk fabrication and supply.
6 Enclosure - The Enclosure system shall be IP54 duly provided with Neoprene gasket
sealing arrangement with nut free assembly

7 Sheet Steel Treatment and Painting

7.1 Sheet Steel materials used in the construction shall undergo a rigorous rust proofing
process comprising of alkaline degreasing, de-scaling in dilute sulphuric acid and a
recognized phosphating process. The steelwork shall then receive two coats of oxide
fill primer before final painting as specified or powder coated as per BOQ.
7.2 All sheet steel as well as the angle iron frame shall after metal treatment be given
powder coated finish painted with two coats of approved shade to on the outside and
white on the inside. Each coat of paint shall be properly stoved and the paint thickness
shall not be less than 80 microns.
8 Name Plates and Labels
8.1 Suitable computerized laminated engraved white on black nameplates and
identification labels of metal for all Switch Boards and Circuits shall be provided. These
shall indicate the feeder number and feeder designation.
9 Installation
9.1 DBs shall be fixed with bottom at 1200 mm from finished floors. DBs shall be fixed
properly, fitted square with the frame and with holes correctly positioned. DBs shall be
fastened to the walls with suitable grouted studs of not less than 12-mm diameter.
9.2 All distribution boards shall be mounted on wall or recessed, with necessary angle iron
framework. All mounting frames shall have one prime coat and two finish coats after
the completion of the work. All distribution boards shall be touched up for damaged
painting.
9.3 All boards shall be meggered phase to phase and to neutral using 1000/500V megger
with all switches in closed position. The megger value should not be less than 2.5 MΩ
between phases and 1.5 MΩ between phase and neutral.
9.4 Fabrication drawings of all boards shall be approved by the Employer or his Engineer
before fabrication and the boards will be inspected before dispatch unless waived in
writing.
10 Testing & Inspection
10.1 Copies of type tests and routine test as per relevant specification, carried out at
manufacturer’s work shall be submitted to the Employers' representative as required.
Wiring and connections shall be checked for continuity.
10.2 Tests as required shall be performed in presence of authorized representative of the
Employers' representative for which the contractor shall give due prior notice.
10.3 Test reports shall be furnished by the contractor in approved formats only.
10.4 Pre-commissioning inspection:
The following checks shall be carried out before commissioning distribution boards
certifying that:
(i) Erection is complete in all respect including earthing.
(ii) Opening in floor within and outside panels have been sealed off and all cover
and door gaskets are intact to make the enclosure dust and vermin proof.
(iii) All metering instrument have been checked and calibrated.
(iv) Indicating lamps are healthy and in proper position.
(v) Ratio test of all the CTs is satisfactory.
(vi) Wiring continuity and correctness are ensured in the protection and metering
circuits.

(vii) IR values have been found satisfactory and recorded for bus bars, circuit
breakers, incoming and outgoing cables.
(viii) Resistance of bus joints has been checked and recorded as satisfactory.

SECTION: E.03
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLING

1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work shall cover supply, laying, connecting, testing and commissioning of
low and medium voltage power and control cabling.
2.0 Standard
conformity with applicable and relevant BS/IEC Standards and Codes of Practice. In
2.2 It is to be noted that updated and current standards shall be applicable irrespective of
dates mentioned along with IEC in the tender documents
IEC 60502:1983 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 1 For
working voltages up to and including 1100 V
IEC 60502:1983 Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed

cables: Part 1 For working voltage up to and including
1100 V
IEC 60502 Code of practice for installation and maintenance

of power cables up to and including 33 kV rating
IEC 60228:1978 Conductors for insulated electric cables and

flexible cords. Drums for electric cables
IEC 60287 Recommended current rating for cables (All latest)
BS:7671 – 2001 Requirements for electrical installations. IEE Wiring

Regulations - Sixteenth edition.

Codes and standards mean the latest. Where not specified otherwise the installation
shall generally follow the British Standards Codes of Practice/IEC standards.
2.3 Cables up to size 10-sqmm conductor size shall be copper conductor & beyond size
10-sqmm shall be aluminum. All conductors shall be stranded.
3.0 Delivery, Storage and Handling
3.1 All cables shall be new without any kinks or damage marked with, manufacturer's
name, insulating material, conductor size and voltage class on cable surface at every
1000mm approx.
3.2 Cable drum conforming to IEC 60228:1978 shall be stored on a well drained, well-
ventilated area protected from sun and rain on hard surface, preferably of concrete, so
that the drums do not sink in ground causing rot and damage to the cable drum.During
storage, periodical rolling of drums, in the direction of arrow marked on the drum, shall
be done once in 3 month through 90o. Both ends of cables shall be properly sealed to
prevent moisture ingress.
3.3 Drums shall always be rested on the flanges and not on flat sides. Movement of drums
shall always be in direction of the arrow marked on the drum. For transportation over
long distance, the drums shall either be mounted on drum wheels, trailers and pulled
by ropes, unloaded preferably by crane and rolled down carefully on suitable ramps.
While transferring cable form one drum to another, the barrel of the new drum shall
have diameter not less than the original drum
4.0 Cables
4.1 PVC Cables
4.1.1 Medium voltage cables shall be aluminium/copper conductors PVC insulated, PVC
sheathed with flame retardant low smoke (FRLSH) compound and armoured
conforming to IEC:60502 1983 Part-I. Cables shall be rated for 1100 Volts. Conductors
shall be insulated with high quality PVC base compound
4.1.2 The conductor of all cables from shall be stranded. Sector shaped stranded conductors
shall be used for cables of 50-sqmm and above.
4.2 XLPE Cables
4.2.1 The cables shall be 1100 Volt grade XLPE insulated with PVC inner sheath steel
armouring and with an outer protective sheath of flame retardant low smoke (FRLSH)
compound, conforming to IEC 60502: 1983 Cables shall have high conductivity
stranded aluminium or copper conductors and cores colour coded to the Bangladesh
Standards.
4.3 A common covering (bedding) shall be applied over the laid up cores by extruded sheath of
unvulcanised compound. Armouring shall be applied over this extruded sheath. The outer
sheath shall bear the manufacturer’s name and trade mark at every meter length. Cores shall be
provided with following colour scheme of PVC insulation
1 Core : Red/Black/Yellow/Blue
2 Core : Red and Black
3 Core : Red, Yellow and Blue
3 ½ /4 Core : Red, Yellow, Blue and Black

5.0 Installation
5.1 While shortest practicable route shall be preferred, cable runs shall follow fixed
development such as roads, footpaths etc. with proper offsets so that future
maintenance and identification are rendered easy.
5.2 Whenever cables are laid along well demarcated or established roads, the LV/MV
cables shall be laid further from the line than HV cables.
5.3 Cables of different voltages and also power and control cable shall be kept in different
trenches with adequate separation. Where available space is restricted, LV/MV cables
shall be laid above HV cables.
5.4 Where cables cross one another, the cables of higher voltage shall be laid at a lower
level than the cables of lower voltage.
5.5 Power and communication cables shall as far as possible, cross at right angles. Where
power cables are laid in proximity to communication cables the horizontal and vertical
clearances shall not normally be less than 600 mm.
5.6 Cables shall be laid in the routes marked in the drawings. Where the route is not
marked, the contractor shall mark it out on the working drawings after deciding in
consultation with Employer’s representative. Cables shall be laid in masonry trenches,
directly on walls / ceiling, inside shafts / cable trays, directly buried in ground or in
pipes/ducts as elaborated below. Cables of different voltages and also power and
control cables shall be laid in different trenches with adequate separation. Wherever
available space is restricted such that this requirement can not be met, medium voltage
cables shall be laid above HT cables as approved.
5.7 Single cables laid shall be fixed directly to walls or ceiling and supported at not more
than 600 mm. Cables laid in built-up trenches shall be on GI supports.
5.8 Cables shall be so laid that the maximum bending radius is 12 times the overall
diameter of the cable for medium voltage cables and 15 times the overall diameter for
11 kV cables or in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations whichever is
higher.
5.9 In the case of cables buried directly in ground, the cable route shall be parallel or
perpendicular to roadways, walls etc. Cables shall be laid in an excavated, graded
trench, over a sand or soft earth cushion to provide protection against abrasion. Cables
shall be protected with brick or cement tiles as shown on Drawings. Width of excavated
trenches shall be as per code of practice and drawings.
5.10 The general arrangement of cable laying shall be as per drawings. All cables shall be
full runs from panel to panel without any joints or splices.
5.11 Cables laid in Masonry Trenches
5.11.1 Wherever so specified, cables shall be laid in indoor/outdoor masonry/RCC trenches
with chequered plate/RCC covers to be provided by contractor. Cables shall be laid on
GI supports of approved design grouted in trench walls at intervals not exceeding 600
mm. If required, cables shall be arranged in tier formation inside the trench. Cables
shall be dressed properly so that the clear spacing between the cables shall not be less
than the diameter of the cable. Suitable clamps, hooks and saddles shall be used for
securing the cables in position. Complete details of this support work shall be shown in
working drawings to be prepared by the Contractors and submitted for approval of
Employer's representative before execution. Works shall be carried out only as per
approved working drawing. Wherever so specified, trenches shall be filled with fine
sand.
5.12 Cable laid On Trays/Walls

5.12.1 Where numbers of cables are run, necessary perforated cable trays shall be provided
wherever shown. Ladder cable trays shall be galvanized MS as specified in the BOQ.
5.12.2 After laying and securing the cables in a cutout, suitable water tight sealant shall be
applied as per requirement to prevent any ingress of water.
5.12.3 Cables shall be secured in position and dressed properly by means of suitable clamps,
hooks, saddles etc. Clamping of cables shall be at minimum intervals as below:
Type of Size Clamping by Fixing

Cables intervals
MV Up to and including 25- Purpose made, approved GI 300 mm

sqmm clamp minimum 2 mm thick,
19 mm wide
MV & HV 35-sqmm to 120-sqmm Clamps 3 mm thick 25 mm - 600 mm

wide
MV & HV 150-sqmm and above Clamps 3 mm thick 40 mm - 600 mm

wide

Note : The fixing intervals specified apply to straight runs. In the case of bends,
additional clamping shall be provided at 30 cm from the center of the bend on both
sides.

5.13 Buried Directly in Ground

5.13.1 Cables should be so laid that they will not interfere with under ground structures.
5.13.2 All water pipes, sewage lines or other structures which become exposed by excavation
shall be properly supported and protected from injury until the filling has been rammed
solidly in places under and around them. Cables shall be laid and protected at such
locations.
5.13.3 Any telephone or other cables coming in the way are to be properly shielded as
directed by Employer's representative.
5.13.4 Surface of the ground shall be made good so as to conform in all respects to the
surrounding ground to the satisfaction of Employers' representative.
5.14 Cable trays
5.14.1 Cable trays of sizes as per BOQ and drawings shall be of doubled bend channel
design unless otherwise stated. Cable trays shall be fabricated from minimum 2 mm
thick perforated sheet steel and shall be complete with tees, elbows, risers, and all
necessary hardware. Trays shall be hot dipped galvanized as specified. Cable trays
shall be erected in perfect level and plumb and shall comply with the following:
5.14.2 Trays shall not have sharp edges, burrs or projections injurious to cable insulation.
Trays shall include fittings such as bends, risers etc. for changes in direction and
elevation. Each run of cable tray shall be completed before laying of cables. Cable
trays shall be exposed and accessible. All bends & tees should be factory made.
5.14.3 Trays shall be supported adequately at minimum 1 m distance from the building
structure by means of painted / galvanized (as specified) MS structural members
secured to the structure by dash fasteners or by grouting. This support should be
capable of withstanding the weight equivalent of 3m length of the cables that can be
laid in the trays. At turns the support has to be double and at both ends of the bend.
The entire cable tray system shall be rigid. Cost of support arrangement shall be
included in the rates quoted for supply and installation of trays. Complete details of this
support arrangement shall be shown in working drawings to be prepared by the
Contractors and submitted for approval of Employer's representative before execution.
Works shall be carried out only as per approved working drawing. Minimum support
should be 40 X 40 X 5mm GI angle. Anchor fasteners of suitable size to be provided.
5.14.4 Cable tray shall be required to be painted for identification as approved by
engineer/employers representative.
5.15 Routing of the Cable Runs
5.15.1 Before cable laying work is undertaken, the route of the cables shall be decided in
consultation with the Employers' representative.
5.15.2 While shortest practicable route shall be preferred, cable runs shall follow fixed
development such as roads, footpaths etc with proper offsets so that future
maintenance and identification are rendered easy.
5.15.3 Whenever cables are laid along well demarcated or established roads, the LV/MV
cables shall be laid further from the kerb line than HV cables.
5.15.4 Cables of different voltages and also power and control cables shall be kept in different
trenches with adequate separation. Where available space is restricted, LV/MV cables
shall be laid above HV cables.
5.15.5 Where cables cross one another, the cables of higher voltage shall be laid at a lower
level than the cables of lower voltage.

5.15.6 Power and communication cables shall as far as possible cross at right angles. Where
power cables are laid in proximity to communications cables the horizontal and vertical
clearances shall not normally be less than 600 mm
5.16 Width of Trench
5.16.1 The width of trench shall be determined on the following basis:
(i) The minimum width of masonry trench for laying single cables shall be 350 mm
or as specified in BOQ.
(ii) Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same trench in horizontal
formation, the width of trench shall be increased such that the inter-axial
spacing between the cables except where otherwise specified shall be at least
one cable diameter .

5.16.2 There shall be a clearance of at least 150 mm between axis of the end cables and the
sides of the trench.
5.16.3 The space between multiple cables laid in same trench shall be laid as prescribed by
the manufacturer of the cable or as recommended in standards.
5.17 Depth of Trench
5.17.1 Where cables are laid in single tier formation, in ground the total depth of the trench
shall not be less than 750 mm for cables up to 1.1 kV and 1250 mm for cables above
1.1 kV. When more than one tier of cables is unavoidable and vertical formation of
laying is adopted, the depth of trench shall be increased by 300 mm for each additional
tier to be formed.
5.18 Excavation Of Trenches in Ground
5.18.1 The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever there is a
change in direction, suitable curvature of 12 times the overall diameter of the largest
MV cable and 15 times the overall diameter for 11 kV HT cable shall be provided.
Where gradients and changes in depths are unavoidable, these shall be gradual.
Excavation should be done by any suitable manual or mechanical means. Excavated
soil shall be stacked firmly by the side of the trench such that it may not fall back into
the trench.
5.18.2 Adequate precautions shall be taken not to damage any existing cables, pipes or other
such installations during excavation. Wherever bricks, tiles or protected covers or bare
cables are encountered, further excavation shall not be carried out without the approval
of the Employers' representative. The Contractor shall use a cable detector along the
route of excavation and identify existing live cables along the route and exercise
caution during excavation.
5.18.3 Existing property exposed during trenching shall be temporarily supported or propped
adequately as directed by the Employers' representative. The trenching in such cases
shall be done in short lengths, necessary pipes laid for passing cables therein and the
trench refilled as required. If there is any danger of a trench collapsing or endangering
adjacent structures, the sides shall be well shored up with timbering and / or sheathing
as the excavation proceeds. Where necessary these may even be left in place when
backfilling the trench.
5.18.4 Excavation through lawns shall be done in consultation with the Employer's
representative. Bottom of the trench shall be level and free from stone, brick, etc. The
trench shall be provided with a layer of clean dry sand cushion of not less than 80 mm
in depth before laying of cables.
5.19 Laying Of Cable In Trench in Ground
5.19.1 The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks or on a cable wheel at a suitable
location. It should be ensured that the spindle, jack etc are strong enough to carry the
weight of the drum without failure and that the spindle is horizontal in the bearings so
as to prevent the drum creeping to one side while rotating.
5.19.2 The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and uniformly without jerks
or strains. The entire cable length shall, as far as possible, be laid in one stretch.
However when this is not possible the remainder of the cable shall be removed by
flaking i.e. making one long loop in the reverse direction.
5.19.3 After the cable is uncoiled and laid over the rollers, the cable shall be lifted slightly over
the rollers beginning from one end by helpers standing about 10 meters apart and
drawn straight. The cable should then be taken off the rollers by additional helpers
lifting the cables and then laid in the trench in a reasonably straight line.

5.19.4 For short runs and cable sizes up to 50-sqmm 1.1 kV grade, the alternative method of
direct handling can be adopted with the prior approval of the Employer's
representative. If two or more cables are laid in the same trench, care should be taken
to preserve relative position. All the cables following the same routes shall be laid in the
same trench. Cables shall not cross each other as far as possible. When the cable has
been properly straightened, the cores shall be tested for continuity and insulation
resistance. The cable shall be measured thereafter.
5.19.5 Suitable moisture sealing compound / tape shall be used for sealing of the ends of
cables laid in the trench. All the cables remaining in drums after laying shall be sealed
in a dust and moisture proof manner.
5.19.6 The trench shall be provided with a layer of clean dry sand cushion of not less than 80
mm in depth before laying of cables. Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation
shall have a covering of clean dry sand of not less than 170 mm above the base
cushion of sand before the protective cover is laid. If additional tiers are formed each of
the subsequent tiers also shall have a sand cushion of 300 mm and the top most cable
shall have a final sand covering not less than 170 mm before the protective cover is
laid. A final protection to cables shall be laid to provide warning to future excavators of
the presence of the cable and also to protect the cables against accidental mechanical
damage. Such protection shall be with second class bricks of not less than 225 mm x
100 mm x 75 mm (normal standard size) laid breadth wise for the full length of the
cable to the satisfaction of the Employer's representative. Where more than one cable
is to be laid in the same trench this protective covering shall cover all the cables and
project at least 50 mm over the sides of the end cables. In addition bricks on edge shall
be placed along the entire run on either side of the cable run.
5.19.7 The trenches shall then be back filled with excavated earth free from stones or other
sharp edged debris and shall be rammed and watered in successive layers not
exceeding 300 mm. Unless otherwise specified a crown of earth not less than 50 mm in
the center and tapering towards the side of the trench shall be left to allow for
subsidence. The crown of earth should however not exceed 100 mm so as not to be a
hazard to vehicular traffic.
5.19.8 Where road berms or lawns have been cut or kerb stones displaced the same shall be
repaired and made good to the satisfaction of the Employer's representative and all
surplus earth and rocks removed to places as specified.
5.20 Route Markers
5.20.1 Route markers shall be provided along straight runs of the cables at locations approved
and generally at intervals not exceeding 25 meters. Markers shall also be provided to
identify change in the direction of the cable route and also for location of every
underground joint.
5.20.2 Route markers shall be made out of 100mm x 100mm x 5mm GI/aluminium plate
welded or bolted onto 35 mm x 35 mm x 6 mm angle iron 600 mm long duly painted
with anti-corrosive paint/embossed. Such plate markers shall be mounted parallel to
and 300 mm or so away from the edge of the trench/pipe/duct, or as directed at site.
5.20.3 Markers shall be embedded in cement concrete 1:2:4 (one cement, 2 coarse sand: 4
graded stone aggregate of 30 mm normal size). The word "Cable" and other details
such as voltage grading, size etc as required shall be painted on the marker.
5.20.4 Identification tags
5.20.5 Plastic identification tags shall be provided at every 30m. Cables shall be identified at
end terminations indicating the feeder number and the Panel / Distribution board from
where it is being laid.
5.21 Laying In Pipes / Closed Ducts

5.21.1 In locations such as road crossings, entry to buildings/poles in paved areas etc., cables
shall be laid in pipes or closed ducts.Spun reinforced concrete/GI pipes or UPVC ducts
shall be used for such purposes and the pipe shall not be less than 100 mm in
diameter for a single cable and not less than 150 mm for more than one cable. These
pipes shall be laid directly in ground without any special bed. Unless otherwise
specified the top surface of pipes shall be at a minimum depth of 1000 mm from the
ground level when laid under roads, pavements etc.
5.21.2 The pipes for road crossings shall preferably be on the skew to reduce the angle of
bend as the cable enters and leaves the crossing. Pipes shall be continuous and clear
of debris or concrete before cable is drawn. Sharp edges at ends shall be smoothened
to prevent injury to cable insulation or sheathing.
5.22 Laying Of Cables In Floors
5.22.1 Laying of cables directly in floors shall be avoided and GI pipes of adequate size shall
be used wherever necessary. However if the cables have to be laid direct in the floor
specific written approval of Employers' representative shall be obtained and the
Contractor shall cut chases, lay the cables and make good the chases to original finish.
5.23 Cable Entry Into Buildings
5.23.1 Cable entry into buildings shall be made through RCC pipes recessed in the floor. RCC
Hume pipes shall be provided well in advance for service cable entries. The pipe shall
be filled with sand and sealed at both ends with bitumen mastic to avoid entry of water.
Suitable size manholes shall be provided wherever required to facilitate drawing of
cables as per requirements. The Contractor shall submit a written request to
Employer’s/Engineer’s representative cabling for inspection of works for the following:
 On excavation and provision of sand bed at bottom of trench
 On laying of cables, and provision of sand bed over the cables
 On provision of protective cover & back filling
 On commencing termination of cable
These requests shall be serially numbered and shall be in an approved format out of
one or two formats to be submitted by the Contractor.
5.24 Cable Joints
5.24.1 Cable joints shall be resorted to and permitted only if length of cable route is more than
standard cable drum length. Cable joints shall not be permitted in any other
circumstances. Wherever unavoidable these joints shall be made with specific approval
of Employers' representative, and shall from a part of cable run / laying. Cable Jointing
shall be done only of approved make cable joints. No extra cost shall be paid for
jointing of cables.
5.25 Cable Loops
5.25.1 At the time of the installation approximately 3 meters of surplus cable shall be left as
below or as directed by Employer's representative or Engineer-in-charge.
- at each end of the cable
- on each side of underground straight through/tee/termination joints.
- at entries to buildings
This cable shall be left in the form of a loop.

5.25.2 Wherever long runs of cable length are installed cable loops shall be left at suitable
intervals as specified by the architect/clients.
5.26 Termination / Jointing Of Cables
5.26.1 All cable terminations should be nut-bolt type, irrespective of the cable size and shall
have tinned copper compression lugs. The end terminations shall be insulated with a
minimum of six half-lapped layers of PVC tape. Cable armouring shall be bonded at
both ends.
5.26.2 Soldered jointing/termination shall be totally avoided. Solder-less terminations by using
crimping tools, suitable lugs and double compression brass glands shall be used. In the
case of aluminium conductors, it is to be ensured that the conductor oxidation is
cleaned by means of emery paper and then a thin coat of tin is applied before
termination.
6.0 Testing
6.1 Tests at Manufacturer’s Works
6.1.1 Type tests – FRLSH, PVC insulated Cables shall be subjected to type tests and
acceptance test at manufacturers work as per IEC:60502:1983 carried out in
accordance with appropriate parts for testing of cable.FRLSH, XLPE cables shall be
tested as per relevant international standards. Copies of the type test reports shall be
furnished by the contractor.
6.1.2 Routine test -
(i) Conductor resistance test
(ii) High voltage test at room temperature.
Copies of routine tests carried out at manufacturers works shall be furnished along with
the cables.
6.2 Testing at Site
6.2.1 Before laying - All cables before laying shall be pressure tested for one minute with
1000 volts megger. Cable cores shall be tested for continuity, absence of cross
phasing, insulation resistance to earth/sheath/armour and insulation resistance
between conductors.
6.2.2 MV cables shall be tested upon installation with a 500V Meggar and the following
readings established:
(i) Continuity on all phases
(ii) Insulation Resistance between conductors and between all conductors and
ground
6.2.3 All test readings shall be recorded and shall form part of the completion documentation.
6.2.4 Under ground Cable routes shall be got verified with the help of cable detector.
7.0 Technical literature and test certificates to be furnished by Contractor
7.1 Contractor shall furnish following minimum technical particulars:
(i) Name of manufacturer
(ii) Standard governing specification
(iii) Manufacturer’s type designation
(iv) Rated system voltage in kV
(v) Rated continuous current in amps
(vi) Max. permissible current in amps at 400C

(vii) Short circuit current for 1 sec. in kA

(viii) Minimum permissible bending radius in mm
(ix) Overall diameter of cable/wire in mm
(x) Max. permissible length of cable in drum
(xi) Weight of cable and drum including cable
(xii) Resistance of Conductor/100m length
(xiii) High voltage with-stand test result in kV
(xiv) Insulation resistance
(xv) Thickness and material of
a. Insulation
b. Inner sheath
c. Armouring
d. Outer Sheath.
(xvi) Compound used for FRLSH properties
(xvii) Chemicals used for protection against rodent and termite attack.
(xviii) Shelf life of cable accessories for the ambient temperature specified.
(xix) Catalogues and brochures giving technical and physical details of the cable
such as current rating, de-rating factors, etc.
(xx) Type test certificates and special test results for cables offered.
(xxi) Shelf life of cable accessories for the ambient temperature specified.
(xxii) Type test certificates for cable & accessories.
(xxiii) De-rating factor with the proposed method of cable laying

SECTION: E.04
CONDUIT WIRING
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work shall cover supply, installation testing and commissioning of all
wiring in conduit and related works, earthing of distribution/sub-distribution boards, plug
sockets etc. and protection against lightning.
2.0 Standards
2.1 The following standards and rules shall be applicable
IEC 60502:1983 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables: Part 1

For working voltages up to and including 1100 V
IEC 60227-1to 5:1979 PVC Insulated cables for working voltages up to and
including 1100 Volts – specification
Conduits for electrical installations: Part 1 General

IEC 60614-1(1978)
requirements
Conduits for electrical installations: Part 3 Rigid plain

IEC 60614-2-2(1980)
conduits of insulating materials
Conduits for Electrical Installations for Pliable

IEC 60614-2-3(1990)
Conduits of Insulating Material
Conduits for Electrical Installations - Specification -

IEC 60614-2-6(1992) Part 6 : Pliable Conduits of Metal or Composite
Materials
IEC 60669-1(1998) Switches for domestic and similar purposes
ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC)
ANSI C80.6 Intermediate metal Conduit (IMC)
ANSI C80.4 Conduit fitting
IEC 60287 Recommended current ratings for cables
Bangladesh Electricity Act and Bangladesh

Electricity Rules as amended from time to time
ASTM A123 Hot-dipped galvanized for Steel Cable Tray
2.2 All standards and codes mean the latest

3.0 Conduiting
3.1 Steel Conduits
3.1.1 Conduits shall be of mild steel 1.6mm thick up to 32mm diameter and 2.0mm thick for
sizes above 32mm diameter, electric resistance welded (ERW), threaded type having
perfectly circular tubing. The conduits shall be galvanized in its manufactured form as

specified in BOQ. Conduits shall conform to IEC 60614-1(1978). Wherever specified in

the Bill of quantities, the conduits shall be galvanized.
3.2 Steel Conduit Connections
3.2.1 Connections between steel conduits shall be with screwed couplers of approved quality
and finish, ensuring screwed metal to metal contact. Length of threads in all cases of
joints shall be between 13 mm to 19 mm and sufficient to accommodate pipes to full
threaded portion of couplers or accessories. Threads and sockets shall be free from
grease and oil. Connections between screwed conduits and sheet metal boxes shall be
by means of G.I hexagon check nut fixed both inside and outside the box. Joints in
conduits and terminations shall be free of burrs and bushes shall be provided to avoid
damage to insulation of conductors while pulling them through the conduits.
Connections between GI, if required, shall be through a junction box and never directly.
3.2.2 Bends - As far as possible, the conduit system shall have minimum use of tees, elbows
and sharp bends. A conduit length shall not have more than the equivalent of two
quarter bends between two junction or draw boxes. These shall be galvanized.
3.2.3 Standard Conduit Accessories - Standard conduit accessories like bends, tees,
junction boxes, pull boxes etc. shall be heavy duty, Galvanized as specified in BOQ.
The accessories shall conform in all respects to the relevant IEC. Samples shall be got
approved through Employers’ representative before use. Only galvanized accessories
shall be used with galvanized conduits.
3.2.4 Sheet Metal Outlet/Draw/Inspection/Junction Boxes
3.2.4.1 Wherever required, outlet boxes of required sizes, approved quality, finish and
manufacture, shall be galvanized and fabricated from 1.6 mm thick MS sheets
excepting ceiling fan outlet boxes which shall be fabricated from minimum 2 mm thick
sheets. All outlet boxes shall be provided with an earth stud. The boxes shall be
protected from rust by zinc phosphate primer process. Where not galvanized as
specified, for concealed conduiting work, boxes with primer only could be embedded
while for surface conduiting work, the boxes shall be finished with minimum one coat of
enamel paint of approved colour or electro galvanized. The outlet boxes shall be so
protected at the time of fixing that no mortar find its way inside during concrete filling or
plastering. For concealed conduiting work, outlet boxes shall be completely embedded
in walls/ceilings leaving edges flush with finished wall/ceiling surface.
3.2.4.2 Boxes suitable to house modular type switches/sockets of required ratings, and fan
regulators as required shall be provided. In case the number of switches in one box is
not tallying with that available in standard manufacture, the box accommodating the
next higher number of switches shall be provided without any extra cost. In case fan
regulator/regulators is /are to be provided at a later date, suitable provision for
accommodating such regulators shall be made in the switch boxes and blank off covers
shall be provided without any extra cost. The outlet boxes shall be of MS having
external and internal surface true to finish. All boxes shall have adequate number of
knock out holes of required diameter and earth stud. Unless otherwise stated boxes
shall be located with bottom at 1200 mm above finished floor level.
3.2.4.3 Circular type / square box as per required conduit sizes, and as per relevant IEC of
approved makes shall be provided. For ceiling mounted florescent fittings, the boxes
shall be provided 300 mm off center for a 1200 mm fitting and 150 mm off center for a
600 mm fitting or to suit the fitting entry points so that the wiring is taken directly to the
down rod. 3 mm thick Perspex / hylam sheet cover of matching colour shall be
provided.
3.2.4.4 Outlet boxes for ceiling fans shall be fabricated from minimum 2 mm thick MS sheet
steel. The boxes shall be hexagonal in shape of minimum 100 mm depth and 60 mm
sides. Each box shall be provided with one 'U' shaped 15 mm diameter rod inside

securely tied to the top reinforcement of the concrete stab for a length of minimum 150
mm on either side. 3 mm thick Perspex / hylam sheet cover of matching colour shall be
provided.
3.2.4.5 Draw Boxes: Draw boxes of Circular type / square box as per required conduit sizes,
and as per relevant IEC of approved makes as required shall be provided at convenient
locations to facilitate drawing of long runs of conductors. These shall have covers of 3
mm thick Perspex / hylam sheet.
3.2.4.6 Inspection Boxes / Junction Boxes: Inspection boxes of Circular type / square box as
per required conduit sizes, and as per relevant IEC of approved makes shall be
provided at suitable location in conduit runs to permit inspection and maintenance.
These shall have covers of 3 mm thick Perspex / hylam sheet.
3.2.4.7 Hardware and screws shall be cadmium plated brass with counter sunk heads, where
as required.
3.2.4.8 In a galvanized conduit installation, only galvanized boxes shall be used.
4.0 Laying Of Conduits
4.1 Conduits shall be laid either concealed in walls and ceilings or on surface on walls and
ceilings or partly concealed and partly on surface, as required. Same rate shall apply
for concealed and surface conduiting in this contract. Conduits shall be kept at a
minimum of 100 mm from the pipes of other non-electrical services.
4.1.1 Fixing arrangement: The rigid steel conduits shall be fixed at an interval of 50 cm on
the wall / ceiling by heavy gauge saddles secured to expansion fasteners on platforms
and in service areas such as substation, S&T equipment room and pump house. The
inter-saddle spacing shall not be more than 50 cm, but spacing from fittings shall not be
more than 30 cm (measured from the center of the fitting). In passenger areas such as
entrance hall, concourse, sub-way and in operational area at non false ceiling areas,
the conduits shall be embedded in the ceiling at the time of construction, & shall be
recessed in a chase in the wall which shall be filled up neatly after erection of the
conduit.
4.1.2 Conduit joints: Conduit pipes shall be joined by means of screwed couplers and
screwed accessories conforming to IEC 61035-2-1(1993). In long runs of conduit,
inspection type coupler and accessories shall be provided at reasonable intervals. The
threaded portion on conduit pipe shall be between 11 mm and 27 mm. The threaded
portion shall be treated with anti-corrosive preventives. Cut ends on conduit pipes shall
be bur-free to avoid any damage to insulation of conductor.
4.2 Separate conduits / raceways shall be used for each of the following:
(i) Normal lights and 6A 3-pin sockets on lighting circuit
(ii) Power outlets - 16A 3-pin, 20A / 30A 2-pin + scraping earth metal clad
sockets
(iii) Emergency lighting
(iv) Telephones
(v) Fire alarm system
(vi) Public address system
4.3 Conduit layout shall be generally as indicated on drawings and the layout shall be
supplemented and complemented by contractor on site with the approval of the
Employer's representative.
4.4 The conduits shall be of ample sectional area to facilitate simultaneous drawing of
wires and permit future provision also. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40%. Maximum

number of PVC insulated 1100 Volt grade copper conductor wires shall be as per table
given below:

Nominal Cross 20 mm 25 mm 32 mm 38 mm 51 mm 64 mm
Sectional area of
conductor in sq. mm S B S B S B S B S B S B
1.5 5 4 10 8 18 12 - - - - - -
2.5 5 3 8 6 12 10 - - - - - -
4 3 2 6 5 10 8 - - - - - -
6 2 - 5 3 4 8 7 - - - - -
10 2 - 4 3 6 5 8 6 - - - -
16 - - 2 2 3 3 6 5 10 7 12 8
25 3 2 5 3 8 6 9 7
35 3 2 6 5 8 6
50 5 3 6 5
70 4 3 5 4
The above table shows the maximum capacity of conduits for a simultaneous drawing
in of cables. The columns headed ‘S’ apply to runs of conduits which have distance not
exceeding 4.25 m between draw boxes and which do not deflect from the straight by
an angle of more than 15 degrees. The columns headed ‘B’ apply to runs of conduit
which deflect form the straight by an angle of more than 15 degrees. Conduits sizes
are the nominal external diameters.
4.5 Concealed Conduiting
4.5.1 Concealed conduits in concrete members shall be laid before casting, and as may be
instructed, so as to embed the entire run of conduits and ceiling outlet boxes with a
cover of minimum 12mm concrete. Conduits shall be adequately tied to the
reinforcement to prevent displacement during casting at intervals of maximum 1 meter.
No reinforcement bars shall be cut to fix the conduits. Suitable flexible joints shall be
provided at all locations where conduits cross expansion joints in the building.
4.5.2 Concealed conduits in brick work shall be laid in chases to be cut by electrical
Contractor in brick work before plastering. The chases shall be cut by a chase cutting
electric machine. The chases shall be of sufficient width to accommodate the required
number of conduits and of sufficient depth to permit full thickness of plaster over
conduits. The conduits shall be secured in the chase by means of suitable clamps at
intervals of maximum 1 meter. The chases shall then be filled with cement and coarse
sand mortar (1:3) with 0.6-mm thick 10-15mm aperture galvanized chicken wire mesh
for bonding.
4.5.3 Entire concealed conduit work in concrete members and in brick work shall be carried
out in close coordination with progress of civil works. Should it become necessary to

embed conduits in already cast concrete members, suitable chase shall be cut in
concrete for the purpose. For minimizing this cutting, conduits of lesser diameter than
25 mm and outlet boxes of lesser depth than 50 mm could be used by the Contractor
for such extensions only after obtaining specific approval from Employers'
representative. For embedding conduits in finished and plastered brick work, the
chase would have to be made in the finished brick work. After fixing conduit in chases,
chases shall be made good in most workmanlike manner to match with the original
finish.
4.5.4 Cutting chases in finished concrete or finished plastered brick work for embedding
conduits and outlet boxes etc shall be done by the Contractors without any extra cost.
4.5.5 All the chases, as specified shall be properly finished and lined (as specified in BOQ)
and covered with suitable openable cover, flushed to the surface, screwed/hinged as
specified in BOQ.
4.6 Surface Conduiting
4.6.1 Conduits run on surfaces shall be supported through 1.6-mm thick metal saddles
fastened on metal 6 mm thick steel bracket which in turn are properly screwed to the
wall or ceiling. Saddles shall be at intervals of not more than 500 mm. Fixing screws
shall be with round or cheese head and of rust-proof materials. Exposed conduits shall
be neatly run parallel or at right angles to the walls of the building. Unseemly conduit
bends and offsets shall be avoided by using fabricated galvanized steel junction/pull
through boxes for better appearances. No cross-over of conduits shall be allowed
unless it is necessary and entire conduit installation shall be clean and neat in
appearance.
4.7 Painting Of Conduits And Boxes
4.7.1 All draw/switch/junction/fan-hook boxes shall be painted with red oxide/galvanized/zinc
passivated in their manufactured form. All un-galvanized / un-plated boxes, conduits &
accessories shall be again painted with red oxide paint as required before fixing.
Boxes, conduits and associated accessories fixed on surface (if exposed) shall, in
addition, be painted with finishing paint of approved colour and finish and make good
the damages to the surface.
4.7.2 All metallic accessories shall be painted/cold galvanized at such places where paint
has been damaged due to vice/ wrench grip/handling or any other reason.
4.8 Protection Of Conduits
4.8.1 To safeguard against filling up with mortar/plaster etc. all the outlet and switch boxes
shall be provided with temporary covers and plugs which shall be replaced by
sheet/plate covers as required. The entire conduit system including outlets and boxes
shall be thoroughly cleaned after completion of erection and before drawing in of
cables.
4.9 Bends in conduit – All necessary bends in conduit system including diversions shall be
done by bending pipes (by means of pipe bending machine ) or by inserting suitable
solid or inspection type normal bends, fittings / other accessories. Radius of bends
should not be less than 7.5 cm. No length of conduit shall have more than equivalent of
four-quarter bends from inlet to outlet.
4.10 Earthing - Continuous earth wire shall be provided for all points, outlets and sub-mains.
Earthing terminals shall be provided inside all switch boxes, outlet boxes and draw
boxes etc. The minimum size of earth conductor shall be 2.5-sqmm stranded insulated
copper wire.

5.0 Wires
Wires for various purposes will be as follows:
(i) Light and fan points 2.5-sqmm multi-strand copper conductors or

as specified in BOQ
(ii) 6/16A plug socket and group 4/6-sqmm multi-strand copper conductors or
wiring of lighting and fan as specified in BOQ
circuits
5.1 Material - Wires shall be FR PVC insulated with stranded copper conductors, unless
otherwise stated, of 1100 Volt Grade. Special parameters of FR PVC insulation like
critical oxygen index, temperature index, smoke density and flammability test shall
conform to relevant IEC and ASTM standards. All wires shall bear manufacturer’s label
and shall be brought to site in new and original packages. Manufacturer’s certificate,
certifying that wires brought to site are of their manufacture shall be furnished as
required.
5.2 Bunching Of Wires - Wires carrying current shall be so bunched in conduits that the
phase and neutral wires are drawn into the same conduit. Wires originating from two
different phases shall not be run in the same conduit.
5.3 Drawing Of Wires - The drawing of wires shall be executed with due regard to the
following:
5.3.1 No wire shall be drawn into any conduit, until all work of any nature that may cause
damage to wires is completed. Care shall be taken in pulling the wires so that no
damage occurs to the insulation of the wire. Bushes shall be provided at conduit
edges.
5.3.2 Before the wires are drawn, conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned of moisture, dust, dirt
or any other obstruction by forcing compressed air through the conduits if necessary.
5.3.3 While drawing insulated wires into the conduits, care shall be taken to avoid scratches
and kinks, which could cause breakage of conductors. There shall be no sharp bends.
5.4 Termination /Jointing Of Wires
5.4.1 Sub-circuit/ Sub-Main Wiring shall be carried out in looping system. Joints shall be
made only at distribution board terminals, switches/buzzers and at ceiling
roses/connectors/lamp holders terminals of lights/fans/socket outlets. No joints shall be
made inside conduits or junction/draw/inspection boxes.
5.4.2 Wiring conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. Joints where unavoidable,
due to any specified reasons shall be made by approved connectors. Specific prior
permission from Employers' representative in writing shall be obtained before making
such joint.
5.4.3 Insulation shall be shaved off for a length of 15 mm at the end of wire and it shall not
be removed by cutting it square or wringing. Strands of wires shall not be cut for
connecting terminals.
5.4.4 Conductors having nominal cross sectional area up to 10-sqmm shall be cage
clamped.
5.4.5 At all bolted terminals, brass flat washer of large area and approved steel spring
washers shall be used. Brass nuts and bolts shall be used for all connections.
5.4.6 The pressure applied to tighten terminal screws shall be just adequate, and should not
dent or damage or cut any strand of the conductor.

5.4.7 Switches controlling lights, fans, socket outlets etc. shall be connected to the phase
wire of circuits only.
5.4.8 Only certified and licensed wire-men shall be employed to do wiring / jointing work.
5.5 Load Balancing - Balancing of circuits in three-phase installation shall be planned
before the commencement of wiring and shall be strictly adhered to. Distribution of
circuits in three phase installation shall be as per distribution chart indicated in
drawings.
5.6 Colour Code Of Conductors - All wires shall be colour coded as follows:
Phase Colour of Wire
R Red
Y Yellow
B Blue
N Black
Earth control, if any Grey
6.0 Switches/Socket Outlets

6.1 Switches - All 6 and 16 amps switches shall be of modular flush, grid plate mounting
type, unless otherwise stated, suitable for 250 volt AC supply, made of poly carbonate
and of approved make. The switch moving and fixed contacts shall be of silver nickel
and silver graphite alloy and contact tips coated with silver. Housing of switches shall
be made from high impact resisting flame retarding and ultra violet stabilized
engineering plastic materials. Switches shall be fixed inside the box on adjustable
galvanized grid with tapped holes cadmium plated brass machine screws, leaving
ample space at the back and side for accommodating wires.
6.2 Socket Outlets
6.2.1 6/16 amps socket outlets shall be of modular , universal type, flush grid plate mounting
type, unless otherwise stated, and shall be switched, three pin type and fitted with
automatic linear safety shutters to finger proof. Socket outlets shall be made from high
impact resistant, flame retarding and ultra violet stabilized engineering plastic material.
6.2.2 Switches and sockets shall be located in the same plate. Plates for 6 amp switched/
un-switched power and telephone outlets shall be of the same size and shape.
6.2.3 An earth wire shall be provided along the wires feeding socket outlets for electrical
appliances. The earth wire shall be connected to the earthing terminal screw inside the
box. The earth terminal of the socket shall be connected to the earth terminal provided
inside the box.
6.3 Flush Plates - Switches, socket outlets, receptacles etc. in walls shall be provided with
polycarbonate moulded modular cover plates of approved colour, shape and size made
from high impact resistant, flame retarding plastic and secured to the box with counter
sunk /round head cadmium plated brass screws unless otherwise stated. Where two or
more switches are installed together, they shall be provided with one common switch
cover plate as described above with notches to accommodate all switches either in
one, two or three rows.

6.4 Lighting Fixtures

6.4.1 Light fixtures and fittings shall be assembled and installed complete as required and
ready for service, in accordance with details, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and
to the satisfaction of the Employers' representative.
6.4.2 Wires brought out from junction boxes shall be encased in GI/PVC flexible pipes as
required for connecting to fixtures concealed in suspended ceilings. Flexible pipes shall
be provided with a check nuts at both ends.
6.4.3 Pendant fixtures specified with overall lengths are subject to change and shall be
checked with site conditions and installed as required.
6.4.4 All suspended fixtures shall be mounted on ball and socket joints and fixed in position
in accordance with drawings, instructions and as approved by architect/ Employer's
representative.
6.4.5 Fixtures shall be suspended true to alignment, plumb, level and capable of resisting all
lateral and vertical forces.
6.4.6 All suspended light fixtures, fans etc. shall be provided with concealed suspension
arrangement in the concrete slab/roof members. Making provisions for such
arrangements at the appropriate stage of construction is deemed to be included in
contractors’ scope .
6.4.7 Exhaust fans shall be fixed at locations shown on the drawings. They shall be wired to
a plug socket at a convenient location near the fan.
6.4.8 All switch and outlet boxes, and fan regulators shall be bonded to earth with PVC
insulated stranded copper wire as specified.
6.4.9 Wires shall be connected to all fixtures through connector blocks/cage clamped.
6.4.10 Flexible conduits, wherever used, shall be of make and quality approved by Employer's
representative.
7.0 Drawings
7.1 Before execution of works, the Contractor shall submit the copies of drawings which
are necessary to ensure correct supply of equipment, components, fittings and material
and to enable correct erection of the installation for satisfactory and trouble free
performance as detailed in the specifications. All drawings for approval shall be
prepared and submitted by the Contractor in standard size as approved by engineer
and multiples thereof as required by the employer's representative.
7.2 Revision and modification: Approval for any revision and / or modification in job
specifications shall be taken from the Engineer/employer's representative before
implementation.
7.3 Change in construction drawings: Any change required during and / or after
approval of detailed construction drawings on account of functional requirements or in
the interest of efficient running of the system, keeping the basic parameters
unchanged, shall be carried out by the Contractor at no extra cost.
8.0 Point Wiring
8.1 System of wiring
8.1.1 Group wiring shall be used for the lighting circuits except for individual rooms and other
small cubicles where light points may be wired individually. Each group shall cater for a
load of approx. 800 watts and wiring shall be done by looping - out at each fitting as
per drawing.

8.1.2 The wiring shall be carried out strictly as per Bangladesh Rules / International Standard
Code of Practice for electrical wiring installation. The wiring shall be done on
distribution system with distribution and sub-distribution boards located at convenient
points.
8.1.3 PVC insulated, FR PVC sheathed, single core, multi-stranded copper conductor of
nominal size 2.5-sqmm shall be used for wiring of single light points, fans and 6 A plug
sockets. Or as specified for group wiring of light points and 6A / 16 A plug sockets, the
minimum conductor size used shall be 4-sqmm nominal.
8.2 Parameters - Point wiring shall be carried out as per following parameters in
concealed/surface conduit system unless otherwise stipulated.
8.2.1 Only looping system of wiring shall be adopted through-out. All accessories shall be
flush type unless otherwise stated.
8.2.2 For estimation of load, following loads per point shall be assumed:
1 Light points As per load of fixture
2 6 Amps socket outlet points 100 Watts
3 Fan points 60 Watts
4 Exhaust fan points 300 Watts or as specified
5 16 Amp socket outlet points 1000 Watts
8.2.3 Light points, fan points and 6 amp socket outlet points may be wired on a common
circuit. Each circuit shall not normally have more than a total of 10 light, fan or socket
outlets or a load of 800 watts unless otherwise aggred by engineer. Wiring from DB to
the first switch in each such circuit is defined as circuit wiring.
8.2.4 Power circuits shall normally have maximum two 16-amps socket outlet unless
otherwise stated. Separate circuit shall be run for each geyser, kitchen equipment,
window air conditioners and similar appliances.
8.2.5 Point wiring rates shall include painting of conduits and other accessories as required.
8.2.6 Point wiring rates shall include cleaning of dust, splashes of colour wash or paint from
all fixtures, fans, fittings etc. at the time of taking over of the installation.
9.0 Sub-Main Wiring / Cabling
9.1 Sub-main shall comprise of stranded copper conductor, FR PVC insulated 1100 volt
grade wires in MS/GI conduits including loop earthing, terminations etc. complete as
specified and required. Or aluminium conductor FRLS, XLPE insulated cable as
specified.
9.2 Sizes of conduits, number/ type/size of wires and loop earthing shall be as stipulated in
the schedule of quantities and/or drawings. Wires shall be drawn in the concealed or
surface conduits as required, without being damaged. For this purpose, draw boxes
shall be located at convenient locations.
9.3 Every sub-main shall run in an independent conduit with an independent earth wire of
PVC insulated stranded copper wire as specified running along the entire run of
conduit. For single phase, one earth wire shall run and for three phase two earth wires

shall run or as specified. Necessary provision of wire lengths entering and emerging
from the conduit shall be made for connections.
9.4 Measurement shall be taken of the actual conduit run containing the wires from one
point to the other.
10.0 Inspection, checks and tests
10.1 Prototype tests/routine tests as required shall be carried out by the contractor as
stipulated in special conditions of contract.
10.2 Checks before energization: On completion of works, the following checks shall be
made before energization:
10.2.1 A general inspection shall be carried out by the Engineer or his authorized
representative to verify that all works or parts thereof to be energized have been
completed with high degree workmanship and all provisions of Bangladesh Electricity
Rules (amended up-to-date) have been complied with.
10.2.2 A check shall be made that all the equipment, fittings, accessories, cables, wires and
materials are of adequate rating and conform to respective International Standards.
10.2.3 A check shall be made for adequacy of earth connections and for compliance of the
lightning protective system as per BS EN 62305: 2006.
10.3 Pre-commissioning tests – The following tests shall be carried out before putting the
installation into service.
10.3.1 Insulation resistance – The insulation resistance of the installation shall be tested. This
shall not be less than 50 divided by the number of points in the circuit in mega ohms.
10.3.2 Earth continuity – The earth continuity of various circuits shall be checked along with
Earth resistance and electrical continuity of lightning protective system.
10.4 Test Reports – Test reports shall be furnished by the Contractor in prescribed formats
as required by the Chief Electrical Inspector, duly certified by authorized
representative or the Engineer and clearance/permission obtained for energization of
the installation.
10.5 Lighting installation – The lighting installation shall be tested as per approved schedule
and the instructions of the Engineer. The tests shall include but not be limited to the
following:
10.5.1 Insulation resistance of each circuit shall be measured without the lamps being in
place. It should not be less than value specified in clause 10.3.1 above.
10.5.2 Current and voltage of all the lighting circuits shall be measured at the sub-distribution
board with all the lamps switched on to ensure that these are within designed values
and in case of 3-phase circuits, the load shall be balanced, if required.
10.5.3 After inserting all the lamps and switching on all the circuits, minimum and maximum
illumination levels shall be measured in all areas and their conformity with designed
levels established. The test results shall be entered in the approved pre-commissioning
proforma and submitted to the Employer's representative for approval before final
commissioning.
10.5.4 Before commissioning standby supply, its phase sequence should be tested to ensure
correct phase sequencing (from main & standby sources in all possible combinations).
11.0 Conduiting and Accessories Only
11.1 Scope
11.1.1 The scope of work shall cover supply and installation of conduiting and conduit junction
boxes and accessories with pull wires (fish wires)

11.1.2 The various systems and the complete wiring will be by others. These are public
address telephone, signal and telecoms, CCTV, master & slave clock, data
communications, signage, AFC, SCADA & fire detection & alarm etc.
11.2 Conduits
11.2.1 Conduits shall be heavy gauge galvanized and shall generally be as specified under
section “Conduit wiring”.
11.3 Cables and Wires
11.3.1 The type of cables and the services shall be as follows: (By others)
Indoor
(i) Laid on wall or cable tray – Multipair, PVC insulated & armoured and sheathed
and of specified number of pairs.
(ii) Inside conduit – Twin core or 1 pair PVC insulated wire of specified diameter of
conductor, data communication wires, music system wires etc.
Outdoor – Multipair PVC insulated jelly filled and armoured and with wires of specified
diameter of conductor (by others).
11.3.2 All Multipair cables and wires shall have tinned copper conductor and with wires of
specified diameter and shall be color coded in twisted pairs and with a rip cord (by
others)
11.4 Tag blocks
11.4.1 The telephone tag blocks shall be KRONE or equivalent suitable for the multicore
telephone cables and shall accommodate tin-plated phosphor bronze connectors
providing economical and reliable splicing. Connectors shall be spliced un-skinned
cables up to 0.6mm diameter and shall terminate both “in” & “out” lines.
11.4.2 The tag blocks shall be mounted inside fabricated galvanized sheet steel boxes with
removable hinged covers and shall be fully accessible. The enclosure shall be powder
coated.
11.5 Installation of Conduits and Accessories
11.5.1 The installation of conduits shall generally be as specified under section “Conduit
Wiring”.
11.5.2 The final branch connections with single pair cables by others shall be in conduits and
the maximum number of cables in each conduits shall be as per clause 4.4. The
contractor shall request for all necessary inputs on wiring and location of various
systems before taking up conduiting works and prepare working drawings for approval.

SECTION: E.05
INDOOR LIGHTING & FANS

1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work shall cover the supply, installation and testing, and commissioning
of lighting system comprising light fittings LED, florescent, metal halide, FL or SON
type with chokes, control gear, lamps, fixing arrangement, fans (ceiling & exhaust),
sockets etc. as specified.
2.0 Standards
2.1 All codes and standards mean the latest. Where not specified otherwise the installation
shall generally follow the relevant International code/British Standard Codes of
Practice.
3.0 General Requirements
3.1 The lux levels to be achieved in various areas of station buildings, both in normal and
emergency conditions are indicted in the table below. Contractor shall verify and demonstrate
the achieving of the light level as per the table.
SN Activity Area Illumination
Normal (Lux) Emergency (Lux)
Passenger area
1 Circulating area 30 – 50 5–8
2 Entrance area 200 5 – 30
3 Concourse 250 5 – 37.5
4 Booking counters 300 5 - 45

Ticketing machines (Localized)
Time table
5 Passenger staircase / subway 100 - 150 5 – 22.5
6 Escalators 250 5 – 37.5
7 Platforms (General) 200 5 – 30
Platforms (Edge) 250 5 – 37.5
Operation areas
1 Control room 300-500 75
2 Equipment rooms and 200-300 5 – 45

Other operation areas
Cable distribution

Void area
1 Void area 5 min. 5
Service illumination will be working condition level
3.2 All fixtures shall be complete with accessories and fixings necessary for installation
whether so detailed under fixture description or not.
3.3 Fixture housing, frame or canopy shall provide a suitable cover for the fixture outlet box
or fixture opening.
3.4 Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights as detailed on the drawings or instructed
on site by the Employer's representative.
3.5 Fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes shall be provided with hangers to adequately
support the complete weight of the fixture tightly secured to a fixture stud in the outlet
box. Extension pieces shall be installed where required to facilitate proper installation.
Design of hangers and method of fastening other than shown on the drawings or herein
specified shall be submitted to the Employer's representative for approval.
3.6 Pendant fixtures within the same room or area shall be installed plumb and at a uniform
height from the finished floor. Adjustment of height shall be made during installation as
per Employer's representative.
3.7 Flush mounted and recessed fixtures shall be installed so as to completely eliminate
light leakage within the fixture and between the fixture and adjacent finished surface.
3.8 Fixture shall be completely wired and constructed to comply with the regulations and
standards for Electric Lighting Fixtures, unless otherwise specified. Fixtures shall bear
manufacturer’s name and the factory inspection label unless otherwise approved.
3.9 Fixture with visible frames shall have concealed hinges and catches. Pendant fixtures
and lamp holders shall be provided with ball type aligners or similar approved means.
Recessed fixtures shall be constructed so as to fit into an acoustic tile ceiling or plaster
ceiling plaster rings/flanges shall be provided for plaster ceiling. Fixtures with hinged
diffuser doors shall be provided with spring clips or other retaining device to prevent the
diffuser from moving.
3.10 Detailed catalogue for all fixtures, or, if so required by the Employer's representative
sample fixtures shall be submitted for approval to the Employer's representative before
orders for the fixtures are placed. Shop drawings for non-standard fixture types shall be
submitted for approval to the Employer's representative.
3.11 Emergency lighting shall be supplied from UPS, designed to meet the requirements of
illumination
3.12 Recessed fixtures shall be constructed so that all components are replaceable without
removing housing from the ceiling.
3.13 Lamp shall be supplied and installed in all lighting fixtures furnished under this contract.
All lamps shall be rated for 230 volts. Lamps used for temporary lighting service shall
not be used in the final lamping of fixtures units. Lamps shall be of wattage and type as
shown on the drawings and schedule. Where not shown, the details shall be
ascertained from the Employer's representative before procurement.
3.14 Lamps for permanent installation shall not be placed in the fixtures until so directed by
the Employer's representative, and this shall be accomplished directly before the
building portions are ready for occupation.

4.0 Light Emitting Diode lights.

4.1 The LED light should be latest and compliant to relevant IEC 60598-1, 2, 3, IEC 62031
and IEC/PAS 62612 as per the application with their latest edition. The contractot have
to submit type test certificate / performance certificate from the accredited laboratory
for approval of vender and light model.
4.2 Fixture
4.2.1 Degree of Ingress protection of enclosure of complete fixtures shall be

at least IP-66 or as per BOQ.
4.2.2 The fixture shall be suitable to work under following ambient conditions.
o Temperature variation of -100C to 500C .
o Atmosphere - The equipment shall be designed to work in coastal, humid, salt

laden and corrosive atmosphere.
4.2.3 Housing, shall be Extruded /Pressure die cast Aluminium, conforming to

relevant standards, polyester powder coated of at least 55 microns) and high U.V. &
corrosion resistance.
4.2.4 Heat sink used should be extruded Aluminium or Pressure Die-Cast

Aluminium having high conductivity .
4.2.5 Luminaire should be covered with suitable Glass or diffuser with High
Transitivity. Outdoor luminaire shall be with clear toughened glass or clear
polycarbonate cover.
4.2.6 Lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed for continuous

trouble free operation under diverse atmospheric conditions without deterioration of
materials.
4.2.7 The fixture should conform to applicable IEC 60598 (All parts &
amendments) and should have the associated LM-79 report (for Electrical and
photometric test methodology for LED lighting) from NABL/UL accredited lab. Test
report shall be submitted along with the bid.
4.2.8 The fixture should have a surge protection of 10 KV.
4.2.9 Provision of termination of 3C X 1.5 Sqmm armoured cable.

Termination of cable should not affect the IP protection of Light.
4.2.10 The fixture shall have suitable mounting arrangement on grille of viaduct
parapet as per site requirement and as per lighting design.
4.3 LED: Approved makes are Philips-Lumileds, Osram, Nichia, Cree / Seoul
Semiconductor / Approved Equivalent. Manufacturer should have LM-80 report and
with projected life as per TM-21. Test report shall be submitted along with relevant
catalogues.

High lumen efficacy LEDs suitable for the application along with following features
shall be used:
a) LED Efficacy at the chip level shall > 120 lumen/watt (For High power LED).
b) The system luminous efficacy of LED luminaire’ shall be > 80 lumen/watt for high
wattage luminaries
c) Adequate heat sink with proper thermal management shall be provided.
d) Power factor of complete fitting shall be more than 0.9
e) LED shall be surface mounted type duly soldered to PCB by Reflow system. The
Solder used shall be ROHS compatible for environment friendliness.
f) Input frequency range shall be between 50Hz±3%.
g) Colour rendering index CRI >=70 as specified in item description.
h) Correlated Colour Temperature shall be in the range of 4000 K - 6500 K as specified in

item description.
4.4 LED driver
LED driver shall have following features:
a) Input voltage Range within 160V(RMS) to 270V (RMS)
b) Driver shall be designed to withstand 10 KV surge protection.
c) Output voltage of the driver shall be designed to meet the Power Requirement of the
system.
d) Output voltage ripple should be within 3%
e) Output over voltage protection 125 V DC
f) Full Load Efficiency ≥ 85%
g) Total Harmonic Distortion
h) For 0- 50 W for shall be less than 25%
i) Above 50 W rating shall be less than 15%.
j) Current waveform should meet EN 61000-3-2
k) LED Driver shall withstand voltage of 320V for 2 hours and restore normal working
when normal voltage is applied

l) The driver should comply to CISPR 15 for limits and methods of measurement of Radio
Disturbance characteristics
m) The equipment should comply to IEC 61547 for EMC immunity requirements
n) The control gear should be compliant to IEC 61347-2-13, IEC 62031 and IEC 62384.
4.5 General
The lumen maintenance of the LED lightings shall not be less than 70% after 50,000
hours i.e. L70 (B50).
The supplier shall provide evidence that the LED chipset manufacturer has the patent
right to produce the supplied LED chipset to avoid infringement of white LED patent.
4.6 Fluorescent fittings

4.7 Only single and /or two lamp HF Electronic ballast shall be used in any one fixture.
4.8 All fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with separate wiring channel with cover plate
and an earth terminal. All screws shall be chromium plated brass screws. Lamp and
starter holders shall be out of tough moulded plastic with spring loaded rotor type
contactors rendered shock and vibration proof. Condensers shall be low loss paper
impregnated hermetically sealed. Internal wiring shall be neatly clipped and where by
passing the ballast, a suitable heat resistant barrier or sleeve shall be provided.
4.9 Surface mounted fixtures longer than two feet shall have one additional point of support
besides the outlet box fixture stud when installed individually. Pendant individually
mounted fixtures four feet long and smaller shall be provided with twin stem/conduit
hangers. Stems shall have ball aligners or similar devices and provided for a minimum
of 25-mm vertical adjustment. Stems shall be of appropriate length to suspend fixtures
at required mounting height.
4.10 Lamps shall have bi-pin bases and a minimum guaranteed life of 17000 burning hours
and a lumen output of 2900.Lamp should have free replacement for one year from the
date of installation. The date of installation shall be from the date of handing over the
work O&M. Lamp shall be T-5, high efficiency type.
4.11 Fluorescent tube mirrors optics luminaire as specified in BOQ with pre-anodized
reflector and with/without clear Poly carbonate/clear acrylic cover-side hinged with IP-
54/20 (and above) protection respectively. The luminaire, suitable for surface/recess
mounting, shall consist of a housing of single piece channel with minimum spot welds,
adequate glare control, light emitting angle of the order of 60-55 degree, ensuring
maximum reduction in possibility of corrosion due to trapped moisture. It shall
incorporate accessories such as heavy-duty electronic ballast, push fit type lamp
holders, duly connected up to a terminal block. An earthing terminal shall be provided
to enable connection of the earth wire to the metallic housing of the luminaire.
Provision shall be made for the main connection directly at the back of the housing. A
suitably designed pre-anodized reflector system as required for obtaining a high optical
efficiency and to achieve a wide light distribution shall be incorporated in the luminaire.
The fixing of the reflector assembly in the housing shall be done by means of stainless
steel clips for ease of maintenance. The luminaire shall have a clear toughened glass/
or non yellowing acrylic/poly-carbonate, UV stabilized cover Guaranteed for 5 years
with gasket and suitable fixing arrangement as specified in BOQ and drawings. Long
life efficient FL Tubes (similar to Trulite of M/s Philip) suitable for day light shall be

provided. Recessed type fluorescent tube, Mirror Optic luminaire, incorporating all
constructional features as indicated above shall be provided.
Where required to provide surface type luminaire in place of recess type or vice versa,
the suitable luminaire as per the site conditions as approved by the engineer or
Employer’s representative shall be provided without additional cost on quoted rates of
the above.
4.12 Industrial fluorescent luminaire (As applicable): The luminaire as specified in BOQ,
suitable for surface mounting, shall comprise a stove-enameled reflector, reflecting
white from inside, fabricated from CRCA sheet, fitted to a base channel by means of a
locking device be complete with capacitor, rotor, lock type lamp holders, electronic
ballast pre-wired with PVC Insulated, PVC sheathed, multi-stranded ,copper conductor
with protection level of IP 55 or IP 65 as specified.
4.13 Box type 2X28 Watt fitting used for public utility areas as specified shall be surface
mounting ceiling suitable, CRCA sheet steel, powder coated, opal acrylic non-yellowing
Guaranteed for 5 years cover with electronic ballast and suitable diffuser conform to at
least IP-20.
5.0 Luminaires and accessories - The luminaires and accessories shall be as specified on
drawings. However a brief description of various type of fittings and there purpose is being
given for the purpose of genegear understanding:
SN Description Proposed for
1 Platform rear portion, concourse

corridor, staircases
2 Platform edge lighting
3 For areas having false ceiling such

as concourse, SCR, TOM etc.
4 Refuge collection, AC outdoor unit

area, security room etc.
5 ASS, ESR, DG, Pump room, SER,

TER and other equipment rooms
6 All entrances and connecting bridge
7 General purpose as required
8 Staff toilets, locker room
9 Decorative lights at the entrances

only
10 Platform edge lighting
11 Parking, Circulating Area, Service

Road etc.
6.0 Plug-sockets - The 3-pin 6A/16A plug Universal socket shall be combination socket
and switch and switch (on the live side) suitable for use with either 6A plug or 16A plug.

The switches and sockets shall be enclosed type flush mounted switches of 230 volt ac
grade. These shall be provided with approved poly carbonate modular cover plates,
secured to the box with counter sunk screw. Where more than one switch occurs in
same location, they shall be installed in gangs under one cover plate.
7.0 Time switches
7.1 Spring reserve 24 hour dial time switches shall be suitable for operation on a 230 volt
50Hz ac supply and shall be driven by a self-starting synchronous motor with a spring
reserve mechanism which will enable the clock to continue to function for a period of at
least 30 hours after interruption of the supply. Separate motor and switch terminals
shall be provided. Switch contacts shall be rated at 20 amperes
7.2 Spring reserve - solar dial time switches shall be suitable for operation on a 230 volt
50Hz ac supply and shall be driven by a self-starting motor with a spring reserve
mechanism which will enable the clock to continue to function for a period of at least 30
hours after interruption of the supply.
7.3 Separate motor and switch terminals shall be provided. Switch contacts shall be rated
at 20 amperes.
7.4 The time switch shall be fitted with a 24-hour dial complete with one set of ON and OFF
levers. A selective day omitting device shall also be provided. The time switch shall be
provided with an "ON-OFF" by-pass switch to completely over-ride pre-set switching
functions.
7.5 For safety reasons, where lighting switches occur in different phases they must be
separated by a distance of not less than 2.0 m unless phase barrier type switches are
used. This type of switch is only to be used when shown on the drawing or on the
specific instruction of the Employer's representative.
8.0 Electronic Ballast for Fluorescent Lamps
8.1 Electronic ballasts shall be fitted with the fluorescent lamp luminaires. Ballast shall be
completely enclosed inside sheet steel casing and shall have a corrosion resistant
finish. Ballasts shall contain a thermosetting type compound not subject to softening or
liquefying under any operating conditions or upon ballast failure. Compound shall not
support combustion. All ballasts shall be of high power factor compensated to above
0.95 PF.
8.2 The ballast shall be designed to work satisfactorily at dry bulb temperature of 50 C
and relative humidity up to 100% in a highly polluted metropolitan atmosphere. The
equipment shall function continuously without any noise or hum. The installation is
prone to vibration because of continuous train operation.
8.3 The ballast shall meet or exceed the IEC-60928 (1995-02), IEC 60929 (1990-12).
8.4 Ballast shall comprise electrical and electronic components giving stabilized power
output, surge suppression, radio frequency suppression and other protective devices
for ensuring satisfactory performance and reliability of the ballast. It is inserted between
the supply and one or more fluorescent lamps and serves mainly to limit the current of
lamp(s) to the required value.
8.5 Following Ballasts shall be used in conjunction with fluorescent tubular lamps of following
description:
Type-I 1x28W (1200 mm long)
Type-II 2x28W (1200 mm long)
Type-III 4x14W (600 mm square)

8.6 All electronic ballasts for 28W fluorescent lamps shall also be suitable for use with 40W
fluorescent lamps. Similarly ballast for 18W fluorescent lamps shall also be suitable for
20W fluorescent lamps.
8.7 The ballast shall be suitable for operation with a supply voltage ranging from 170V to
270V. The power factor of the fluorescent lamp circuit with electronic ballast shall not
be less than 0.95.
8.8 Total consumption of 28W fluorescent lamp along with electronic ballast should not
exceed 32W at its rated input voltage of 230V AC while maintaining the illumination
level at a minimum of 95% of the illumination measured by connecting the same
fluorescent lamp with reference ballast at 230V AC.
8.9 The operation of the ballast shall be silent i.e. without any humming noise or vibration.
The ballast shall conform to EN 55015, EN 55022 and EN 61000-3-2 to suppress
RFI/EMI generation.
8.10 In the case of 2 x 28 W fluorescent fixtures, the Electronic Ballast / Digital Dimming HF
Ballast shall have the feature that even if one out of two nos. 28W tube is not working,
the other 28W tube shall keep on working.
10.0 Ceiling /wall fans & Exhaust fans
10.1 Ceiling fans shall be of 1400mm sweep heavy duty conforming to international
standard complete with fan suspension stem, canopies and regulators. 30-cm
suspension stem shall be standard accessory and stems shall be heavy-duty steel
tubes . The stem shall be painted with enameled paint. The fan shall have a junction
box with MS hook of minimum size 150-mm diameter fixed in recess of ceiling and
covered with sun-mica sheet of minimum 3-mm thickness. The fan clamp shall be
fabricated from new metal and shall be as close fitting as possible. The suspension rod
shall be seamless steel tube.
10.2 Wall/bracket fans shall be propeller type with low noise levels and of diameters
specified. Fans shall be mounted on a pre-embedded hook with hard rubber isolator.
Regulators shall be no-step type mounted in the switch box. The box in all such cases
shall be large enough to accommodate the regulator and switches. One sample box
with top cover shall be got approved before procurement. Man coolers of suitable size
& sweep as specified, 1440 rpm, suitable for 415 V, 1-phase, Low noise level of 80-
90dB or as specified and approved shall be provided at platform & concourse areas.
10.3 Exhaust fan – The exhaust fan shall be of size 300/450-mm as specified and required
and 900 rpm/1440 rpm and shall conform to international standard and heavy duty
conforming to. The fans shall be robust, having double ball bearings and low noise.
11.0 Inspection & tests
Prototype tests/routine tests as required shall be carried out by the contractor as
stipulated in special conditions of contract.

SECTION: E.06
PROTECTIVE EARTHING
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work shall cover earthing stations (earth mats and earth electrodes),
laying copper/GI earth strips and connecting the power panels, DBs, switch boards and
other equipments such as pumps, PLCs of BMS etc.
1.2 All the non-current carrying metal parts of electrical installation shall be earthed
properly. All metal conduits, cable trays, trunking, cable sheaths, switchgear,
distribution fuse boards, light fittings and all other parts made of metal shall be bonded
together and connected by means of specified earthing conductors to an efficient
earthing system. All earthing shall be in conformity with Bangladesh Electricity Rules.
1.3 The Earthing System shall totally comprise the following:
(i) Earth mats and Electrodes as per IEEE 80: 2000
(ii) BS-7430 or IEC 62561-7
(iii) Earthing Leads
(iv) Earth Conductors
(v) Residual current earth leakage circuit breakers where applicable as per IE rules
61A
1.4 All three phase equipments shall have two separate and distinct body earths and single
phase equipment shall have a single body earth.
1.5 Earthing of transformer neutral, DG set, S&T equipments (clean earth electrodes only),
BMS equipment, other items shall be carried out as per drawings.
1.6 All the earthing strips shall be buried in floor or wall as required and all the fastening
(by nut bolts) of earthing strips shall be tag welded as well.
2.0 Standards
2.1 The following standards and rules shall be applicable:
(i) Bangladesh Electricity and Bangladesh Electricity,as

amended
(ii) IEEE 80: 2000 Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding
(iii) BS-7430 IEC Earthing

62561-7
shall generally follow the International Standard Code of Practice or the British
Standard Code.
3.0 Earthing Material
3.1 Materials of which the protective system is composed shall be resistant to corrosion or
be adequately protected against corrosion. Adequate margin for corrosion should be

taken for the selection of the size. The material shall be as specified in the schedule of
quantities BOQ and shall comply to the following requirements:
3.2 Copper - When solid or stranded copper wire is used it shall be of the grade ordinarily
required for commercial electrical work generally designated as being of 98%
conductivity when annealed,.
3.3 Galvanized Steel - Galvanized steel used shall be thoroughly protected against
corrosion by hot dipped Zinc coating. The material coating shall withstand the test
specified as per relevant standard.
3.4 The strips to be used shall be in maximum lengths available as manufactured normally
avoiding unnecessary joints.
4.0 Earth Stations
4.1 Earth Mats
4.1.1 Earth mat shall be constructed as per IEEE 80 – 2000. MS round / flats should be used
for constructing earth mat of adequate size (horizontal and vertical conductors) and at
depth of 700 – 1000 mm from ground as per drawings. Adequate number of risers shall
be brought from earth mat for further connection to ASS equipment and downstream
equipment. Main earth terminals shall be provided in ASS, DG and pump room as
required. The resistance of the earth mat should not be more than 1Ω.
4.2 Plate Earthing Station
4.2.1 The earthing station shall be as shown on the approved working drawing. The earth
electrodes shall be 600 x 600 x 6.3mm GI plate / 600 x 600 x 3 mm copper plate
electrode as required. The earth resistance shall be maintained with a suitable soil
treatment and watering arrangement as per approved working shown on drawings or
as directed at site. Excavated soft soil shall be thoroughly mixed with 6 percent by
weight of common salt with 10 percent by weight of water and alternate layers of
charcoal and filled in the earth pit. Independent earth shall have same specification
subject to meeting the earthing value criterion for communication system.
4.2.2 The resistance of each earth station should not exceed 1 Ω.
4.2.3 The earth lead shall be connected to the earth plate through copper/brass bolts as per
approved working drawings.
4.3 Pipe Earthing Station
4.3.1 The pipe earth shall be as shown on the approved working drawing and shall be used
for equipment earth grid. The earth electrode shall be 3.0m long, 50mm diameter, 5mm
thick galvanized steel pipe. The earth resistance shall be maintained with a suitable
soil treatment as shown on approved working drawings and as per plate electrodes.
4.3.2 The resistance of each earth station should not exceed 2 Ω. In case of values
exceeding 2 Ω, the employer may approve such values if the Chief Electrical
Inspectorate’s written approval is obtained by the contractor at his own cost and risk
4.3.3 The earth lead shall be fixed to the pipe with a clamp and safety set screws. The
clamps shall be permanently accessible.
4.4 Number of Earth Stations

4.4.1 Metallic covers or supports of all medium or HT apparatus or conductors shall, in all
cases be connected to not less than two separate and distinct earth electrodes.
4.5 Location of Earth Electrode
4.5.1 The following guidelines shall be followed for locating the earth electrodes

4.5.2 An earth electrode shall not be situated less than 3 meters from any building. The
excavations for electrode shall not affect the column footings or foundations of the
buildings. Entrances, pavements and road ways shall not be used for locating the
earth electrode. In such cases electrode may be further away from the building.
4.5.3 Earth mat locations – Earth mats shall be constructed at a suitable place in the station
area as near to ASS as possible.
4.5.4 The location of the earth electrode / mats shall be such where the soil has reasonable
chance of remaining moist, as far as possible.
4.6 Method of Installing Watering Arrangement
4.6.1 In the case of plate earth electrode, a watering pipe of 50mm diameter of medium class
GI Pipe shall be provided and attached to the electrode. A funnel with mesh shall be
provided at the top of this pipe for watering the earth. The watering funnel attachment
shall be housed in masonry enclosure of not less than 300 x 300 x 300 mm. A cast
iron/MS frame with cover having identity mode “EARTH” and having locking
arrangement shall be suitably embedded in the masonry enclosure.
5.0 Earth leads and connections
5.1 The strip earthing leads shall be connected to the Earth Electrode / Earth mat at one
end and to the main equipment at the other end. The earthing lead shall connect to the
earthing network in the installation.
5.2 Earth lead shall be bare copper or galvanized steel as specified with sizes shown on
approved working drawings. Copper lead shall have a phosphor content of not over
0.15 percent. Galvanized steel buried in ground shall be protected with bitumen and
hessian wrap or polythene faced hessian and bitumen coating. At road crossings
necessary hume pipes or UPVC Pipes shall be laid. Earth lead run on surface of wall or
ceiling shall be fixed on saddles or wall so that the strip is at least 8mm away from the
wall surface.
5.3 All earth strips shall be jointed as follows:
Copper : Copper riveting with 80mm fish plate and brazing with at
least 80mm brazing as a lap joint along the length
Galvanized : Lap welding with 50mm minimum lap Steel: Overlay - not
less than 50 mm in all cases
5.4 Strip earthing leads shall be of copper/GI and as per specifications.

5.5 The buried strip earthing lead shall be in trench not less than 0.5 m deep. If conditions
necessitate use of more than one earthing lead, they shall be laid as widely distributed
as possible, preferably in a single straight trench or in a number of trenches radiating
from one point.
5.6 In the case of plate earth electrode, the earthing lead shall be securely bolted to the
plate with two bolts, nuts, check nuts and washers as required. All materials used for
connecting the earth lead with electrode shall be GI in case of GI Pipe and GI plate
earth electrodes or tinned brass in case of Copper plate electrode.
5.7 Connection of Earthing Conductors
5.7.1 Main earthing conductors shall be taken from the earth connections at the substation to
the earth bar at the main switch boards in the TN-S configuration and the earth bar
may also be directly earthed as in Bangladesh TN-S.
5.7.2 Sub-mains earthing conductors shall run from the earth bar at the main switch board to
the sub-distribution boards and to the final distribution boards.

5.7.3 Loop earthing conductors shall run from the final distribution boards and shall be
connected to any point on the main/sub-main earthing conductor, or its distribution
board.
5.7.4 Metal conduits, cable sheathing and armouring shall be earthed at the ends adjacent to
switch boards at which they originate, or otherwise at the commencement of the run by
an earth bonding conductor in effective electrical contact with cable sheathing.
Switches, accessories, lighting fitting etc shall be effectively connected to the Loop
Earthing Conductors. A metallic conduit shall not be considered as the only protective
earth conductor.
5.7.5 Point wiring for lights, fans, ceiling fans, exhaust fans, 6A & 16A sockets and the like
and sub-main wiring, shall all have an earth continuity conductor (ECC) with the same
cross section and type of wires used, the minimum in this case being 2.5-sqmm
copper.
5.8 Prohibited Connections
5.8.1 Neutral conductor, sprinkler pipes, or pipes conveying gas, water, or inflammable
liquid, structural steel work, metallic enclosures, metallic conduits and lighting
protection system conductors shall not be used as a means of earthing an installation
or even as a link in an earthing system. However, these are to be effectively earth
bonded.
5.9 Resistance To Earth
5.9.1 No earth electrode shall have a greater ohmic resistance than 3 Ω as measured by an
approved earth testing apparatus. In rocky soil the resistance may be up to 5 Ω. The
electrical resistance measured between earth connection at the main switchboard and
any other point on the completed installation shall be low enough to permit the passage
of current necessary to operate fuses or circuit breakers.
6.0 Equipment earthing
6.1 All apparatus and equipment transmitting or utilizing power shall be earthed as per the
drawings.
6.2 The earth continuity conductor may be drawn inside the conduit in which case, it should
be insulated.
6.3 Metallic conduit shall not be accepted as an earth continuity conductor. A separate
insulated/bare earth continuity conductor of size related to phase conductor shall be
provided. Non-metallic conduit shall have an insulated earth continuity conductor of the
same size as above. All metal junction and switch boxes shall have an inside earth
stud to which the earth conductor shall be connected. The earth conductor shall be
distinctly coloured (green) for easy identification.
6.4 Armoured cables shall be earthed by 2 bonding earth connections to the armouring at
both the ends and the size of connection being as above. In multiple cables entering a
panel/DB, the cable joints shall be bonded together using a bonding wire selected on
the basis of the largest size of cable in the group. In the case of unarmored cable, an
earth continuity conductor shall either be run outside along the cable. Three phase
power panels and distribution boards shall have 2 distinct earth connections of the size
correlated to the incoming cable size. In case of single phase DB’s a single earth
connection is adequate. Similarly for 3-Phase and 1-Phase isolating switches there
shall be 2 and 1 earth connections respectively, sizes being correlated to the incoming
cable.
6.5 Three Phase motors and other 3-Phase apparatus shall have 2 distinct earth
connections of size equal to incoming feeder size. For 1-Phase motor and 1-Phase
apparatus, the single earth connections shall be provided of the above size.

7.0 Artificial treatment of soil

7.1 If the earth resistance is too high and the multiple electrodes do not give adequate low
resistance to earth, as specified in clause no. 4.0, then the soil resistivity immediately
surrounding the earth electrodes shall be reduced by adding sodium chloride, calcium
chloride, sodium carbonate, copper sulphate, salt and soft coke or charcoal in suitable
proportions.
8.0 Chemical Earthing
8.1 Testing
8.2 The following earth resistance values shall be measured with an approved earth megger
and recorded.
(i) Each earthing station / mat
(ii) Earthing system as a whole
(iii) Earth continuity

SECTION: E.07
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work shall cover supply, installation and testing of air and earth
terminations and down conductors. Protection of buildings against lightning shall be
done in accordance with Bangladesh Electricity Act and Bangladesh Electricity Rules
and include the provision of a parallel path lightning system complete with air terminal
conductors, ground terminals interconnecting conductors and other fittings required for
the complete system.
2.0 Standards
2.1 The following standards shall apply:
NFPA 78/1989 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection

System
Bangladesh Electricity Act and Bangladesh Electricity

Rules, as per latest amended
shall generally follow relevant British Standard Codes of Practice.
3.0 Air Terminations
3.1 The air termination shall be multiple point type of copper/brass material generally as
shown on approved working drawings. The stem and multi-point head shall be erected
on the roof with a 150 x 150 x 6mm stainless steel (SS) base plate with a threaded
socket of the same material welded to it. The base plate shall be embedded in a
concrete block to hold the elevation rod in a vertical position. The elevation rod shall be
one single rod without any joints.
4.0 Down Conductor
4.1 The down conductor shall follow the most direct path possible between the air
termination and the earth termination generally as shown on the drawings. The down
conductor shall be free of sharp bends, upturns and kinks and clamped to the stem of
the air termination by means of gun metal clamps. Each down conductor shall have an
independent earth termination. Minimum size of the down conductor shall be 25 x 3
mm stainless steel (SS).
4.2 The down conductor shall be clamped to the building outer wall at 600-mm centers.
Joints in the down conductors shall be avoided as far as possible. However, in any
case, joints shall not be made below ground level. Where joints are made care shall be
taken so as to exclude any moisture. Bimetallic connectors shall be used where
dissimilar metals are to be jointed. All joints shall be tinned, soldered or double-riveted.
4.3 A testing link shall be provided for each down conductor. Testing links shall be of gun
metal or SS 304 (18/8 stainless steel, European norm 1.4301 ) or as specified.
5.0 Earth termination
5.1 The earth terminals and earth leads shall be as specified for earth station and earthing
leads under section ‘EARTHING’.
6.0 Testing

6.1 The entire installation shall be tested in accordance with the International Standard
Code and the ground resistance values shall be recorded for earthing Terminal (each)
and earthing system (as a whole).
7.0 Testing Points
7.1 Each down conductor shall be provided with a testing point in a position convenient for
testing but inaccessible for interference. No connection other than one direct to an
earth electrode shall be made below a testing point. Testing points shall be of GI.
8.0 Design Considerations
8.1 The entire lightning protective system shall be mechanically strong to withstand the
mechanical forces produced in case of a lightning stroke.
8.2 The lightning protective system shall be so installed that it does not spoil the
architectural or aesthetic beauty of the buildings.
8.3 A vertical air termination where provided need not have more than one point and shall
project at least 30 cm above the project, salient point or network on which it is fixed.
8.4 Horizontal air terminations shall be so interconnected that no part of the roof is more
than 9 m away from the nearest horizontal termination.
8.5 Horizontal air terminations shall be coursed along contours such as ridges, parapets
and edges of flat roof, and where necessary over flat surfaces in such a way as to join
each air termination to the rest and should themselves form a closed network.
8.6 All metallic finials, chimneys, ducts, vent pipes, railings, gutters, metallic flag staff etc.
on or above the main surface of the roof of the structure shall be bonded to, and form
part of the air-termination network. If portions of a structure vary considerably in height,
any necessary air termination or air termination network of the lower portions shall be
in addition to their own conductors, be bonded to the down conductors of the taller
portions.
8.7 All air terminals shall be effectively secured against overturning either by attachment to
the object to be protected or by means of substantial braces and fixings which shall be
permanently and rigidly attached to the building. The method and nature of the fixings
should be simple, solid and permanent, due attention being given to climatic conditions
and possible corrosion.
9.0 Earth Terminations
9.1 Each down conductor shall have an independent earth pit. The interconnection of all
the earth termination shall be done. It should be capable of isolation for testing
purposes by “testing joints” of GI provided in suitable enclosures.
9.2 Earth electrodes & earth pit shall be constructed and installed as specified for pipe
earthing in E-06.
9.3 The whole of the lightning protective system shall have a combined resistance to earth
not exceeding 10Ω before any bonding has been affected to metal in or on a structure
or to surface below ground.

SECTION: E.08
EXTERNAL LIGHTING
Part I
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work covers the supply, installation and testing of lighting poles, weather
proof light fixtures, wiring to the fixtures, cable laying, earthing as specified and shown
on the drawing.
2.0 Standards
2.1 The following standards and rules shall be applicable:
Steel Tubes, Tubulars and Other Wrought Steel

BS 1387 (EN 10255) Fittings - Specification - Part 1 : Steel Tubes
Material Standards
EN 10027 -1-1992
ASTM - A656 (GR-
60)
EN-10027 - 1 - 1992 Galvanisation

ASTM - A123 / A123M-02
Bangladesh Electricity Act, and Bangladesh

Electricity Rules, as amended
Regulations laid down by the Chief Electrical

Inspector
Any other regulations laid down by the Local

Authorities
2.2 All codes and standards mean the latest. Where not specified otherwise the
installation shall generally follow the International Standard Codes of Practice or the
British Standard Codes.
3.0 Street Lighting
3.1 General - The steel tubular street lighting poles used for lighting of approach roads,
traffic lanes and walkways in the circulating area, shall be erected at a distance of 300
mm from the edge of the road/walkway. The foundation for the poles shall be of 1:2:4
concrete. This shall be done by the Contractor as a part of the contract work as per the
approved drawing. The pole with its base plate shall be grouted in the foundation which
shall be provided with muffing. Galvanized down pipes/sleeves of suitable diameter
shall be embedded in the concrete for the incoming and outgoing feeder cables.
Contractor should follow PWD specification for mounting of MCBs.
3.2 Street Lighting Poles

3.2.1 The lighting poles shall be octagonal / round type poles as per Material Standards EN
10027 -1-1992 ASTM - A656 (GR-60) and Galvanisation EN 10027 - 1 - 1992 ASTM -
A123 / A123M 02 , hot dip galvanized as per drawings and as specified. The pole shall
have a base plate, a large access panel, and necessary fixture mounting bracket at top
and 2 nos. 1.5m length of 40mm diameter bent GI pipes for cable loop-in loop-out to be
provided. The access panel shall provide easy access to a multi-way porcelain
connector and fuse board, to be mounted inside the pole. The access shall be
specially fabricated with adequate reinforcement and weather gasket to prevent ingress
of moisture and vandal proofed. Poles shall have large diameter entries for incoming
and outgoing cable and two earth studs. The pole fabrication shall conform to the
drawings and where such drawing is not available, the contractor shall make drawing
and have it approved before fabrication.
3.2.2 The octagonal / round poles shall be made from steel of minimum tensile strength 490
N/mm2.
3.2.3 Grade of foundation bolts shall be 6.8 & confirming relevant standard.
3.2.4 Foundation – adequate size M30 grade RCC foundation with 100mm raft including
excavation are included in the rates of street light poles. Contractor shall submit design
calculation in support of size of RCC foundation for external lighting poles.
3.2.5 The pole shall be provided with a 20mm hole for wiring of street light pole and two nos.
20mm studs are to be welded for earthing.
3.3 Junction Boxes and Connecting Cable
3.3.1 Each pole shall be complete with an MS junction box of pole-mounting type/fitted inside
the pole, manufactured from MS sheet of 14 sheet gauge painted with oil paint over red
oxide zinc chromate primer. The junction box shall have a water proof lockable cover
(IP55) of size 300 x 100 mm. It shall be fitted with 6A MCB and 6-way, 20A connector
strip, a neutral link, earthing studs and suitable down pipes for the incoming and
outgoing cable-lead. The junction box shall generally comply with the requirements and
relevant standard. The supply of pole shall be complete with 3 x 4-mm2 copper FR /
cable, XLPE insulated, PVC sheathed drawn from the junction box to the luminaire
terminal.
3.3.2 Pole shall have a concrete coping of 200mm height and 300mm diameter in M30.
3.4 Cable laying
3.4.1 Cabling shall be generally as specified in the section ‘CABLING.’
3.4.2 Cables shall be terminated in a 6-way terminal block inside the pole or attached
therewith as shown on drawings.
3.4.3 Cable route shall be as shown on the drawings or the contractor shall mark out the
route and lay the cables only upon approval of the route.
3.5 Earthing
3.5.1 All street light fixtures and poles shall be earthed as specified under section
‘EARTHING.’ In each pole a through hole of 14mm diameter shall be provided at a
height of 300mm for earthing. Every lighting pole shall be earthed by connecting it to
the continuity earth of the feeder cable from the feeder pillar. In addition, every 7 th pole
shall be connected to locally provided earth electrode as per approved drawing.
4.0 Feeder pillars (As Applicable)
4.1 Suitable feeder pillars, 3-phase 415 V outdoor type, with a fixed canopy shall be
provided for power distribution to masts & streetlights. The feeder pillar shall have
IP:54 degree of protection. It shall be provided with weather-proof lockable door,
incoming and outgoing cable glands, earthing studs and other accessories.

5.0 Testing and commissioning

5.1 The lighting installation shall be tested as per approved schedule and the instructions
of Engineer and shall include but not be limited to the following:
5.2 Insulation resistance of each circuit shall be measured without the lamps being in
place. It should not be less than 500000 ohms to earth.
5.3 Current and voltage of all the outdoor lighting circuits shall be measured at the Main
Distribution Board with all the lamps switched on to ensure that these are within
designed values and in the case of 3-phase circuits, the load shall be balanced if
required.
5.4 Earth continuity shall be checked for all the circuits.
5.5 After inserting all the lamps and switching on all the circuits, minimum and maximum
proforma and submitted to the Engineer for approval before final commissioning.
HIGH MAST LIGHTING

1.0 Scope
This specification deals with the design, fabrication/manufacture, testing, supply and
erection of outdoor high lighting equipment including 20.0 m high mast with mobile
lantern carriage , luminaries and associated accessories, fittings, etc. to be installed for
lighting of circulating area outside the station.
2.0 Codes and Standards
2.1 Design, manufacture and performance of the mast shall comply with all currently
applicable statutory regularities and safety codes and standards in the locality where
the equipment will be installed and generally in accordance to the following:
British Code of Practice CP3: Chapter V Part 2: 1972
Technical Report No.7: 2000 Edition, Amended and reprint 2003 by the Institute of
Lighting Engineers.
2.2 The work shall be done to a high degree of workmanship in accordance with approved
drawings and in conformity with this specification and the relevant specifications and
code of practice of the International Standards, Bangladesh Electricity Rules,
Regulations laid down by the Chief Electrical Inspector. Any other regulations laid
down by the Local Authorities.
3.0 Design
20 metres high mast suitable for fixing 6 luminaries as specified, in three sections, with
confirm carriage and all accessories required to complete the supply and erection of
High Masts at designated locations high mast shall be manufactured as for Technical
Report No. 7 (latest edition) by the institution of lighting engineers and as per
specification of high masts given in this document
4.0 General Constructional Features
4.1 The mast shaft shall be made with the best steel grade, in compliance with BS EN 10
025 FE 510C, having the following guaranteed characteristics:
Minimum Yield Strength = 355N/sq.mm for thickness < 30mm
Tensile Strength ranging from 490 to 630 N/sq. mm
Minimum elongation for thickness between 3mm and 30mm: 22%

4.2 The steel grade for accessories shall be BS EN 10 025 Fe 430A or equivalent, having
the following guaranteed characteristics:
Minimum Yield Strength = 225N/sq. mm for thickness < 30mm
Tensile Strength ranging from 340 to 470 N/sqmm
Minimum elongation for thickness between 3mm and 30mm: 26%
4.3 All holding bolts are hot dip galvanized to BS: 729.
5.0 Mast Design Criteria
5.1 The high mast and the lowering system with the required number of floodlights and
lamp control gears etc. in place shall be capable of withstanding a sustained basic
wind speed of 180 km/h with 3 seconds gust.
5.2 The design shall be in such a manner that it is capable of withstanding external forces
exerted by wind pressure and should have a minimum wind load factor of 1.25 and
material factor of 1.115. Design life of mast should be at least 25 years.
5.3 The mast shall be designed in accordance to the table below:
Maximum Loading on Foundation (20m High Mast)
Shear Force 8.0 kN
Overturning Moment 112.0 kNm
Torsion Moment 1.0 kNm
Axial Load 17.0 kN
Max. Deflection 500 mm
Max. Base Flange O. D. 730 mm
6. Mast structure and construction

6.1 Each mast section to be delivered to site shall have a minimum length of 9.0 m. the
sections shall not be circumferential welded through slip joint of multiple short sections.
Detailed instructions relating to site assembly shall be provided.
6.2 The top section shall have a flange plate for bolted connection to the head frame. The
base shall have a flange plate for fixing the high mast onto the concrete foundation by
anchor bolts.
6.3 The mast shall be fabricated as per technical report no. 7 of institution of lighting
engineers. It will be butt welded longitudinally to form a tapered section with (one)
longitudinal seam weld is permissible. All welding shall be to BS 5135 having the
following basic requirements:
6.3.1 Mast sections to base flange and longitudinal weld within 150mm of the female slip
joints areas shall have :-
Full penetration between plates of all thickness.
No fissures.
No undercutting.
No blow holes, porosity or spherical beyond 5% on the minimum thickness.

No detectable angular inclusion.

6.3.2 Longitudinal welds along the mast shaft shall have :-
60% minimum penetration between plates.
No fissure on the inside and outside surface.
No undercutting on the outside surface.
No blow holes.
6.3.3 Ultrasonic testing procedures shall be considered as minimum permissible testing
method.
6.3.4 The wall thickness of each section shall be designed to withstand the loads to which
the high mast will be subjected to but shall not be less than 3mm.
6.3.5 Unless otherwise specified connection between the various station shall be achieved
by telescopic slip joints, the overlapping length being at least equal to 2.0 times the
inside diameter of the female section. Slip joint assembly shall be performed at site.
Shaft section shall not be joint by circumferential weld or bolting.
6.3.6 The base plate shall be free from lamination and shall be single flange constructed with
holes jig drilled for anchor bolt passage. The bottom of the base mast section shall be
securely welded to the base plate by complete penetration butt welding or fillet welding.
The welded connection of the base plate to the mast section shall fully develop the
strength of the section.
6.3.7 The base section shall be equipped with a hinged service door. The service door
opening shall be completed with a close fitting weatherproof and equipped with a
vandal resistant lock. The service door shall not be smaller than 1400mm X 300mm.
The opening shall be reinforced by a thick steel door frame.
6.3.8 Base plate dimensions and thickness and the no. diameter, size and the placement of
anchor bolts shall be determined by calculation and indicated in the drawings.
6.3.9 Anchor bolts shall be deformed steel reinforcement bars having the following minimum
guaranteed characteristics:
Specified characteristic strength = 460N/sq.mm
Tensile strength = 480N/sq.mm
6.3.10 Welding of two or more anchor rods of shorter lengths to achieve the design length
shall not be permitted. No welding shall be allowed on the anchor rod body.
6.3.11 Adequate earthing and earthing terminal shall be provided within the access door area
of each high mast. Details shall submitted to the engineer for approval.
6.3.12 All high mast shall be hot dip galvanized, in accordance with British Standard
729/1971(1986).
6.3.13 All mast component shall be hot dip as per BS 729 galvanized after completion of
fabrication. The galvanized of sections having overall length of up to 14m shall be
achieved in a single dip operation. Double dipping of any mast section is strictly
prohibited. Galvanising shall be inspected for adhesion, mass of zinc coating and
uniformity of coating
7.0 Lantern Carriage
7.1 The mobile luminaries ring shall be of steel construction and manufactured in three
segments. Bolted flanges shall join the unit. All mobile components of the system shall
be located on the mobile part in order to allow visual inspection during each operation.
Proper luminaries carriage ring support arms shall be provided for supporting the
luminaries carriage ring when the latter is lowered for maintenance of luminaries.

7.2 The mobile luminaries carriage shall be designed to carry the assigned no. of
luminaries and control gears and shall be evenly balanced. Nylon Paddle Guide Ring
shall be incorporated as a buffer arrangement between mobile luminaries carriage and
mast shaft. This is to prevent damaged to mast surface during raising and lowering
operation of mobile luminaries carriage.
7.3 The complete mobile components shall be hot dip galvanised in accordance to BS 729.
7.4 The steel grades used for construction of the head frame assembly and mobile part
shall be in compliance with BS EN 10 025.
8. Raising and Lowering Mechanism :
For installation and maintenance of luminaries and lamps, it shall be necessary to
lower and raise the mobile luminaire carriage by means of a suitable winching
arrangement at the base of the mast. The speed of the raising and lowering of lantern
carriage ring shall be at least 3.0m per minute.
9.0 Winch:
9.1 The winching system with the exception of the drive unit shall remain permanently
inside the mast. Each mast shall be provided with a double drum winch suitable for
raising and lowering the luminaire carriage ring.
9.2 The winch must be robust design and completely self-sustaining type without the brake
- shoe, springs or clutches. It can be removed from the mast for maintenance if the
need arise in future. The reduction gear of the winch shall be of endless worm gear.
Operating in an oil bath. The minimum safe working limit of the winch shall be not less
than 750Kg.
9.3 The capacity and operating speed of the winch shall be clearly marked on an indelible
label together with the specification of the recommended lubricant.
9.4 A minimum 6 turns of wire rope shall be on the grooved drum when the mobile
luminaire ring is fully lowered to rest on the supporting arms.
9.5 The winch is entirely self-sustaining under all normal circumstances and it is not
depend on the brake or restarting device that uncontrolled or dangerous runaway
speeds will occur in the event of the total failure and report shall be submitted upon
request.
9.6 Test certificates in support of the safe working limit shall be provided upon request.
10.0 Head frame:
10.1 The head frame duly hot dip galvanized shall include a pulley system accommodate 3
stainless steel hoisting wire rope at any one time and separate pulley for the passage
of flat electrical cables. The pulleys shall be of non-corrosive material and shall run on
self-lubricating bearing with stainless steel axles.
11.0 Hoisting and Suspension Wire Ropes:
11.1 The high mast shall be fitted with flexible stranded stainless steel hoisting wire ropes of
7 x 19 construction with a minimum breaking strength of KGs. The combine lifting
capacity of the hoisting wire rope shall have a factor of safety not less than 5 times the
safe working load (SWL) of the winch and shall be entirely suitable for the design
application.
11.2 A transition plate shall be incorporated to connect the suspension wire ropes to the two
stainless steel winching wire ropes ensuring ensure even distribution of loads between
the two stainless winching-wire by means of an equaliser with a provision to fix
electrical cables.
12.0 Electrical Cables:

Electrical cable shall be anti-twisting flat flexible 2.5mm 2 cable suitable for small
bending radius. One standard 8 core flexible electrical cable with 2.5mm 2 conducting
area shall be providing for connecting of power supply to the light source and shall
terminate at the stationary connecting board in the base compartment with a multiple
10-pin weather proof plug and socket coupler fitted with locking levers.
13.0 Winch driving Power Tool:
13.1 The winch drive unit shall be complete with a 415V, 3-Phase, 50 Hz squirrel cage,
reversible weather resistance, IP 55 protection, min. class B insulation induction motor,
a coupling flange for winch to facilitate detachment and attachment on several masts in
succession.
13.2 For safety reasons and final precision docking of lantern carriage ring to the head
frame, the drive motor must have a provision to operate manually by using external
crank device with out removing the drive motor from the winch unit.
14.0 Control Panel:
Control of raising and lowering operation shall be carried out a distance away the mast
base by means of a portable pendant type control panel complete with power supply
and control cable of appx.5m length. The control panel shall be usable on all masts
and shall be equipped with Emergency stop button and Push button for raising and
lowering of the mobile part. The push buttons shall operate on the 'dead man' principle
i.e. action shall ceased as soon as the button is released. Portable control panel shall
also include a portable panel for housing control switch and relays. The portable panel
shall be equipped with safety devices such as electronic torque control in case of
overload or overheating of the hoist motor.
15.0 Testing and Commissioning:
The lighting installation shall be tested as per approved schedule and the instructions
of Engineer and shall include but not be limited to the following:
Insulation resistance of each circuit shall be measured without the lamps being in
place. It should not be less than 5 Mega ohms to earth.
Current and voltage of all the outdoor lighting circuits shall be measured at the Main
Distribution Board with all the lamps switched on to ensure that these are within
designed values and in the case of 3- phase circuits, the load shall be balanced, if
required.
Earth continuity shall be checked for all the circuits.
After inserting all the lamps and switching on all the circuits, minimum and maximum
proforma and submitted to the Engineer for approval before final commissioning.

SECTION: E.09
A) SINGLE PHASE UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work shall cover supply, erection, testing and commissioning of a static
Uninterrupted Power System meeting the performance criteria under equipment
schedule.
2.0 System features
2.1 The UPS Shall be a true parallel redundant, online input 3-phase 415 V & output 1-ph
230 Volts complete with all modules like converter, Inverter, Bypass modules with 1/2
hour battery backup with charging arrangement and other standard accessories.
2.2 Each unit shall be modular in construction to facilitate unit replacement and all
electronic control card shall permit plug in type replacement. The enclosure shall be
dust & vermin proof provided with IP-20 degree protection, designed for minimum
space requirements for maintenance and installation.
2.3 All the modules, accessories shall provide controls, metering and monitoring system
and fault diagnostic/ annunciation system for healthy/faulty status through LEDs, data
logger with power monitoring software for operational status locally.
2.4 UPS shall be provided with RS 485 compatibility for remote monitoring and to extend
alarm & status indications & annunciation and metering to remote panels, station
control center and Operation control center.
2.5 UPS shall be compatible to take non-linear loads and capable to handle high crest
load. UPS shall be provided with harmonics filter and input & output power factor
correction features. UPS shall be compatible to work on 2 sources of supply with
reverse phase sequence protection.
2.6 The system shall be standard tried out product of an established manufacturer and
shall comprise minimum number of components with maximum MTBF & MTTR. The
system shall have high operating efficiency, front access and self diagnostics. There
shall be sufficient redundancy in all vital parts achieving a breakdown -free operation of
the system.
2.7 The System shall essentially consist of following major components:
2.7.1 Solid state PWM converter with insulated gate bipolar transistor/intelligent power
module.
2.7.2 Converter input, system battery contractor, system battery, maintenance bypass, static
bypass input with circuit breakers.
2.7.3 A Battery system
2.7.4 Microprocessor based Menu driven software for operation, control and management as
well as microprocessor controlled diagnostics. Ventilation for the system shall be
provided with a adequate redundancy to maintain component temperature within the
limits. All air entries shall be protected with cleanable filters. All heat producing devices
shall be mounted on ample heat sinks.
2.7.5 UPS shall be mounted as a whole on a heavy duty fabricated steel base frame
constructed from folded channel sections with suitable mounting pads.
2.7.6 The converter & inverter shall work in cross redundancy.
2.7.7 The UPS shall be designed to work in following environmental conditions:

Operating temperature 0 to 40°C
Relative humidity 0 to 95%
2.7.8 UPS shall be designed for low impedance, limited ripple content (1% with battery & 2 %
without battery), efficiency not less than 90% at full load, less than 55dB acoustic level.
2.7.9 UPS shall be designed for minimum following over load of
10% overload 10 minute duration
25% overload 1 minute duration
50% overload 5 seconds duration
2.7.10 Auto phase correction :-

The System should be capable of supplying power to Load from Commercial Mains
without any break , in case of phase reversal at the input. The UPS should not draw
power from batteries or it should not transfer into bypass in case of input phase
reversal. In case the feature is not available in the standard design of UPS, the bidder
to provide an external back to back thyristor in conjunction with series and parallel
contactors.
3.0 Static PWM Converter
3.1 The converter should be solid state Static PWM converter with insulated gate bipolar
transistor or intelligent power module. The converter should have the following
important features.
i. Power conversion
ii. Battery charging
iii. Power factor improvement
iv. Current harmonic reduction
v. Voltage regulation
vi. Transient recovery
vii. Automatic synchronization
viii. Over current protection
ix. Over temperature protection
x. Control power failure protection
xi. Short circuit protection
xii. high speed switching to reduce heat dissipation (more than 6 kHz)
xiii. input current limiting through two line slide current transformers or electronically.
xiv. current limiting function of battery charging to prevent the battery from being
damaged.
3.2 The converter should meet with the following specification in addition to other
requirements stated herein.
3.2.1 Input voltage - The converter will be fed from the commercial source.

3.2.2 The converter will meet the following specifications in addition to other requirements stated
herein:
i. Nominal voltage 415 V, 3-phase
ii. Voltage range +15% / -20% (AC)
iii. Nominal frequency 50 Hz
iv. Frequency range ± 5% (± 2.5 Hz)
v. Input power factor 0.98 lagging or more at full load (pf

improvement)
vi. Input harmonic current THD 3% typical at 100% load 6% maximum at 50%
load
vii. Duty Continuous at 40°C
viii. Cooling Forced cooling using fans with thermal relays

using a latched cut out re-setting as protection
for cooling fans. Each individual fan has its
own thermal relay.
ix. Ambient operating temperature 0 to 40°C

range
x. Operating Relative Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing
xi. Operating altitude Sea level to 1000 meters
xii. Magnetized sub-cycle inrush Typically 8 times normal full load current
xiii. Converter walk-in timer 1 through 60 seconds (every 1 second

selectable, 0 to 100% rated load)
Default setting – 20 seconds
xiv. Input Suitable terminals are provided for termination

of cables from the AC distribution board
supplied by owner.
4.0 Static Inverter

4.1 The static inverter should be solid state type with proven pulse width modulation
technique. The inverter should utilize insulated gate bipolar transistor. The inverter
should incorporate following essential features:
i. Voltage regulations
ii. Transient recovery
iii. Automatic synchronization
iv. Over current protection
v. Over temperature protection
vi. Short circuit power protection

vii. High speed switching (more than 6 kHz)

viii. Frequency control through internal oscillator
ix. Limiting of output voltage harmonic distortion
x. Inverter overload protection through MCBs
4.2 The inverter should meet the following specifications in addition to other requirements stated
herein.
i. Voltage input Three phase UPS

Nominal 240V DC as per
manufacturer design)
Maximum DC bus voltage during
charging the batteries.
ii. Nominal voltage output 240V, 1-phase

Output power factor 0.8
iii. Inverter capacity As per BOQ
iv. Voltage regulation
a. For 0 to 100% loading Less than ± 1%
b. Inverter DC input voltage varies from Less than ± 1%

maximum to minimum
c. Environmental conditions given below Less than ± 1%
v. Transient voltage regulation
a. At 100% step load change Less than ± 3%
b. At loss of return of AC input Less than ± 3%
c. At load transfer from Bypass to Inverter Less than ± 3%
vi. Time to recover from transient to normal 20 milliseconds

voltage
vii. Wave form
a. Normal frequency 50 Hz
b. Frequency regulation for all conditions Yes

of input supplies, loads and temperature
occurring simultaneously or in any
combination (automatically controlled)
c. Synchronization limit for synchronization 49 Hz to 51 Hz

between inverter and standby AC
source
d. Field adjustment range for above 50±0.25 Hz to 50±1.5 Hz

viii. Total voltage harmonic distortion Less than 2% THD for linear load
Less than 4% THD for non-linear
load
ix. Duty Continuous
x. Cooling Forced cooling using fans
xi. Ambient operating temperature range 0 to 40°C maximum continuous
xii. Operating relative humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing
xiii. Operating altitude Sea level to 1000 meters
5.0 Bypass & Static Transfer Switch

5.1 Bypass circuit is provided as on alternate source of power other than the inverter. A
high speed thyristor switch should be used to assume the critical load during automatic
transfers to the bypass circuit The static switch drives power from an upstream bypass
feed circuit breaker internal to the UPS module provided for overload protection. The
bypass circuit should be capable of supplying the UPS rated load current and also
provide fault clearing current. UPS system logic should employ sensing which causes
the static switch to energize within 150 microseconds thus providing an uninterrupted
transfer to the bypass source when any of the following limitations are exceeded:
i. Inverter output under voltage or over voltage
ii. Overload beyond the capability of the inverter
iii. DC circuit under voltage or over voltage
iv. Final end voltage of system battery is reached
v. Bypass source present and available
vi. System failure (e.g.: logic fail, fuse blown, etc.)
5.2 The static switch should also confirm to the following minimum requirements:
i. Capacity continuous equal to 100% of

continuous rating of the inverter
ii. Capacity overload equivalent to overload

characteristics specified for UPS
iii. Nominal bypass input voltage 415V / 240V, 3 phase/I

phase
iv. Voltage range ± 10%
v. Nominal frequency 50 Hz
vi. Frequency range ± 2%
vii. Current 1000 % for 20 milliseconds
viii. Ambient temperature 0 to 40°C continuous
ix. Operating relative humidity 0 to 95% non-continuous

x. Operating altitude Sea level to 1000 meters
xi. Cooling Natural convection
xii. Duty Continuous
5.3 Automatic Retransfer

5.3.1 In the event, if the critical load has to be transferred to the bypass source due to an
Overload the UPS system logic monitors the overload conditions and upon the
overload being cleared, automatic retransfer back to the Inverter output should be
possible.
5.4 Automatic transfer
5.4.1 UPS should he capable of transferring the critical load to/from the bypass source via
LCD touch panel. When performing manual transfers to inverters or automatic
retransfer, the UPS system logic should force the inverter output voltage to match the
bypass input voltage and then parallel the inverter & bypass source providing a make
before break transition allowing a controlled load current to inverter.
5.5 Maintenance Bypass Switch
5.5.1 UPS should include a maintenance bypass switch with required interlocks to enable
maintenance inside the UPS.
6.0 Battery System
6.1 Twin Battery banks supplying 100% rated load suitable for half hour back up with
each UPS i.e. two banks of 30 minutes backup for a set of 2 x 20 kVA over its full
service life complete with heavy duty, high discharge valve regulated lead-acid type
batteries, battery racks and interconnecting cables shall be provided.
6.2 The battery capacity shall be designed for long life (Design life of 20 years & Service
life expectancy over 10 years) for 2V SMF VRLA with uniform charging and discharging
rates. Recombination cells, thus obviating the specific need for flameproof equipment
in the UPS room. These shall be mounted in at least two cabinets such that:
 Those in one cabinet shall be disconnected for maintenance while the rest provide
a full service for a shorter time;
 Those so disconnected shall be isolated into groups such that no touch voltage
exceeds 50V. Suitable rack made of non-conductive material should be provided
for the battery
 The initial charging of the battery to be done by the supplier at site. All equipment
like charger and material required for charging should be provided by the supplier.
 All accessories required for battery maintenance like distilled water, Petroleum jelly,
Sulphuric acid, Hydrometer, DC voltmeter, Safety Gloves, Shoes, Glass, Jug,
Spanner, Screw driver supplied with battery.
 Tenderer shall provide design calculations for selection of battery sizing & capacity
duly considering aging factor and temperature correction factor@ 25°C
Such isolation shall be interlocked with the cabinet doors to prevent access unless
isolated.

On restoration of grid power, the converter should automatically reactivate and provide
DC power to the inverter, simultaneously recharging the system battery in boost mode
and automatically switch to float mode after full charge recovery of the battery.
7.0 Protection / Annunciation
7.1 The UPS shall be suitable for taking unbalanced load and the UPS shall be provided
with H class insulation.
7.2 UPS system shall be designed with protection & annunciation system for monitoring
following:
i. Phase sequence
ii. Overload and short circuit trip
iii. Earth fault
iv. Reverse power relay
v. Low battery voltage
vi. Fault indication alarm through suitably designed hooter
vii. Self diagnostic annunciation system
8.0 System Earthing and Equipment Earthing
8.1 Two independent and distinct earth electrodes shall be provided for equipment earthing
of UPS connections comprising 50 x 6-mm GI strips/ or as required/ approved. Each of
these earth electrodes shall comprise a GI plate as per Code of Practice for Earthing
(latest version).
9.0 Finish
9.1 All cubicles shall be fabricated from cold rolled closed annealed mild steel sheet 1.6-
mm with dead-front access and load bearing members of 2.0 mm thickness. The sheet
steel shall be pre-treated for rust inhibition through a 7-tank process of degreasing and
phosphating and adequately treated before being powder coated in an approved
colour. All modules shall be designed for front access for ease of maintenance.
10.0 Testing and Commissioning
10.1 The UPS shall be thoroughly checked for correct operation and load tested in supplier
works before dispatch. All faults, control functions and site load conditions shall be
simulated, checked and proved. The equipment shall be dispatched after testing in
presence of authorized representative of purchaser.

AIRCONDITONING & VENTILATION SYSTEM

SECTION E.10
A: VARIABLE REGRIGERANT FLOW SYSTEM
1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Variable Refrigerant Volume VRV / Variable Refrigerant Flow VRF - R 410a refrigerant
System should be air cooled, spilt type air conditioning systems consisting of modular
condensing units connected to multiple indoor units, each having the capability of individual set
point control. Each modular condensing unit should incorporate at least one inverter
compressors (Scroll / Rotary) to obtain 10% to 100% stepless capacity control for enhanced
Power saving. The indoor units should be provided with Corded Remote Control as a standard
accessory.
The VRV / VRF units shall be capable of operating within a wide range of ambient
temperatures. The Condensing units should be capable of provide cooling within an ambient
range of -5 Deg. C to 45 Deg. C DB.
The refrigerant piping shall be extendable minimum 165 m with 50 m level without any oil trap.
The system shall be designed for automatic cyclic operation of VRV/VRF units i.e. In each
station there will three outdoor unit and at a time only two will work. Same feature shall be
available and control by microprocessor.
Ambient conditions: Minus 05 OC to plus 45 OC

2. OUTDOOR UNIT
2.1 The outdoor unit shall be a factory assembled unit housed in a sturdy weather proof casing
constructed form rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish. The ODU
must deliver 100% cooling capacity at 40 Deg C ambient Temperature.
The outdoor unit shall have multiple scroll compressors and be able to operate even in case of
breakdown of one of compressors.
The noise level shall not be more than 68 dB(A)at normal operation measured horizontally 1m
away and 1.5m above ground.
The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and shall be allowed for side by side installation.
2.2. Compressor
The compressor shall be of highly efficient hermetic Inverter Scroll / Rotary capable of capacity
modulation by time averaging method and Vapor injection Technology. Each ODU should have
minimum 1 no. variable compressor upto 16 HP capacity, 2 nos. variable compressors upto 32
HP capacity, 3 nos. Variable compressors upto 48 HP capacity & 4 nos. variable e compressors
upto 64 HP capacity.
2.3 Heat Exchanger
The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminium
fins to form a cross fin coil. The aluminium fins shall be covered by anti-corrosion resin film. The
System must have sub-cooling heat exchanger further to Condenser to increase refrigerating
effect in Indoor units. The Condenser fins must be coated with Anti-corrosive treatment.
2.4 Fan Motor Speed Control
The condensing unit fan motors to have at least two speed operations to maintain
constant head pressure control at all ambient temperatures and modes of operation.
2.5. Refrigerant Circuit

The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, liquid and gas shut off valves and a
solenoid valves or pulse width modulation valve.
All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safety operation of the
system.
2.6 Safety Devices

The following safety devices shall be part of the outdoor unit; High Pressure Switch,
Low Pressure Switch, Fan Motor Safety Thermostat, Over Current Relay, Fusible
Plugs, Fuses.
2.7 Oil Recovery System
Each unit shall be equipped, with an oil separator to ensure stable operation with long
refrigerant piping.
3. INDOOR UNIT
3.1 Indoor unit shall be of metallic body and mix-match of ceiling/wall mounted type. It shall have
electronic control valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to load variations of the room.
The fan shall be of the dual suction multi blade type and statically and dynamically balanced to
ensure low noise and vibration free operation.
3.2 The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual and group control.
In case of centralized control, liquid crystal remote controller shall set it.
3.3 Electronic Expansion Valve
Each indoor unit shall be fitted with an electronic expansion valve to control the
refrigerant flow in response to the load variations in the room. The electronic expansion
valve is to be controlled via a computerized control sensing the return air temperature,
refrigerant inlet and outlet temperatures. During the cooling operation the electronic
expansion valve shall control the refrigerant superheat degree at the evaporator.
3.4 Indoor Unit Fans
Shall be direct driven of the DIDW multi-blade type, statically and dynamically balanced to
ensure low noise and vibration free operation. The noise level shall not exceed 42 dbA .
3.5 Cooling Coils
Shall be direct expansion, constructed from copper tubes expanded into aluminium fins
to form a rigid mechanical bond.
3.6 Unit Control Board
It shall Include in the indoor unit a printed circuit board complete with, address switches
for a variety of operation controls, emergency operation switch and fault / operation
indication LED’s. The fan motors shall be thermally protected.
3.7 Unit Casing
The indoor unit casing shall be fully insulated and sealed to prevent condensation.
4. CENTRALIZED SYSTEM TOUCH SCREEN REMOTE CONTROLLER
A multifunctional compact Touch Screen centralized controller shall be provided with
the system.
The System Controller shall act as an advanced air conditioning management system
to give complete control of VRV / VRF air conditioning equipment. It shall have ease of
use for the user
It shall be able to control up to 250 groups of indoor units with the following functions :-
Starting/stopping of Air conditioners as a zone or group or individual unit.

Temperature setting for each indoor unit or zone.

Switching between temperature control modes, switching of fan speed and direction of
airflow, enabling/disabling of individual remote controller operation.
Monitoring of operation status such as operation mode & temperature setting of
individual indoor units, maintenance information, trouble-shooting information.
The controller shall have wide screen user friendly colour LCD Touch scree display and can be
wired by a non polar 2 wire transmission cable to a distance of 1 km away from indoor unit.
5. CABLING BEWTEEN INDOOR AND OUTDOOR UNITS
The cable between indoor and outdoor units shall run in GI conduit.
6. REFRIGERANT PIPEWORK
6.1.1 Scope of Refrigerant Piping work shall include Supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of all interconnecting pipe-work between the condensing unit & indoor
units. Refrigerant quality seamless copper tubes with brazed connections and the
appropriate Distribution joints and headers shall be used.
The piping should be routed at site in such a manner, that brazed joints in the
Refrigeration Piping are kept to a minimum.
All interconnecting piping, joints and U bends within the condensing unit shall be
painted with two coats of clear transparent coating of suitable material for protection
against corrosion from ambient air pollution.
Each coat shall have dry film thickness of 35 micron or more. The coating shall be
strong, flexible and durable. It shall have good adhesive and abrasion resistance.
It shall be resistant to moisture, UV, acid alkali and other chemicals and capable of
functioning between -250 C upto 1500 C
The polymer shall be obtained by the mixing of base / monomer with a hardener /
polymerisor. It may be brush applied or with the use of a suitable gun.
6.2 Joint Orientation
Proprietary Distribution refrigeration pipe joints and headers shall be installed in an appropriate
orientation to enable correct distribution of refrigerant. The Distribution joints shall be factory
insulated with pre-formed sections of expanded Polystyrene / equivalent.
6.3 Cleanliness of Piping
All pipe-work must be kept clean and free from contamination to prevent breakdown of the
system. All pipe ends shall be kept sealed until immediately prior to making a joint.
6.4 Pressure Testing
After complete installation of refrigerant piping, it shall be pre-pressure tested and repaired if
necessary and further pressure tested to 3,800 Pa, to hold for a minimum 24 hours with dry
nitrogen prior to insulating the joints. After satisfactory testing, the refrigerant pipe shall be
evacuated and dehydrated to (- 755 MM HG) and held for one to four hours depending on the
pipe length.
6.5 Refrigerant Charge
Refrigerant charge must be calculated based on the actual length of the refrigerant
pipe work. The refrigerant charging process must be carried out with an appropriate
charging station and under supervision of Consultancy.
6.6 Piping Insulation
All suction & liquid lines of the Refrigerant pipe work shall be insulated with Nitrile
rubber /expanded polyethylene pipe sections as specified to avoid condensation. The
exposed piping insulation shall be painted with U/V paint

6.7 Fixing Pipe Work & Electrical Conduit:

The insulated refrigerant piping and electrical conduit shall run on GI tray properly supported by
GI rods. The exposed tray on terrace shall be covered by openable GI covers.
6.8 The OD & wall thickness of copper refrigerant piping shall be as follows:
Size Thickness Specification
6.35mm (1/4 in) 24 G C1220T-O (ANNEALED)
19.05mm (3/4 in) 20 G C1220T-1/2 H (HALF-HARD)
22.23mm (7/8 in) 20 G C1220T-1/2 H (HALF-HARD)
25.40mm (1 in) 20 G C1220T-1/2 H (HALF-HARD)
28.58mm (1 1/8 in) 18 G C1220T-1/2 H (HALF-HARD)
50.8mm (2 in) 14 G C1220T-1/2 H (HALF-HARD)
7. DRAIN PIPING
7.1 The indoor units shall be connected to drain of GI pipe
7.2 The pipes shall be laid in proper slope for efficient drainage of condensate water.
7.3 Drain Pipe Insulation
Drain pipes carrying condensate water shall be insulated with 6 mm Nitrile rubber
having a ‘K’ value of 0.037 W/mk at a mean temperature of 20C and a minimum
density of 55 Kg/Sqm.
The joints shall be properly sealed with synthetic glue to ensure proper bonding of the
ends.
8. INSTALLATION
8.1 The VRV type air conditioning units shall be mounted on vibration isolators and
installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation such that no
disturbing vibration or noise is being transmitted to the nearby structure.
8.2 Refrigerant pipes that exposed to outdoor shall be covered with UV coating to protect
insulation from direct UV exposure.
8.3 All galvanized support beams, galvanized legs, galvanized hangers, anchor bolts,
vibration isolators, ductworks and shall be provided for the installation of the units.

9.0 TESTING
The units shall be tested for capacity and COP as per ARI conditions at manufactures
premises before delivery, Owners / their representative reserve the right to witness the
tests.
10.0 Comprehensive annual maintenance contract.
10.1 Bidder shall quote the cost of CAMC for 5 year after DLP . The rate quoted for CAMC
shall be evaluated in financial bid. However going into CAMC is sole discretion of
Clint/O&M division after DLP.
10.2 During vender approval, contractor shall submit 5 year CAMC rate from OEM which
should be equal of lesser then the rate quoted in BOQ. Contractor/OEM shall also
submit Bank Guarantee for CAMC period (i.e. 10% of total cost of CAMC) before expiry
of DLP of contract.
10.3 During CAMC Contractor/OEM shall provide all support regarding software &
hardware. Contractor/OEM shall do preventive maintenance as per standard
recommendation with free replacement of all defective parts, gas charging, painting as
required etc during CAMC. Nothing shall be paid extra except CAMC rate quoted in the
BOQ.
10.4 Payment of CAMC shall be made on half yearly basis.
B: SPLIT AIR CONDITIONERS.
1. GENERAL
1.1 The contractor shall supply and install split system air conditioner with 5 star rating
wherever indicated. The system shall be complete in all respects and comply with the
specifications as given.
2. CONDENSING UNITS
2.1 Each condensing unit shall be complete unit with hermetic rotary compressor/s, air
cooled condenser, condenser fans with motors, internal piping, switches and internal
wiring and shall be enclosed in a weather proof outdoor type housing.
2.2 The compressor shall be hermetic, with enclosed gas cooled motor. The compressors
shall be suitable for R-22.
2.3 The condenser coil shall be air cooled type with aluminium sine wave fins and copper
tubes and necessary refrigerant connections. The copper tubes shall not be less than
1/2” O.D.
2.4 The condenser air fans shall be propeller type direct driven, each complete with motor.
The air quantity and area of the condenser shall be adequate for working in the
specified outdoor conditions.
2.5 The casing shall be fabricated from galvanized steel and finished with powder coated
paint. The casing shall make the whole unit fully weather proof. Suitable for outdoor
installation.
2.6 The unit shall include a remote control assembly with thermostat and starter and speed
switches.
2.7 The necessary charge of refrigerant gas and lubricated oil shall be provided to run the
system.
3. COOLING UNIT (NON DUCTABLE)
3.1 The cooling unit shall be matched to the respective condensing unit and shall consist of
cooling coil, blower, filters, outer casing, drain pan, accessories etc.

3.2 The cooling coil shall have copper tubes of not less than 1/2” O.D. and continuous
aluminium sine fins with integral collars. The tubes shall be staggered in the direction
of the air flow.
3.3 The fan section shall comprise of 1 No. statically and dynamically balanced
centrifugal blower, motor, drive package, mounting arrangement etc.
3.4 The unit casing shall be made of galvanized steel, the casing shall be insulated to
lower the noise level and eliminate condensation.
3.5 Indoor unit should be as per UL 94.
4. REFRIGERANT PIPING
4.1 The condensing unit and evaporator unit shall be interconnected by type `L’ seamless
refrigerant liquid and suction lines using flared or brazed fittings. Necessary
accessories shall be incorporated in the circuit.
4.2 The suction and liquid line shall be insulated with 13 mm thick expanded polyethylene/
Nytrial rubber insulation
5. MISCELLANEOUS
5.1 The unit shall have control panel, housing the starting switches, contractor, relays etc.
5.2 Isolation pads shall be provided under the units.
5.3 Insulated drain line shall be provided from indoor unit upto drain trap.
5.4 Suitable M. S. channel supporting frame shall be provided for the condensing unit and
supporting arrangement for the indoor units.
5.5 Interconnecting power and control cabling shall be provided between condensing unit
and evaporator unit.
5.6 PVC flexible sleeves shall be provided to cover the insulated refrigerant piping and
electrical cabling from indoor to outdoor units.
5.7 Compressor current should not flow through indoor unit.
5.8 Inbuilt protection in indoor unit against electric fault to be provided.
6. INSTALLATION
6.1 The split type air conditioner shall be mounted on vibration isolators and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation such that no disturbing vibration
or noise is being transmitted to the nearby structure.
6.2 (i) Refrigerant pipes that exposed to outdoor shall be covered with UV coating to
protect insulation from direct UV exposure.
(ii) Anti corrosion protective coating on refrigerant pipes, Bents, Joints of indoor &
outdoor unit to be done to avoid leakages.
6.3 All galvanized support beams, galvanized legs, galvanized hangers, anchor bolts,
vibration isolators, ductworks and shall be provided for the installation of the units.
7. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
7.1 After installations are completed, all air handlers shall undergo test run. Any
adjustments that are needed shall be made to assure that all air handlers will operate
either the required performance. Report forms to contain following minimum data
listings shall include design and actual conditions for each Item mentioned below:
(1) Date and time of test.
(2) Air handling unit and fan coil unit make, type, name and serial number.

(3) Fan rpm.

(4) Fan motor amperage
(5) Rated motor amperage, starter number and ampere rating.
(6) Fan CFM
(7) Fresh air CFM in case of ductable units
(8) Outside conditions (DB and WB)
(9) Entering coil conditions (mixing) (DB and WB)
(10) Leaving coil conditions (DB and WB)
8.2 During test run, the air filters of testing sets shall be used.
C TECHNICAL DATA
1 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME AIR

COOLED UNITS
1.1 Outdoor Units
a. Make and Model

b. Type (Cooling or heat pump)
c. Dimension of unit (Overall)
d. Actual capacity (TR) at specified conditions
e. Permissible length of refrigerant piping (m)
f. Type of compressor
g. No. of compressor (each unit)
h. No. of digital compressor
i. Electrical characteristics
j. Power consumption at ARI conditions for
each capacity
100%
75%
50%
25%
1.2 Indoor Units
a. Manufacturer
b. Type
c. Nominal capacity (TR)
d. Airflow Min/Max (CFM)
e. Sound level (Hi/Lo)
f. Overall dimensions (L x W x H)
g. Unit weight (Kg)
h. Remote controller for each indoor unit
(Yes/No)

1.3 Centralized Controller

a. No. of controllers
b. Features
c. Power consumption
d. Technical brochures to be attached.
2. SPLIT AIR CONDITIONERS

General
Make --
Dimension L x H x D MM
Weight kg
Compressor
a) Manufacturer --
b) Model --
c) Type --
d) Refrigerant --
e) Power consumption kW
f) Refrigeration capacity nominal TR
g) Refrigeration capacity actual at 44o C air entering TR

D MODE OF MEASUREMENTS
1. UNITS PRICES IN THE SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES :
1.1 The item description in the schedule of quantities is in the form of a condensed resume. The
unit price shall be held to include everything necessary to complete the work covered by this
item in accordance with the specifications and drawings. The sum total of all the individual item
prices shall represent the total price of the installation ready to be handed over.
1.2 The unit price o the various items shall include the following:
1.2.1 All the labour required to supply and installs the complete installation in accordance with the
specifications.
1.2.3 Use of any tools, equipment, machinery, lifting tackle, scaffolding, ladders etc. required by the
contractor to carry out his work.
1.2.4 All the necessary measures to prevent the transmission of vibration.
1.2.5 The necessary material to isolate equipment foundations from the building structure, wherever
necessary.
1.2.6 Storage and insurance of all equipment, apparatus and materials.
1.3 The contractor's unit price shall include all equipment, apparatus, materials and labour indicated
in the drawings and/or specifications in conjunction with the item in question, as well as all
additional equipment, apparatus, material and labour usual and necessary to make in question
on its own (and within the system as a whole) complete even though not specially shown,
described or otherwise referred to.
E PREAMBLE TO SUBHEAD HVAC
1. The quantities given in the bill of quantities are approximate and are liable to vary due
to exigencies of work. Such variations in quantities shall not, however, vitiate the
contract in any way, whatsoever. The contractor will be paid for the actual measured
quantities of work executed by him at the contract rates for each item of work.
2. All the items of work shall be executed strictly in accordance with technical
specifications, equipment schedule, drawings and bill of quantities read in conjunction
with codes/standards specified and intent of the specifications. Equipment construction
specifications given in the NIT shall be treated as guidelines only. The equipment
offered shall be of standard design and of normal manufacturing range. It shall be
obligatory on the part of the tenderer to furnish all technical data relevant to the tender
along with his offer. In case contractor fails to furnish relevant technical data of
equipments or alternative specifications then NIT specifications shall be applicable.
3. The rate for each item of work specified in the bill of quantities shall unless expressly
stated otherwise, include the following (but not limited to the list given below):
a) All materials, equipment, accessories, supporting structure components, labour, tools,
tackles, plants, incidentals, etc. required for the full and entire execution and
completion of the work including testing and commissioning.
b) Wastage on materials and labour.
c) Loading, unloading, transportation, handling/double handling hoisting to all levels,
setting out of work, fixing in position, safe custody, security, disposal of debris and all
other labour necessary for full and complete execution of the work as per
specifications.
d) Liabilities, risk and obligations arising out of conditions of contract.
e) All taxes, entry tax, toll tax, works contract tax, excise duty, customs duty, service tax,
octroi, insurance, packing and forwarding, insurance at site (till handing over), labour
insurance or any other levies etc.
f) All the requirements of specifications, equipment schedule and drawings whether
such requirements are mentioned in the item or not. Specifications, equipment
schedule and drawings shall be read as part of bill of quantities.
g) Performance test at site – one in each season

4. The bill of quantities finished hereinafter shall be fully priced and the extensions and
the totals duly checked. Tender with lump sum pricing will be rejected.
5. Unless otherwise stated, the measurements shall be carried out strictly in accordance
with mode of measurements laid down in tender specification.
6. The term equipment or equal shall mean the equivalent as approved in writing by the
consultant. The provision equivalent shall be operative only if, the specified make of
material or equipment is not available in the market or production of such material is
discontinued by the manufacturer.
7. The prices shall be firm and shall not be subject to any variation due to increase in
labour wages, cost of materials, exchange rate variations, variation in custom duties,
excise duty, local levies, freight, etc. or any other variation due to any reason
whatsoever, whether during the stipulated period of contract or during the extend
period of completion if any.
8. The drawings indicating the nature of work have been issued along with the tender.
Successful tenderer shall prepare his shop drawings/detailed execution
drawings/layouts etc. and submit the same to the Engineer in charge for their approval
within 15 days from the date of award of work.
9. The approval of execution drawings/shop drawings/layout drawings shall not in any
way absolve the contractor of his obligation to fulfill the intent of the specifications.
10. It shall be contractors responsibility to provide adequate security and safeguard to the
materials supplied at site and the materials/equipment installed at site till the job is
completed and handed over to the employers.
11. The drawings furnished by the consultants generally depict the nature of work to be
carried and do not guarantee full accuracy of heights, dimensions and measurements
of spaces plenums, etc. it shall be the contractors responsibility to check the
dimensions, heights, etc. at site and report to the consultants the actual position, so
that corrective measures can be incorporated at appropriate stages to bring out the
final product as envisaged by the consultants.

SECTION: E-11
Viaduct lighting and Viaduct Power socket .
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work involves Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of LED light
fittings including all accessories mounting arrangement etc. including necessary
supports, Cabling, accessories and hardware as per specifications & as required at
site.
1.2 LUMINARIE SPECPECIFICATION
This specification covers for supply of Light Emitting Diode (LED) type light fixture that
shall be used for illumination of viaduct walkway .
The product should be latest and compliant to relevant IEC 60598-1, 2, 3, IEC 62031
and IEC/PAS 62612 as per the application with their latest edition. The bidders have to
submit type test certificate / performance certificate from the accredited laboratory with
the bid document.
1.1 FIXTURE
1.2.1 Degree of Ingress protection of enclosure of complete fixtures shall be at least IP-66.
1.2.2 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures against external mechanical impacts
shall be at list IK-8.
1.2.3 The fixture shall be suitable to work under following ambient conditions.
o Temperature variation of -100C to 500C .
o Atmosphere - The equipment shall be designed to work in coastal, humid, salt
laden and corrosive atmosphere.
1.2.4 Housing, shall be Extruded /Pressure die cast Aluminium, conforming to relevant
standards, polyester powder coated of at least 55 microns) and high U.V. &
corrosion resistance.
1.2.5 Heat sink used should be extruded Aluminium or Pressure Die-Cast Aluminium
having high conductivity .
1.2.6 Luminaire should be covered with suitable Glass or diffuser with High Transitivity.
Outdoor luminaire shall be with clear toughened glass or clear polycarbonate cover.
1.2.7 Lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed for continuous trouble free
operation under diverse atmospheric conditions without deterioration of materials.
1.2.8 The fixture should conform to applicable IEC 60598 (All parts & amendments) and
should have the associated LM-79 report (for Electrical and photometric test
methodology for LED lighting) from NABL/UL accredited lab. Test report shall be
submitted during vender model approval.
1.2.9 The fixture should have a surge protection of 10 KV.
1.2.10 Provision of termination of 3C X 1.5 Sqmm armoured cable. Termination of cable
should not affect the IP protection of Light.
1.2.11 The fixture shall have suitable mounting arrangement on grille of viaduct parapet as
per site requirement and as per lighting design.
1.3 LED: Approved makes are Philips-Lumileds, Osram, Nichia, Cree / Seoul
Semiconductor / Approved Equivalent. Manufacturer should have LM-80 report and
with projected life as per TM-21. Test report shall be submitted along with relevant
catalogues.

High lumen efficacy LEDs suitable for the application along with following features
shall be used:
 LED Efficacy at the chip level shall > 120 lumen/watt (For High power LED).
 The system luminous efficacy of LED luminaire’ shall be > 80 lumen/watt for
high wattage luminaries
 Adequate heat sink with proper thermal management shall be provided.
 Power factor of complete fitting shall be more than 0.9
 LED shall be surface mounted type duly soldered to PCB by Reflow system.
The Solder used shall be ROHS compatible for environment friendliness.
 Input frequency range shall be between 50Hz±3%.
 Colour rendering index CRI >=70 as specified in item description.
 Correlated Colour Temperature shall be in the range of 4000 K - 6500 K as
specified in item description.
1.4 LED driver
LED driver shall have following features:
 Input voltage Range within 160V(RMS) to 270V (RMS)
 Driver shall be designed to withstand 10 KV surge protection.
 Output voltage of the driver shall be designed to meet the Power Requirement of the
system.
 Output voltage ripple should be within 3%
 Output over voltage protection 125 V DC
 Full Load Efficiency ≥ 85%
 Total Harmonic Distortion
 For 0- 50 W for shall be less than 25%
 Above 50 W rating shall be less than 15%.
 Current waveform should meet EN 61000-3-2
 LED Driver shall withstand voltage of 320V for 2 hours and restore normal working
when normal voltage is applied
 The driver should comply to CISPR 15 for limits and methods of measurement of Radio
Disturbance characteristics
 The equipment should comply to IEC 61547 for EMC immunity requirements
 The control gear should be compliant to IEC 61347-2-13, IEC 62031 and IEC 62384.
1.5 General
The lumen maintenance of the LED lightings shall not be less than 70% after 50,000
hours i.e. L70 (B50).
The supplier shall provide evidence that the LED chipset manufacturer has the patent
right to produce the supplied LED chipset to avoid infringement of white LED patent.
Vender shall give for 60 months after public opening of section.

Test reports for various parameters i.e. flux, power, efficacy, chromaticity, temperature,
protection etc. issued by certified agency shall be furnished. Estimation on product’s
life and performance shall also be furnished.
1.6 DESIGN CRITERIA
The Light fixture shall be suitable to illuminate the viaduct walkway of with following
constant.
i. Minimum distance between two light fixtures. 10 Mtr.

ii. Minimum lux level to be maintained 2.7 Lux.
iii. height of light fixture as per desigine
iv. Power consumption by complete light fixture. 20W ±5%
Above parameters are for lux level calculation and may vary as per actual site
requirement.
2.0 Power Sockets along the Viaduct
Power sockets shall be installed along the viaduct.
From each station 2 cables of 5 core 25 sqmm 1100 V grade, armoured, FRLS, XLPE,
Aluminium (Al) one on each direction.
Sockets shall be placed every 50 meters or near points & crossings. These power
sockets shall be laid on the same side of cable brackets where 33 kV cable runs along
track. They shall be 16 A rated current with 5 pins/ 3 phases plus neutral plus earth.
The socket shall have protection of IP 65 wetherproof.
The tube shall enter into the connecting box to ensure proper sealing of the system.
One PVC conduit shall ensure the cabling between the connecting box and the socket
The connecting box shall ensure the connection of the socket by means of 5 wires
cable. Due to the difference in size between the main cables and the socket cable,
connecting plates will ensure this reduction.
The connecting box, PVC made, shall include five connecting plates, mounted on
insulators. Each connecting plate, copper made, shall ensure the connection of three
cables, one for the socket, the two others for the incoming and the outgoing cable.
The fixing of the cables will be done by bolt and nuts or bolt directly screwed in
the connecting plate.
The cable termination shall not be open but shall only permit the screwing in
order the cable do not fall and touch any other parts in case of bad tightening of
the bolt:
The connecting box shall be fixed on the parapet, under the socket .
The connecting box shall be waterproof and dust-proof, with PVC tubes placed
in position with a protection level of IP 65.

DG Sets
SECTION: E.12
1.0 SCOPE OF WORK
Design, Manufacture, Supply, Installation, testing and commissioning including Integral testing &
commissioning with systems of Diesel Engine Alternator sets including AMF Panel, Power and
Control Cabling from DG set to AMF Panel (with necessary cable end terminations), all the
necessary meters & Relays, Control wiring, Earthing, Day Oil Fuel Tank along with fuel piping,
Exhaust Piping, Silencer(s), Sound proof Enclosure and Fire Safety system, etc.
Models of DG sets offered should be strictly as per latest PCB norms of Bangladesh
(latest prevalent at the time of supply of the DG sets).
Scope of work under this tender will include:-
A. Design, Manufacture, Supply, including all transportation, arranging access to site, storage,
loading/unloading, insurance, installation, testing, commissioning, including Integral testing &
commissioning with systems and safe custody till handing over of the following of each sound
attenuated Diesel Generator set:-
a) Sound attenuated weather proof enclosures.
b) Ventilation and illumination system for acoustic enclosure.
c) Alternator and Engine with Radiator.
d) Residential/Critical/Hospital grade silencer.
e) Bank of starting batteries along with battery charger for trickle and boost charging of
battery bank.
f) Automatic Mains Failure (AMF) Panel for DG set operation.
g) Power cable from Generator to AMF Panel (with necessary cable end terminations).
h) All necessary control wiring from Generator to AMF Panel.
i) Approval of the Installation from EIG for its operation.
j) Anti vibration mounting pads.
k) All piping system between engine and radiator.
l) Piping system for fuel line from Engine to Day Oil fuel tank. The pipes shall be Mild
Steel (MS) pipes of 25 mm dia or braided flexible.
m) Calibrated Day Services Tank minimum capacity of 990 litres for operation of DG sets.
The tank shall be made out of 14 SWG thick MS sheets with all accessories such as oil
level indicator, drain plugs, manhole and painting etc. complete as required.
n) Provision of necessary signals for Local and remote monitoring and recording of
parameters through Building Management System (BMS).
o) Provision of making earth stations.

p) Provision of making cable trenches / or supplying and laying of GI/HDPE pipes to

accommodate all cables, earthing strips and fuel pipe lines as utility to DG set.
q) Supply and fixing of hot air exhaust duct of 22 SWG GI sheet with DG canopy to
remove hot air (if required).
B. Exhaust piping system including MS pipes, specials, bends, flanges, reducers etc. connection to
silencers and lagging the exhaust pipe as per specifications.
All the MS supports for the Exhaust pipe should be bolted type instead of being welded, so as to
facilitate easy removal /replacement.
As per the Pollution Control Board Of Bangladesh guidelines the Chimney / Stack height has to
be higher than the building height, therefore suitable Lightning protection system on the Exhaust
pipe, duly approved by Engineer Incharge has to be provided.
C. All wiring and connections including but not limited to between :-
i. Engine control panel and AMF Panel.
ii. Starting battery bank and engine control.
iii. Engine mounted alternator to static battery charger.
iv. Electrical panel and Fuel pumps etc.
v. Battery charger to batteries.
All necessary wirings & connections to make DG Set system fully functional.
D. Supply laying and commissioning of earthing from Earth stations (or existing station earthing
system) to D.G. Body and neutral and AMF panel separately by Cu/GI earthing Strips (suitable
design calculations to be submitted for review and concurrence by Engineer In-charge). The
fixing arrangement of Earth strips should ensure all safeguards against vandalism and
theft.
E. Alarms and Protection system should be got approved from Engineer In-charge. It should
include all parameters for safe operation and safety of equipment & personnel. AMF should be
PLC or microprocessor based with suitable interface for monitoring and recording of all
parameters by BMS.
F. Interfacing with Station Building Contractor and Electrical contractor.
G. Testing and commissioning (including arranging suitable consumables and testing equipment)
of the DG sets at site.
H. All other work, not specifically mentioned but required for satisfactory completion of work.
I. Automatic Gas flooding of AMF Panel, using linear heat sensing tubes Fire trace or equivalent.
Note:- All Cables (Power and Control cables) for Elevated stations will be FRLS only..
1.1 The contractor should go through all the site conditions of the DG set installation before
submitting the installation approval of the section/schedule. The DG sets are being installed at
the Elevated Metro stations. The requirements for the installation at the above sites may vary &
contractor has to coordinate with the different contractors for the foundation and other
requirements for the DG set Installation.

1.2 Tender Conditions, Specification and Schedule.
a. For any discrepancy between Technical Specifications and Bill of Quantities, provision
of Bill of Quantities shall prevail.
b. Any item shown in Bill of Quantities and not called for in the Specifications or vice versa
shall be provided as if called for in both.
c. Wherever it is mentioned that the Contractor shall perform certain work or provide
certain facilities, it implies that the Contractor shall do so at his cost.
d. At some elevated stations the DG sets are required to be installed below the staircase
(Road to Concourse level Staircase) as per the layout. The contractor has to co-ordinate with
the civil contractor for its requirements of Air circulation/Exhausts, cabling and foundations
etc. The contractor should study the each location of installation and submit the detail report
for approval to the Engineer- in charge before the installation of DG set. The space and
access requirements for the DG set transportation, de-loading, access to the room,
installation etc should be interfaced with the Civil contractor at the time of the construction of
the Staircase by the DG set Contractor.
2.0 INTERFACING WITH DESIGNATED CONTRACTOR

2.1 The DG set contractor will interface with Civil plumbing works contractor to ensure that a water
outlet (controlled by suitable Valve) shall be provided near the Acoustic Enclosure for meeting
the water requirement of DG set radiators.
2.2 All the power cable for carrying the power from DG AMF Panel to the distribution board (EPP),
including cable tray will be done by Station Electrical Contractor. DG Contractor will be required
to lay the voltage sensing cable form AMF panel to DG set for its AMF operation. and Power
Control cables from DG up to DG AMF Panel.
2.3 DG set Contractor will be required to provide at least Six Potential Free Contacts to the station
Electrical Contractor.
2.4 Employer is providing Building Management System at all the stations. DG set Contractor is
required to provide signals for the BMS. All signals (digital as well as continuous/ analog) should
be available from PLC of AMF panel or microprocessor through RS – 485 ports. All the
information for the BMS should be compatible with MOD – BUS protocol. All energy related
parameters shall be made available through a RS 485 port.
2.5 DG sets are expected to run at light load/No load. The DG set offered, shall be suitable for
operation under light load/No load, without any adverse impact on the service performance or
life of the equipment. The tenderer should clearly explain that the DG set proposal meets the
above requirements. Refer Annexure-4 of ITT, tenderer technical proposal
2.6 Stations are provided with independent reliable sources for power supplies and DG sets would
be required to operate for a very small duration and after large period of idling. DG set should
be designed to work satisfactorily even after prolonged idling period.
2.7 Approximately 60 percent of the load shall be non – linear, DG set should be designed to
operate under non – linear load environment. DG set should be so designed that the ripples are

not created in the energy generated and EMI and RFI are within acceptable limit, specified by
standards.
(Requirements of EMI/ EMC due to Single – phase A.C. traction should be taken care)
During the Integrated, Testing and Commissioning of the DG set, the set will be tested for the
actual linear and non – linear loads at site and the test report furnished.
2.8 Equipment offered shall comply with latest pollution norms as notified by the Government and
other statutory bodies at the time of delivery of the DG sets at the site.
All drawings and other documentation shall be submitted in hard copy format as well as in soft
copies in latest version of MS word latest version and PDF formats.
3.0 APPROVAL AND TESTING OF DG SET.
Following test acceptance criteria shall be applicable.
1. Fuel consumption at 50 %, 75 % ± 5 % of guaranteed performance.
and 100 % load Actual alternator efficiencies as
determined in the manufacturers works
tests shall be used as the basis of
calculation of specific fuel consumption
ratio.
2. Voltage regulation from no load ± 0. 5%
to full load
3. Frequency regulation from no ± 0. 5%
load to full load
4. Maximum water temperature ± 5 % of guaranteed performance
5. Maximum lube oil temperature ± 5 % of guaranteed performance
6. Maximum lube oil pressure ± 5 % of guaranteed performance
3.1. The tests shall include the following minimum requirements.
a) Verification of the suitability of the system, its efficiency, etc.

b) Performance testing of DG set for 8 hours. .
c) Capacity testing of the DG set.
d) Any additional testing as required as per relevant standards.
e) Fuel consumption of the DG set.
f) Complete functional tests.
g) Testing of the Sound Acoustics enclosures.
3.2. Fault Simulation and testing of control & protection devices.
3.3. Documents of routine tests & type test certificates of the equipment shall be
furnished by contractor submit Engineer in charge .
a) Routine Test:-

1. Engine separately
2. Alternator Separately
3. DG Set
b) Type test certificates.
1. Engine.
2. Alternator.
3. Pumps.
4. Meters.
5. Governors.
6. All major components.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
4. DIESEL GENERATING SET
4.0 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
a) The working kVA rating at site condition after accounting for de – rating shall be
obtained at 0.8 power factor.
b) Period of Operating:- The set may be idle for a long period except for routine
test periodically. When there is an electrical supply failure it will be required to
work continuously at variable load with average load factor of 80% as per
ISO 8528.
c) Overload:- The set shall be capable of taking 10% overload for a period of one
hour during any 12 hours period while operating as per above conditions.
d) Shaft Speed:- Rotational speed shall not exceed 1500 rpm.

e) Loads:- The set shall be capable of operating in conjunction with non-
linear and harmonics generating electronic loads including the
UPS System.
5.0 STANDARDS
5.1 The set shall conform to following standards with latest amendments.
(A) Diesel Engines : BS : 5514
BS : 649
(B) Alternator : BS-5000, IEC 3411
(C) Sound Insulation : ASTM C612, C553 or equivalent BS 3958-5
(D) Fuel Filters : BS 4552
(E) Air Filters : BS 7226
(G) Latest 75 DB Noise Level, Height of Stack/Chimney & Emission levels.
(H) Genset : ISO 8528
5.0 DIESEL ENGINE :

5.1 Construction
5.1.1 The Engine shall be internal combustion type direct injection, cold start suitable for
diesel fuel, 1500 rpm, turbocharged, with electronic governor suitable for auto
synchronisation, 4-stroke of suitable rating with provision of 10% overload for 1 hour
in every 12 hours of running. Engine shall be multi-cylinder of “in – line” or “V”
configuration and complete with basic accessories.
5.1.2 Engine shall be built to comply with BS 5514 The engine shall be complete with
cooling fan drive, lubricating oil filters, air cleaners, starter motor/exciter, fuel injector,
fuel control solenoid, fuel lift pump, engine speed adjustment, other standard /
operational accessories and protective devices including Genset controller.
5.1.3 The Diesel Engine are designed for operation on HSD oil Grade A..

5.1.4 The engine shall be fitted with a heavy, dynamically balanced flywheel suitable for
constant speed generator duty to meet the cycle variation requirements. An
electronic speed governor shall be fitted to maintain engine speed at all conditions of
load in line with the requirements of BS : 5514.
5.1.5 Cylinder Housing and heads shall be provided along with other accessories.
5.1.6 Crankshaft shall be truly balanced.

5.1.7 Pistons shall be of aluminium alloy and provided with necessary compression and
scrapper rings and a fully floating gudgeon pin.
5.1.8 Connecting rods shall be H-section steel stampings. Camshaft shall be gear driven
(fly-wheel end) and easily removable.
5.1.9 Lubrication system shall be complete with necessary gear pump, piping and drilled oil
passage strainer, oil cooler and relief valve, etc.
5.1.10 DG set shall be able to start automatically even in cold condition without any adverse
effect on its performance and capable to take full load within 30 seconds (wake up
time) of failure of normal supply.
5.1.11 DG set shall be designed for low specific fuel consumption. Specific fuel consumption
at rated load should not be more than as per ISO 3046 / BS 5514. During testing of
DG set, consumption will be checked and recorded at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of
rated loads.
5.1.12 Not Used.

5.1.13 The DG set shall be suitable for continuous operation inside the acoustic enclosure
under all the ambient conditions without any adverse effect on its performance.
5.1.14 The DG set shall be suitable for continuous operation inside the acoustic enclosure
under all the ambient conditions upto 50 degree C ambient without any adverse
effect on its performance.
5.1.15 The AMF panel shall be connected & provided with suitable interlocking
arrangements to ensure automatic starting of the DG set in case of failure of supply
from both the sources and interlocking arrangement to avoid any incident of
paralleling of normal power supply with DG set supply.
5.2 Cooling
5.2.1 The engine shall be complete with suitable radiator for cooling the machine in tropical
ambient temperatures of 50 degree C, with engine-driven blower type heavy duty
cooling fan and radiator core.

5.2.2 Water cooled with fan and radiator, with engine driven circulating water pump,
thermostat, temperature gauge with high temperature alarm / trip. Cooling water
circuit shall be fitted with corrosion inhibitors and coolant supplied by
manufacturer*.
*The need of the corrosion inhibitors shall be examined during design stage,
based on recommendations of Engine Manufacturer.
5.2.3 A thermostatic valve should by-pass the coolant in the primary circuit until a pre-set
operating temperature is reached.
5.2.4 The design shall take into account compensation for possible ingress of dirt, which
may normally clog the fins. The choice shall take into account the place of installation
and the flexibility available for locating cooling system, air circulation and smoke
exhaust.
5.3 Fuel Tanks
5.3.1 A Fuel Day tank of not less than 990 litres Diesel Storage Capacity complete with
mechanical fuel oil level indicator to indicate ‘High’ and ‘Low’ levels and isolation
valves. Rotary hand pump with flexible hose shall be supplied for pumping and
storing Fuel oil from barrels to ‘Day Tank’ as necessary. The tank shall be complete
with a floor stand such that the tank is installed at the optimum height which allows
correct suction pressure to the Fuel lift pump of the Generator set when the fuel in
the tank is at any level between low level and high level.
5.3.2 The tank shall be constructed from Mild Steel of not less than 14 SWG thickness in
accordance with relevant International standards. It shall be complete with filter,
breather unit and drain plug. The associated fittings shall be constructed from
materials which are suitable for long terms contact with diesel fuel and shall not
include yellow brass, low grade of copper and zinc, lead, and galvanized metals. The
fuel piping and tanks shall be designed to be free from leakage and airlocks. The fuel
tank shall be supplied with a level gauge to indicate the oil level in the tank in liters.
The following fittings shall be included :
a) Direct reading level indicated (gauge),
b) Drain pipe situated at lowest point in tank complete with isolating valve,
c) Outlet pipe complete with manually operated isolation valve and mechanically
operated isolation valve (for fire shut-down),
d) Fuel inlet pipe from the filling point at the top of the tank,
e) Fuel return inlet pipe connection (from the generator set),
5.4 Filtration

5.4.1 The engine shall have replaceable fuel oil filters. Lube oil filtration, air filtration shall
also be through replaceable filters.
5.4.2 Fuel Filters
A supply line fuel filters shall be fitted and shall be of twin replaceable elements type.
5.4.3 Air filters
The engine shall be fitted with dry type air filters with replaceable elements.
5.4.4 Twin heavy duty air intake filters in accordance with BS 7226 suitable for operating in
dust- laden atmospheres shall be fitted. Breathers shall be fitted with washable
filters, which are easily accessible for maintenance.
5.5 Engine Exhaust
5.5.1 The engine exhaust piping shall be amply sized for minimum back pressure and connected to
the engine manifold through flexible connection or an expansion joint on one side and to a
silencer on the other side along with pipe. The silencer shall be package type with adequate
attenuation for urban use, constructed from heavy gauge galvanised steel. The sound
absorbent infill shall be non-hygroscopic, vermin proof, non-combustible material. Engine
shall be provided with Residential/critical/hospital – grade silencers so as to achieve sound
attenuation of more than 25 dBA from the DG set .
5.5.2 The exhaust piping from the silencer onward shall be led upto the specified/approved
level and discharged through a rain cowl. Entire exhaust piping and silencer shall be
Class ‘B’ MS pipe and shall be rock woo insulated with 50 Mm thick 64 Kg/cum
density. The insulation shall be held in position with 0.63 mm dia, 20 mesh,
galvanised steel wire mesh and finished neatly with 24SWG Aluminium cladding.
5.5.3 The generator set shall be provided with an exhaust system incorporating
residential/critical/ Hospital – grade silencers. If possible, the silencers shall be
contained entirely within the Generator building / on acoustic enclosure.
5.5.4 DG sets the Stack Height / Height of Chimney shall be worked out as per the formula
given below:-
H = h + 0.2 x SQROOT(KVA).
H = Total height of Stack in meter.
h = Height of the building in meters where the generator set is installed.

KVA = Total Generator capacity of the set in KVA
Based on the above formula the minimum stack height to be provided with different
range of Generator sets may be categorized as follows:-
Capacity of Generators Sets Total Height of Stack in meter

1. 50 KVA Ht. Of the building + 1.5 meter.
2. 50 – 100 KVA Ht. Of the building + 2.0 meter.


Similarly for higher KVA ratings a stack height can be worked out using this formula.
The Exhaust Pipe is to be provided keeping in view the Pollution Control Board Of
Bangladesh guidelines. Nothing extra shall be paid on account of the suitable
support structure to be provided for the Exhaust pipe (suitable support structure
should be part of DG set exhaust pipe item).
5.5.5 Flanged connection to the silencer and between pipe sections shall be made.
Minimum wall thickness of pipes and the silencer shall be 3 mm. A stainless steel
bellows unit shall be provided for connection onto the engine.
5.5.6 Exhaust pipes within the building shall be lagged and guarded to prevent accidental
contact up to a height of 2.5 m. No part of any exhaust system installed outside the
building shall be less than 3 m from ground level. Passage of exhaust pipes through
walls or the roof shall be sleeved and shall be shrouded to prevent ingress of rain or
vermin.
5.5.7 Exhaust piping shall be fabricated from class ‘B’ MS pipes , size suitable to limit
backpressure to within permissible limit. The insulation thickness stipulated in the
schedule of quantities shall be checked by the tenderers to achieve a maximum
temperature of 600 C on the outside surface of the insulated pipe and supporting
calculations for back pressure shall be furnished, the measurement of the back
pressure will be checked during proto type testing. Flanged joints in the exhaust
piping shall be covered with removable insulation at suitable intervals for permitting
access to the joint, as and when required. All flanged joints shall have spiraget high
temperature gasket. The piping shall be installed with necessary thermal expansion
facility as required. Exhaust piping shall be connected to the engine by means of
flexible section or an expansion joint and shall also be graded to a drain pocket
inside the building. The pocket shall be fitted with a drain cock.
5.6. Sound Attenuating Acoustic Enclosure
5.6.1 DESIGN
The sound attenuation enclosure should be designed keeping into account the latest
International norms .
Sound Attenuating Acoustic Enclosure should have pleasant and aesthetic looks and
should be designed to achieve the Final sound level of 75 dB (maximum) at a
distance of one meter from the Acoustic enclosure as per ISO 8528 part 10. For

testing, the measurement of dB shall be done at different points all along the
enclosure and then averaged as per ISO 8528 part 10 procedures.
The sound attenuating enclosure shall be meticulously designed and it’s design, construction
etc. should be decided based on ventilation requirement and should be completely weather
proof.
In design, proper care should be taken for engine heat rejection in order to have safe working
temperature inside the enclosure by provision of fans etc, as required. The design aspect
should ensure free and uninterrupted flow of suction and exhaust air in order that the
temperature rise of the enclosure with respect to the ambient is less than 7C.
5.6.2 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES:

1) STRUCTURE: Enclosure shall be
made in modular design and can be dismantled/assembled at site..It shall be made out of
heavy gauge mild steel sections and reinforced with fabricated super structure, the
supporting frame work shall be of 1.6 mm thickness. Outside covers & doors shall be
fabricated in 1.6 mm thick CRCA sheet. Inside cover or perforated sheet should be used.
The base of Acoustic Enclosure shall be made from suitable size of M.S. sheet / Channel.
There should be provision of lifting-hooks on the enclosure to ensure easy lifting.“CAP –
ON” type Acoustic Enclosure shall not be accepted.
2) ACCOUSTIC INSULATION (walls,
Roof and Doors): Fire retardant Foam/Mineral rock wool slab of minimum density &
thickness confirming to ASTM C612, C553 or equivalent BS 3958-5 and with covered by
fire resistant fiber tissue confirming to AWWA C – 203 specifications.
For DG sets upto 250 KVA Fire retardant Foam can be used & above 250 KVA Mineral
Rock wool can be used as per the requirement, and confirming the Latest standard norms
as applicable at the time of delivery.
3) AIR INLET & AIR OUTLET: Specially
designed sound attenuators at Suction & Exhaust ends.
4) PAINTING: Outer surface of Acoustic
Enclosure shall be painted with Polyurethane paint or powder coated but painting should
be done after corrosion treatment of sheet by 7 tank treatment process (or latest available)
& synthetic enamel paint on the internal surface. All nuts & bolts shall be zinc coated. The
color of the Enclosure should be got approved from the Employer. Enclosure should be
suitably coated to withstand arduous temperature conditions of Dhaka.
5) WIRING AND LIGHTING: Suitable
lighting arrangement to be provided in all compartments of Sound attenuating Acoustic
Enclosure i.e. E/A set, Fuel tank, AMF Panel with PVC FR copper wire of minimum 2.5
mm2, 1100 V grade concealed in flexible conduit / channel & MCB.
6) EXHAUST OF ENGINE: The Engine
Exhaust shall consist of suitable dia ‘B’ class M.S pipe (Insulated) along with smooth

bends & supported. This pipe shall be suitably brought out at the top of enclosure with
suitable arrangement at the outer end for preventing water to enter in pipe as required.
The Exhaust Muffler with insertion loss of 25 dB shall be provided. For the Engine Exhaust
detailed specifications as per clause 5.5. are to be complied.
7) PROVISION FOR NEUTRAL/BODY
EARTHING: Suitable bus bars have to be provided outside sound Attenuating Acoustic
Enclosure for neutral/Body earthing separately. The neutral terminals shall be connected
to the neutral of Alternator with flexible copper wire insulated braided strip. All the
Equipments inside the Acoustic Enclosure shall be connected together with suitable size
strip and then connected to the Body Earthing busbars.
8) VENTILATION & AIR CIRCULATION:
The system shall be designed to provide air inlet/exhaust acoustic louvers for efficient air
circulation under all loading conditions. The ventilation may be natural/forced cooling. The
temperature rise of the enclosure with respect to the ambient should be less than 7C. In
case of forced ventilation there should be specially designed circuitry to ensure that the
fan(s) starts when the Genset is in operation and when the Genset has been switched off
the fan(s) automatically switches over to main supply and runs for 5 – 15 minutes
(programmable) before stopping to ensure that set is ready to start in case of another
failure.
9) SPECIAL FEATURE:
a) Fuel tank shall be provided at suitable place (nearest to E/A set) inside or
outside the sound attenuating enclosure. If fuel tank is placed outside the sound
attenuating enclosure the suitable lockable enclosure is to be provided for the same for
which nothing extra shall be payable. Provision should be there to fill this tank from
outside as in automobiles and this should be with a lockable cap.
b) The batteries shall be accommodated in the sound attenuating enclosure in
battery tray.
c) Control Panel as well as engine instruments panel shall be inside the sound
attenuating enclosure with free frontal access.
d) The control panel may be placed inside / outside the sound attenuating
enclosure. In case provided out side the Control panel shall be provided in an enclosure
of same specification as that of sound attenuating enclosure except the sound proofing
arrangement. As far as possible the control panel shall be placed adjacent to the
enclosure to have minimum length of cable.
e) The sound attenuating enclosure shall be provided with
residential/critical/hospital – grade silencers insulated from inside with rock wool having
minimum insertion loss as specified in the Latest International norms.
f) The sound attenuating enclosure should be as compact as possible with
good aesthetic look.

g) From continuous running of engine, the temperature inside the sound

attenuating enclosure shall be maintained within 7C of ambient and canopy shall be
provided with temperature safety device to shut down engine if canopy temperature
exceeds 60C.
h) The sound attenuating enclosure shall be complete with ducting & radiator
bellow.
i) The sound attenuating enclosure shall have built in receiving tray at base of
the Genset for any oil spillage.
j) The sound attenuating enclosure shall have provision of emergency shut
down from outside the container.
5.6.3 The sound attenuating enclosure door shall be gasketed with high quality EPDN
gaskets to avoid leakage of sound. The door handles should be provided with
durable weather – proof locking system.
5.6.4 All the doors of the sound attenuating enclosure shall be lockable and theft proof.
5.7 Safety Systems
5.7.1 Governor
The performance of the governor under load conditions shall be to Class A1 in

accordance with BS 5514 : Part 4 (ISO 3046).
The governor shall meet the following performance requirements:

a) Steady state speed band: + 1% or + 0.25% of nominal speed,
b) Transient frequency change on application or rejection of 60% load: ± 5%,
c) Recovery time to steady state speed band on application of 60% load : 10
seconds,
d) Maximum speed drop: 5%
The electrical over speed trip provided shall operate at 120% of the rated speed and
shall be reset only by hand.
5.7.2. Delete
5.7.3 Other safety controls and indicating instruments shall be as shown in Data Sheet.
5.8. Engine Starting

5.8.1 The starting system shall comprise a 12/24 V heavy duty suitable capacity
maintenance free high discharge lead acid battery, as required, and electric starting
motor. The battery shall be sized to give not less than Ten consecutive starts of the
engine at 0C to 50C. The starting system shall be complete with necessary relays,
solenoid valves for fuel, control and indicating panels as specified and required.
5.8.2 A mains powered battery charger shall be provided, with sufficient capacity to
maintain the battery in a condition to fulfill the starting requirements.

5.8.3 The mains powered charger shall be suitable for operating on 240 V, single phase,50
HZ supply and shall be complete with the following indications and features:
a) Battery charge / discharge current,
b) Boost charge / trickle charge selector,
c) On / Off switch,
d) Fault indication.
e) Protection Auto cut off feature to safeguard batteries from over charging.
f) DC ammeter and voltmeter
g) Annunciation panel for battery charging indication
The input voltage to battery charger may vary between 180 V to 240 V, therefore the
battery charger should be capable of charging the battery to the desired voltage level
with the above input Voltage range.
5.8.4 The battery charger shall have a selector switch by which the rate of charging the
batteries can be selected.
5.8.5 If the equipment does not start within three starting cycles with appropriate interval
between each attempt, the starting circuit shall be located and audio-visual alarm
shall be given.
5.9 Mounting and installation

5.9.1 The engine shall be complete with suitable radiator for cooling the machine in tropical ambient
temperatures, with engine-driven blower type heavy duty cooling fan and radiator core.
5.9.2 A common rigid bed plate shall be provided for the engine and alternator which shall
be directly coupled. The coupling must be done after ensuring proper alignment of
generator and engine shafts.
5.9.3 The entire set shall be housed in sound attenuating enclosure mounted on suitable
Rubber-in-shear type vibration mounts with 6mm static deflection for isolating the
building floor/foundation. A nominal base concrete pad (if required) shall be provided
over which the engine set with its own base frame and vibration mounts shall be
mounted. It is to be ensured that minimum vibrations are transmitted to the surface on
which set is resting.
5.9.4 Radio Interference

All equipments, provided under the scope, shall be so designed that they shall not
cause interference with radio equipment. In the event of the inherent characteristics
of the equipment being such that radio interference is possible, efficient devices to
nullify the same shall be provided.

6.0 ALTERNATOR :
6.1 Type & Rating

6.1.1 Alternator shall be 3 phase, 4 wire 50 cycles 415 volt, totally enclosed, brush-less screen
protected drip proof with self contained excitation system and self regulating and conforming
to BS-5000, IEC 3411 & continuously rated. The alternator should have the rated capacity
at 0.8 PF. The alternator shall be designed to suppress radio interference in conformity with
BS 800. It shall be of heavy-duty single/double bearing design, adaptable for direct coupling
with diesel engine including excitation system, automatic voltage regulator, voltage adjusting
potentiometer [to adjust nominal voltage over a range of approximately (+) or (-) 5%] and low
speed protection, to reduce voltage proportional to the driven speed in order to protect both
alternator and V/ F sensitive loads.
6.1.2 The supply interlocks shall be provided to supply the electricity after stabilisation only. The
excitation system shall provide an exceptionally rapid response to load change and alternator
shall be designed for high motor starting capabilities.
6.1.3 The alternator shall be tropically insulated with H class insulation and windings shall be
impregnated with thermosetting insulated varnish to use in tropical climates. Ample ventilation
shall be provided by shaft mounting fan as per manufacturer design.
i) The neutral point shall be brought out separately and earthed permanently.
ii) The band of voltage regulation shall be + / - 0.5% from no load to full load and
under varying load conditions.
iii) The overload capacity shall be 150 – 300 % for 10 seconds limitation , if any,
shall be highlighted by the manufacturer.
iv) The Alternator shall be suitable for taking unbalanced load, limitation, (if any),
shall be highlighted by the manufacturer.
6.1.4 The alternator shall be of fabricated steel construction conforming to minimum IP-23
class specified(test certificates conforming to the specified IP class should be
produced by the contractor), dynamically balanced rotor with single / two bearings
and damper windings. The unit shall be with a large terminal box for outgoing cable
connections specified. Necessary adapter box shall be provided if the terminal box is
not adequate to receive the cables.
6.1.5 Alternator rotor shall be salient pole type with a damper cage and dynamically
balanced. Insulation shall be to class ‘H’ (BS 2757/1957). All winding shall be fully
impregnated for tropical climates with high quality or epoxy varnish.
6.1.6 Ventilation to the alternators shall be by means of fans fitted on the rotor.

6.1.7 It shall handle 10% overload in one hour in every 12 hrs of operation without
exceeding the permissible possible temperature rise for the class of insulation
provided.
6.2 Excitation system

6.2.1 The main exciter shall receive power from a permanent magnet generator through
separate auxiliary windings on stator via Automatic Voltage regulator. The AVR shall
be of solid state circuitry and shall provide regulated voltage to the exciter
compensating for all normal variations. The main exciter output is fed to the main
motor windings via a rotating 3-ph bridge rectifier assembly which shall be protected
from voltage surges, short circuit, overload and diode failures. The AVR and control
gear shall be mounted in a component box on the side of the machine. Electrical
connections to the AVR shall be taken through a multi way plug and socket.
6.2.2 Voltage regulation shall be within half percent under all conditions of load, power
factor and temperature including cold to hot variation. There shall be no radio or
television interference. Line voltage wave form shall be as true as possible with a
total harmonic distortion not exceeding 3% on 3-Ph load.
6.2.3 The excitation system and engine governor should be such that the alternator is
capable of starting up induction motors having a starting kVA of not less than 1.8
times the alternator rated kVA. Manufacturer should indicate the voltage dip and
duration under such conditions as required under equipment data.
The highest capacity of induction motor to be started for elevated stations will be
75HP with the base load of 45 kVA.
6.2.4 The neutral of each generating set shall be earthed solidly to ground with facility for
isolation through a fully rated contactor.
6.3 Automatic Mains Failure (AMF) operation
The AMF panel shall be capable of starting the DG set automatically in the event of
unhealthy conditions of the main power supply including power (mains) failure, single
phasing or voltage going below 85% or 360 V at the bus bar of MDB or Essential
power panel and shall switchover essential load from the main supply to DG set. The
voltage on both the incoming mains shall be continuously monitored through
adjustable voltage monitor on all the three phases. To avoid unnecessary frequent
starting and stopping of the DG set caused by momentary unhealthy condition, an
adjustable timer with setting 1 to 10 seconds shall be incorporated in the control
system. The DG set shall start automatically within 30 seconds of main supply failure.
It shall be idle for three minutes after making change over from DG set supply to

main supply, to ensure that the main supply has stabilised. The manufacturer shall
specify the adjustable range in both the cases.
6.3.1 The DG set Contactor or breakers shall have 4 poles (3 phase and 1 neutral)
electrically interlocked.
6.3.2 The AMF logic must be achieved through a PLC or microprocessor based circuitry to
monitor engine controls with an ON line mimic giving status of Engine running,
voltage built up & other status as required & specified. AMF shall have 3 modes of
operations viz. Automatic, manual & test. The set shall be capable of starting and
taking up the load within the time stipulated in the data sheets.
6.3.3 The sequence of Automatic Mains Failure (AMF) operation shall be as follows:
i. Upon main power failure, the generator shall receive 3 kick-starts and the
generator breaker shall close only after building up of requisite voltage.
ii. Hold the Mains Contactor or Breaker open.
iii. On restoration of power, AMF logic should make change over from DG set to
main supply and trip the engine after a preset time delay.
6.3.4 The AMF Panel should therefore comprise:
1. 4 Pole MCCBs & 3 pole breakers / contactor and One Neutral Isolating contactor
of adequate rating, electrically and mechanically interlocked.
2. Battery charger with normal and trickle charging facility and an isolating switch.
3. Over load and E/F protection for the generator set.
4. For DG sets of Elevated stations, 2 outgoing breakers shall be provided – one for
Panel of Fire fighting system & one to extend power supply to Main distribution
panel.
6.4 The contractor shall provide a flame proof Portable Oil Filling pump- Electrical Type
with 40 lpm capacity to deliver the oil upto height of 10 mtr.
7.0 PROTECTION / ANNUNCIATION :
Protection and annunciation system confirming to latest standards like BS/IEC with
soft control and touch resets shall be designed and provided comprising of following
but not limited to:-
i) Overload and short circuit trip for main in-comer
ii) Overload and short circuit trip for the DG set
iii) Over and under voltage protection

iv) Over and under frequency protection
v) High temperature for cooling water trip

vi) Alarm in case the DG set is not run for 15 days at a stretch.

vii) Earth fault
viii) Loss of sensing

ix) Low battery voltage
viii) Fault indication alarm through suitably designed Annunciator with in built
hooter
ix) High Temperature in Canopy / DG room.

x) Over speed Trip.
xi) Field overload

xii) Over current/
xiii) Any other alarm as specified.
8.0 METERS AND INDICATORS AS FOLLOWS :

(a) Meter Generator as given in Specifications and data sheets
Battery 0 - 24V Voltmeter

0 - 5A Ammeter for charge.
0 - 75mA ammeter for trickle charge.

(b) Indication and Alarm annunciation
Engine side As given in Specifications and data sheets

Additional Indication Alarm
Battery Charger ON Yes -

High/Low battery voltage - Yes
Failed to start Yes Yes

Lack of Fuel oil Yes Yes
Low lubricating oil pressure Yes Yes

High oil temperature Yes Yes
Gen. On Yes -
Mains On Yes -
Enclosure Temperature. High Yes Yes

Overspeed Yes Yes
(c) Auto-Manual selector switch

Start-Stop Reset Buttons
Alarm Reset Buttons

Lamp testing Buttons
9.0 BATTERY SYSTEM :
There shall be a 12/24V lead acid stationary battery with an AH capacity suitable for
10 (ten) cranking attempts of (10 seconds each) (suitable design to be submitted by
the firm for each capacity of DG set and to be got approved from Engineer incharge)
plus all indicating lamps and alarm before the cell voltage goes down by 1.8V.
Battery shall be complete with necessary angle iron stand and multi strand flexible
copper leads. The battery charger in the AMF Panel shall be capable of floating the
battery with quick and trickle charging facility to maintain a cell voltage of 2 Volts. The
battery stand and the canopy failure should be provided with suitable safeguards
against battery Acid.
10.0 CONTROL SYSTEM :
The control system shall work on suitably supplied DC / AC operated system with provision of
alarm and operation status available on auxiliary terminal board so as to enable it to extend
alarm and operation status to operation control center & station control center. The metering
system shall be based on digital indication with status on auxiliary contacts. The control
system and metering panel shall provide for the following:
A) Metering/Indication
- Voltmeter
- Phase sequence indication
- Ammeter
- KW Meter
- Frequency Meter
- Battery Voltmeter
- Common Fault Alarm Signal
- KWH meter
- Power factor meter
B) Counters
- Hours Run Counter
C) Controls
- Emergency Stop Button
- Run/Off-Reset/Auto Control Switch
- Lamp Test/Reset Push Button
- 3 Attempt Start Timer

- Terminals for Remote / Emergency Stop
- Interface to Remote Annunciator
- Voltmeter Phase Selector Switch,
- Ammeter Selector Switch
Note : For Metering, Indication and Control, above or equivalent system shall be designed &
provided as per the latest industrial standards, after getting explicit approval of the Employer.
The annunciation alarm shall be repeated to the station control room.
11.0 FINISH :
The generator shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed with two coats of industrial primer and
finished in two coats of industrial high gloss paint.
12.0 TESTING & COMMISSIONING :
The complete Diesel generator set shall be thoroughly checked for correct operation and load
tested in supplier works before dispatch. All fluid seals, faults, control functions and site load
conditions shall be simulated, checked and proved. The equipment shall be dispatched after
testing in presence of authorised representative of purchaser.
12.1 After installation each DG set shall be tested and the specific fuel oil consumption will be
checked. The values of the oil consumption noted at the time of testing will be the basis for
the penalty, if any on the DG set manufacturer as per Appendix-F Annexure 4 of ITT, on the
successful commissioning. Each DG set shall be run for a minimum period of 30 minutes
continuously on no load. On satisfactory completion of the no-load run the set shall be run for
a period of 6.5 hours at 100% full load and followed by 60 minutes operation at 10%
overload. All consumables including fuel, lubricating oil and load banks required for
commissioning the set shall be supplied by the contractor. Test readings together with a
hourly log of the running test shall be furnished.
The trial shall be conducted in the presence of the Employer Representative / Project
Manager and the test results shall be recorded in an approved format. Any abnormal
condition occurring during trial run of the DG set shall also be recorded. Test results shall be
recorded at 30 minutes intervals. All facilities, labour, instruments, materials and consumables
including fuel and lubricating oil required for the test shall be provided by the contractor at his
cost.
12.2Tests proving the satisfactory performance of all operating gear, safety functions and controls
shall be carried out.
12.4 Performance test at site shall include (but not limited to) the following test acceptance
criteria:
1. Voltage variation ± 1% or ± 0.25%

2. Voltage regulation ± 0.5%
3. Frequency regulation ± 1% or ± 0.25%

4. Maximum water temperature ± 5% of guaranteed performance.
5. Minimum lube oil pressure ± 5% of guaranteed performance.

6. Temperature rise in the
Acoustic Enclosure Not to exceed 7 oC above Ambient.

7. Noise Measurement not more 75 Db at one mtr from
canopy.
8. Muffler / Silencer Test Test certificate from Independent lab
to be submitted
9. Fuel Consumption at 50%, 75% & 100% load ± 5% of guaranteed
performance.
10. Measurement of Vibration around the DG set Enclosure.
11. Testing of all Trips and Alarms, and data logging and monitoring systems.
Contractor shall be required to carry out any further tests / trials that the Engineer’s may
desire to satisfy themselves that the Generator Sets and Associated equipments fully comply
with the conditions as set out in these Specifications. Co-ordination with EIG for inspection
shall be the responsibility of contractor.
13.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION

13.1 General
13.1.1 The Contractor shall provide Interactive Training and Operation and Maintenance
manuals, bi – lingual (i.e. in Bangle and English both) and Interactive Video CD, for
use by supervisory, operating and technical staff of Employer. In addition contractor
shall provide Computer Based training program for the Trouble shooting and
Operation and Maintenance of the DG Set.
Requirements of Interactive Manual
The contractor shall submit in English language Interactive Electronic Technical

Manuals (IETMs) to manage technical documentation. IETMs shall compress
volumes of text into CD-ROMs which may include sound and video, and shall allow
readers to locate needed information rapidly than in paper manuals.
This IETM shall follow the structure and format of a printed book, with indexes and
table of contents that are hyperlinked into the content of the document. All figures,
tables and section references shall be linked.

The data to be stored in a relational database, obtaining benefits of data integrity and
removal of data redundancy. Relationships in the content that are presented as
hyperlinks, are mapped directly to relations in the database scheme. The IETM shall
be able to change the content dynamically based on users navigation and input
through the content; the content may now be user specific.
13.1.3 Each and every manual shall be divided into indexed sections explaining the subject
matter in logical steps. Most manuals shall consist of A4-size printed sheets bound in
stiff-cover wear-resistant binders clearly and uniformly marked with the subject
matter and reference number. Where alternative sizes are proposed, (e.g. A5/A6
pocket books of schematic wiring diagrams) these shall be submitted for review of
“Engineer”. The binding shall allow for all subsequent changes and additions to be
readily effected.
13.1.4 Information shall be provided in pictorial form wherever possible and shall include
step-by-step instructions and views of the particular equipment including exploded
views. Programmable equipment shall be supplied with sufficient flow charts and fully
documented programmes to enable faults to be quickly identified and system
modification to be undertaken at any time.
13.1.5 The Contractor shall provide clarifications and amendments to the Operation and
Maintenance manuals as necessary during the Defects Liability Period. Updates shall
be provided for the originals and all copies.
13.1.6 The first draft of operation & maintenance manuals are to be provided at least 60
days before the installation commences. These should be corrected as per
employer’s comments and finally be submitted during installation and commissioning.
13.1.7 Hard copy as well as electronic copy should incorporate colour photos, colour
sketches and drawings in pictorial form wherever possible.
13.2 Operation Manuals
13.2.1 The Contractor shall provide operation manuals explaining the purpose and
operation of the complete system together with its component subsidiary systems
and individual item of equipment. The characteristics, ratings and any necessary
operating limits of the Equipment and Sub-systems shall be provided. The Operation
Manuals shall focus on operation aspects under normal and emergency conditions.
13.3 Maintenance Manuals
13.3.1 The Contractor shall provide particulars of operating parameters, tools for
dismantling and testing, methods of assembly and disassembly, tolerances, repair
techniques and all other information necessary to set up a repair and servicing
programme.
13.3.2 The manual shall also include inspection/overhaul procedure and periodicity of
various inspection/overhaul schedules in detail including the tools, special
tools/plants, and facilities required. The manual shall be subject to review by the
“Engineer”.

13.3.3 The maintenance manual shall also include an illustrated parts catalogue of all plant
supplied and shall contain sufficient information to identify and requisition the
appropriate part by maintenance staff. The catalogue shall comprise 2 sub-sections.
13.3.4 The first shall be an alphanumeric parts list, which shall include the following
information:
(i) Part number
(ii) Description
(iii) Name of manufacturer
(iv) Quantity and Unit
(v) Part number of next higher assembly (usually a line replaceable unit).
(vi) Cross-reference to figure number.
(vii) Category : e.g. consumable, line replaceable unit, repairable.
(viii) Life-expected life, Mean time between failure or mean distance between
failure where available, Mean time between repair, Mean time between
maintenance, Reliability.
(ix) General or specific purpose
13.3.5 The second is a series of illustrations to indicate the location of each replaceable
item which shall be clear and progressive with exploded views to enable parts to be
identified easily by cross-reference with the alpha-numeric list.
13.3.6 Maintenance manual should cover the following ;
- Maintenance planning, Maintenance management, Maintenance

Requirement
Analysis like Reliability centred maintenance, FMCEA etc.
- PM, CM, CBM & condition monitoring techniques i.e. during installation,
vibration levels are required to be noted down which becomes reference
for vibration limits.
- Maintenance infrastructure
- Man power requirement
- Job description, Comprehensive annual maintenance.
13.4 Scope of Training

The training shall be provided by the Contractor to the Employer’s personnel in
operation, maintenance, schedule maintenance, breakdown etc. maintenance
installation practices related to DG Sets. This will cover training in Bangladesh, India
and abroad including training at manufacturing facilities.

13.4.1 Training Programme

Contractor shall submit a training programme for imparting training to Metro
employees with batches of approximately 20 trainees for DG Sets systems in
following areas:
S. Total Period
No Description (Trainer working Remarks
days)
1. Operation and maintenance practices for DG 30 At suitable
Sets including trouble shooting, fault diagnosis locations (In
and emergency handling. Bangladesh,
India or
abroad)
13.4.2 Training Plan

The Training Program shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor as per
requirements of GS/PS.
14 DG technical Data sheet as under.
DG SET DATA SHEET
1.0 ENGINE
1.1 Rating
i) Minimum Engine Matching the DG set rating.
Rating Less than 1000m above mean sea level
ii) Altitude (m) 30% Min. 95% Max.
iii) Air humidity Minimum 00
iv) Air temperature (C) Maximum 50
Average 40
Prime Power rating duty at specified maximum
v) Duty ambient air Temperature of 50C. (Suitable for
Continuous at variable load with average load factor of
80% as per ISO 8528).

BS 5514 , ISO 3046, & ISO 8528 (all parts)
vi) Standard
1.2 Overload capacity for one 10% over the continuous rating.
hour
In 12 hours of continuous
running.
1.3 Governor Electronic type
1.4 Starting
i) Method Electric
ii) No. of auto starts 3 (three)

iii) Selectivity Auto/Manual/Test
1.5 Cooling System

i) Radiator Yes
1.6 Exhaust System

i) Silencer 1 No or more as required of Critical grade.
ii) Flexible connection 1 No for each exhaust pipe near the engine.
iii) Scrubber Nil.
1.7 Safety Controls &

Instruments Trip @ 20% over normal
i) Over speed Governor Audible & visible alarm
ii) One -point thermostat Trip engine
iii) Low oil pressure Audible & visible alarm
iv) Fuel level low Yes, required
v) Oil Pressure gauge Yes, required
vi) Hour counter
1.8 Sundry fittings

i) Vibration mounts Yes, rubber in shear or any other type with 6mm
minimum static deflection on load.
ii) Electric pump for fuel Nil
filling from barrels &

draining engine oil etc.
2.0
 ALTERNATOR

2.1 Rating at 50 Deg. C 125 kVA (100 kW), 160 kVA (128 kW), 180 kVA,
(144 kW), 200 kVA, (160 kW), 300 kVA (240kW),
(ambient air Temp.) 350 kVA(280 KW), 380 kVA(304), 500kVA(400)
Continuous duty : Y-neutral brought out
Emergency duty : 10% over load for 1 hour in 12 hours
2.2 Minimum efficiency % 91.0
2.3 Enclosure IP – 23 (IEC)

2.4 Winding
 Class H
2.5 Cooling IEC 34-6.

2.6 Excitation System Brush less exciter with rotating diode assembly
2.7 Over speed % 120

2.8 Transient response & Max. 20% dip on application of full load at stated P.F
Response voltage dip and recovery in 20cycles.
2.9 Sustained short circuit Min. 300% of full load current FLC for 3 secs.
2.10 Terminal Box Suitable for cables as specified.;

3.0
 FUEL OIL
FACILIT
Y
3.1 Day tank (14 SWG steel) 990 Litres
3.2 Pump 1. Hand Pump
2. Portable Oil Filling pump- Electrical Type.
3.3 Piping From day tank to engine set
4.0 Acoustic Enclosure
COOLING Radiator cooled
ENCLOSURE DETAILS
Structure MS Press bent 1.6 MM (minimum) with suitable reinforcement
4.1.1.1...1.1.1 PANELS
Type Steel Fabricated double wall insulated panels
Panel Thickness Suitable thickness as per type approval Certificate of CPCB
Outer Sheet 1.6 mm thick CRCA Sheet

Inner Sheet 0.2 mm thick CRC Perforated Sheet
Frame & Stiffner 1.6 mm thick CRCA Sheet
INSULATION
Type Foam / Mineral rock wool of reputed make.

As per ASTM C612, C553 or equivalent BS 3958-5
Thickness Suitable thickness as per type approval Certificate of CPCB
Density Suitable thickness as per type approval Certificate of

CPCB
AIR CIRCULATION SYSTEM
A) AIR Intake As per Proto type / Design approved by Engineer

incharge.
Type Axial Flow Fan.*
Make Technomac or Equivalent
RPM 1440/2800
Motor KIRLOSKAR or Equivalent
B) Air Exhaust System (Will be applicable for DG room only).
Type Axial Flow Fan
Make Reputed Make
Speed 1400/2800 RPM
Motor KIRLOSKAR or Equivalent
Qty. Minimum 1 No. Or more as required

For Air Exhaust
AIR SCREEN For Radiator Exhaust
INSULATED HOOD At Canopy Air Exhaust
SILENCER HOOD INTAKE
Type Air Intake Hood
Qty 2 Nos.
Design With Acoustic Splitter & Baffles

Insulated Hood Cover
FINISHING Weather Proof “POLYURETHANE PAINT” or

“POWDER COATED “ Paint
Sound Reduction (min) 25 dB (A) at one mtr.
Notes:
1) The DG set Data Sheets are guidelines to meet with requirements of the
Design of the DG set and its enclosure. Any minor changes in the above
will be acceptable at the of Design approval of the Dg sets, with the
confirmation that the changes made will not have any variation in the
performance parameters and the requirements of the norms as prevalent.
2) Silencer shall be of Residential/Hospital/Critical grade.

3) Engine and Alternator ratings shall be for the operating conditions and
altitude specified and NOT NTP ratings.
4) Engine BHP shall be selected for alternator kW output at emergency
loading condition.
After 3 auto starts, engine to lock shut
* Shall be provided with the DG sets without any extra cost in case DG set is not able to meet
with the “temperature criteria” of enclosure temperature less than 7 oC. (may not required to be
provided if the Engine driven radiator fan is adequate to meet the “temperature criteria” of enclosure
temperature less than 7 oC).

DATA Sheet AMF PANEL
1. SYSTEM 415V 3 Ph 4W effectively earthed neutral

system
2. BUSBARS
 Copper
3. LOCATION & TYPE Indoor cubicle dead front
4. ENCLOSURE IP 54 (IEC)
5. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELS
a) Usage Generator Breaker

b) Number 1 (One)
c) Type MCCB / ACB

d) Pole 4P
e) Closing With 12V/24V DC closing coil

f) Opening 12/24V DC shunt trip coil
g) Current rating (A) as applicable

h) Breaking Capacity (KA) 35 KA (minimum). / 50 kA (minimum).As
i) Meters Applicable
(i) Kilowatt hour meter (kW hr)
(ii) Voltmeter 1-3Ph 4 wire unbalanced load
(iii) Ammeter 0-500V as per rating of DG sets and with

suitable rating CT’s
Lag 0-1-0 lead
(iv) Power factor meter
45-55 Hz
(v) Frequency Meter (Hz)
As per rating
(vi) KW meter
j) Protection
(i) O/C & EF 2# O/C &
1# REF (Restricted Earth Fault)

(ii) Type IDMT 1.3 Sec. or static relay(Electric
(iii) Setting range Numerical Relay)
(iv) Auxiliary OC-50-200% REF-10-40%

Under Voltage Relay ,Alarm Relay
k) Instrument Transformers
CT’s for measuring
(i) Number Set of 3

(ii) Burden 15 VA
(iii) Ratio as per the ratings of DG sets.

(iv) Accuracy 1.0
CT’s for Protection

(i) Number 4+1 Neutral CT for REF
(ii) Burden 15 VA
(iii) Ratio as per the ratings of DG sets.
(iv) Accuracy 5 P10

l) Sundry Fittings
(i) ON-OFF Flags 1 No

(ii) Indicating lamps R-Y-B

FIRE DETECTION & SUPRESSION WORKS

SECTION: S.51
FIRE ALARM & ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM

1.0 General
1.1 This specification and scope of works as detailed herein covers the following activities
and services in respect of all the equipment of fire protection system.
1.2 The specifications for the supply, installation, testing, trial run and commissioning of the
components and accessories of the Fire Fighting System, shall be in accordance with
these specifications. For items not included in these specifications and special
conditions, supply and installation shall be done in accordance with the latest
International standard / BNBC codes.
2.0 Scope of Work
2.1 The scope of work covers fabrication, supply, installation, testing & commissioning of
Fire Alarm System and Sprinkler Annunciation System meeting the intents of these
specifications. The work shall generally cover:
i) Main Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) with Sprinkler Annunciation System (as
applicable).
ii) Local Control Panels on each Floor (as applicable).
iii) Alarm initiating devices such as Heat / Smoke Sensors.
iv) Audio visual annunciation devices (AVAD)
v) All wiring :
a. From alarm initiating devices to Local / Main Panels
b. From Flow Switch / Tamper Switch to Sprinkler Annunciation Panel.
c. From Panels to Hooter / Speaker System.
d. From Panel to All air-conditioning and ventilation system (as applicable).
3.0 Standards and Codes
1. Specification for smoke detectors BS 5445:1984
2. Graphical symbols and signs. Safety signs, including fire BS 5499: Part
safety signs. Signs with specific safety meanings 5: 2002
(Specification for additional signs to those given in BS
5378: Part 1)
3. Safety signs, including fire safety signs. Code of practice BS 5499: Part
for escape route signing 4: 2000
Components of automatic fire alarm systems for residential BS 5446: Part
4.
premises 1: 2000
6. Automatic Fire Alarm Systems in buildings BS 3116 part I
7. Control and indicating equipment BS 3116 part

IV

All equipment and the installation shall be as per the relevant British/ BNBC standards
specifications. In case of any discrepancy between the two the strictest shall be
followed.
4.0 Submittals
4.1 All details comprising the following shall be submitted along with the Bid:
(i) System manufacturer & experience
(ii) System configuration & capability vis-à-vis the specification
(iii) Compliance or deviation from the Tender specifications
(iv) Makes and catalogues of various signal initiating devices, Audio Visual
Annunciating etc.
(v) Comments on the system specified. (If no comments are received, the
contractor is in agreement with the specifications and bound to perform in
accordance with the specifications).
4.2 On award of the contract and before placement of orders on approved sub vendors the
following particulars shall be furnished and approval obtained from Engineer-in-charge.
(i) Detailed performance data of the various system modules and drawings.
(ii) Detailed selection and drawings of various signal initiating devices.
(iii) Detailed wiring drawings and makes of wires and conduits
(iv) Floor plans showing locations of various devices
(v) Detailed mimic diagram with LED positions
All work shall be done in accordance with approved design and drawings.
5.0 Fire Alarm System
5.1 General & constructional features
5.1.1 The Main Control Panel (MCP) shall be centrally located (in station managers / control
room) and shall be connected to the Local Control Panels, if any. The Main Control
Panel shall continuously monitor the status of each fire zone.
5.1.2 The Main and Local Control Panels shall be metal enclosed, sheet steel cubicle
pattern, dead front, floor / wall mounting type as required and as approved suitable for
indoor mounting.
5.1.3 The Panels shall be dust and vermin proof. Synthetic rubber gasket shall be provided
on all covers and doors to render the joints dust and vermin proof. All doors shall be
lockable.
5.1.4 The Panel shall be fabricated from 2.0 mm CRCA thick sheet steel and shall be folded
and braced to provide a rigid support. Joints shall be seam welded.
5.2 The system basic functions shall be as follows:
5.2.1 Monitor annunciation devices connected to the system for
 Normal operation
 Trouble conditions
 Alarm conditions
5.2.2 Supervise all signaling and notification circuits throughout the system through the
circuit interface modules.

5.2.3 Detect activation of any signal initiating devices such as smoke detectors, break-glass
units & location of alarm condition.
5.2.4 Cause operation of all notification appliances and auxiliary devices as programmed.
5.2.5 System shall provide
a. Acceptance switch changes the alarm signal from blinking mode to steady
mode and silence all remote alarm sounders.
b. Signal silence switch to silence all the programmed silenceable notification
appliances.
c. Reset switch to bring all initiating and output devices to normal condition.
d. Test switch to initiate automatic testing of alarm conditions and all such tests
shall be displayed and recorded.
e. Lamp test switch
5.3 The system shall provide the following facilities:
a. To turn on or off from operator terminal all system output points.
b. To cause following operations upon activation of any detector, break glass unit
or flow switch, unless otherwise specified:
i. Activate all programmed notification circuits and keep activated until
silenced
ii. Zone wise actuation of AVAD units
iii. Annunciate all parameters of all active devices as above.
5.4 The Fire Alarm Panel shall be modular in construction and shall be enclosed in a
sheet-steel rust-inhibited cabinet of appropriate size to accommodate at least 25%
expansion of all modules. The cabinet door shall have a glass window for all display
and shall be provided with a key lock.
5.5 The main power supply unit shall operate on 230 VAC 50 Hz meeting the needs of the
FACP and notification appliance circuits. The unit shall incorporate a battery charger.
5.6 The FACP should be provided with RS 485 port for remote monitoring and interface
with Faults/Data monitoring system
6.0 Signal Initiating Devices
6.1 Each detector shall be provided with dual alarm and power LED's and an output
connection for remote indication.
 Both LED will be blinking mode during normal operation and
 Will be in steady mode indicating an alarm mode.
6.1.1 Detectors shall have a type code ion, photo or thermal for identification by the control
panel and shall also incorporate a magnetic switch for testing locally or remotely from
the control panel. All detectors shall include a tamper proof twist lock base which shall
be common interchangeable for all detectors.
6.1.2 The smoke detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 / BS 5445 PART
7:1984 and EN 54 Part 7: 1984 for Vibration, impact and shock parameters. All sensors
shall be UL listed/LPCB approved. The Detectors shall be fully functional up to 95 %
relative humidity and 45o Centigrade ambient conditions.
6.1.3 The smoke detectors shall be designed and constructed to meet the requirements of IP
43.

6.2 Detector bases - The detector bases shall be suitable for mounting directly on a 75mm
recessed round box or as required at the site. The bases shall have terminals, which
shall be suitable for receiving 1.5-mm2 PVC copper conductor or 2.5-mm2 PVC
aluminium conductor cables. Access to the terminals shall be available from the front of
the base after removing the detector. A plastic cover shall be provided with each base
to be fixed to the rear to eliminate the ingress of dust, water and insect into the detector
and conforming to IP 43 protection goods.
6.3 Manual call points - Manual call points shall consist of a push button switch housed in a
dust tight sheet steel enclosure of minimum 1.5 mm thick sheet to manually initiate
audiovisual alarms. The front shall be sealed with a breakable glass cover fixed in such
a way that the actuating push button is kept depressed as long as the glass is intact
and released automatically when the glass is broken.
6.4 Rate of rise cum fixed temperature heat detector
6.4.1 Heat detectors shall be Thermistor type, working on rate of rise and fixed temperature
principle. The rate of rise element shall be a Thermistor whose change in resistance
value due to temperature rise shall determine an alarm signal. It shall be calibrated to
ignore any normal fluctuation in temperature, but to respond quickly when the
temperature rise is 9 degrees centigrade or as per UL requirement. The fixed
temperature feature should be entirely independent of the rate of rise element and
should be either bimetallic or fusible link type.
6.4.2 The operating temperature of fixed temperature should be factory set at 72 degrees
C + 5oC. The detector shall incorporate Response Indicator facility also. The area of
coverage per heat detector will depend upon structural configuration, but for flat
ceiling and un-partitioned space, it shall be 50 m2 per detector. The detector shall be
on the approved list of Loss Prevention Council, UK or Underwriter's Laboratory,
USA.
6.4.3 The Detector shall have pulsing LED, whose pulsing rate shall be fixed by the
manufacturer. However, a pulsing rate of one pulse per 8 seconds is preferred.
6.5 Fixed temperature heat detector
6.5.1 Fixed Temperature Heat Detector will work on electro-pneumatic principle with
bimetallic element, which with rise in temperature to predetermined level shall make
contact and sound alarm. The temperature level shall be 72 degrees C. The detector
shall be automatic resettable type. The detector shall conform to BS 5445. The
detector and its mounting base shall be interchangeable with any Smoke Detector, if
needed.
6.5.2 It shall be possible to install both smoke and heat detector on the same circuit.
Detectors shall have Latching Unit if LED does not light up continuously.
6.6 Ionization type smoke detector
6.6.1 Smoke detectors shall be working on ionization principle and shall be of dual
chamber and single source type. They shall be completely solid state with LED
indication at the base. The radioactive source used in the detector shall not emit beta
or gamma rays, and the strength of the radioactive source shall not exceed 1 micro
curie.
6.6.2 The detector shall be able to sense incipient fire by detecting the presence of visible
and invisible products of combustion. The detector shall be suitable for low voltage
(24 volts DC) two-wire supply. The detector shall be provided with response indicator
and the sensitivity of the detector shall not vary with change in ambient temperature,
humidity, pressure of voltage variation.
6.6.3 Neither its performance shall be effected by air current up to 5 meter per second. It

shall have inbuilt arrangement so that a time constant of about 4 seconds is
provided so that puffs of smoke or hot air pockets do not inadvertently trigger the
alarm.
6.6.4 The detector shall be suitably protected against dust accumulation / ingress and it
shall be free from maintenance and functional test at intervals. All detectors shall be
identical in construction design and characteristic to facilitate easy replacement. The
detector housing shall be damage resistant made of polycarbonate or aluminium with
plug-in housing base of universal type suitable for either surface or recessed
mounting.
6.6.5 The coverage per smoke detector shall be as per BS: 5839 Part I, UK up to a
maximum of 81 m2. This coverage area will reduce depending upon structural
configurations or partitions etc. It shall be possible to connect Smoke Detector with
Heat Detector or Manual Push Buttons in the same circuit. The sensitivity of detector
shall be set adjusted by the supplier to suit the site requirement and the detector shall
be listed by Loss Prevention Council, UK, or Underwriters Laboratory, USA. The
detector also must have facility for remote indication.
6.7 Optical Smoke Detector

6.7.1 The optical detector shall work on light scattering principle and capable of responding
to any heavy smoke particles of size exceeding 1 Micron. It shall have coverage of
approx. 81 m2 on flat surface. The detectors shall be listed by UL / LPCB. The
detector shall have LED at the base to indicate visually in case of a fire. The base of
detector shall be interchangeable with ionization Smoke Detector. The body shall be
of white and of Poly-carbonate material.
6.7.2 The Detector shall be able to sense incipient fire by detecting the presence of visible
and invisible products of combustion. The Detector shall be suitable for low voltage
(24 volts DC) two-wire supply. The sensitivity of the Detector shall not vary with
change in ambient temperature, humidity, pressure or voltage variation.
6.7.3 It shall have in-built safety device to monitor the removal and pilferage of the
Detector. The Detector also must have facility for remote indication.
6.8 Multi criteria detectors
6.8.1 The multi-sensor analog detector shall use a light scattering type photoelectric smoke
sensor, and an ambient temperature sensor to sense changes in air samples from its
surroundings. The detector shall be totally free of radioactive components.
6.8.2 The integral microprocessor shall employ time based algorithms to dynamically
examine The values from the two sensors simultaneously and initiate an alarm based
on that data.
6.8.3 The detector shall continually monitor any changes in sensitivity due to the
environmental affects of dirt, smoke, temperature, age and humidity.
6.8.4 Smoke density in the chamber shall be measured by a symmetrical optical system.
6.8.5 Smoke detectors element shall respond to invisible and visible smoke and
combustible gases and shall have an inherently stable sensor with built-in automatic
compensation for changes in ambient conditions.

6.8.6 The temperature sensor shall self-adjust to the ambient temperature of the
surrounding air and input an alarm when there is a change of 65°F (35°C) in
ambient temperature or reaches a fixed temperature alarm set point of 135°F
(57°C) nominal.
6.8.7 The detector shall be suitable for direct insertion into air ducts up to 0.91 m high
and 0.91m wide and air velocities up to 0-2.54 m/sec without requiring specific
duct detector housings or supply tubes. The percent smoke obscuration per foot
alarm set point shall be field selectable to any of five sensitivity settings ranging
from 1.0% to 3.5%.
6.8.8 The detectors shall have no moving parts or components subject to wear and tear
and shall have serial no. and seal of the approving laboratory/body.
6.8.9 All electronic circuits must be solid state devices and virtually hermetically sealed
to prevent their operations from being impaired by dust, dirt or humidity.
6.8.10 All circuitry must be protected against usual electrical transient and
electromagnetic interference.
6.8.11 Reversed polarity or faulty zone wiring shall not damage the detector.
6.8.12 The response sensitivity of each smoke detector shall be field adjustable to a
minimum of two pre-determined (factory calibrated) levels. It shall be possible to
test the sensitivity of a detector in the field.
6.8.13 The response (activation) of a detector shall be clearly visible from the outside by
a flashing light of sufficient brightness.
6.8.14 A built-in (optional) integrated circuit shall allow the suppression of brief deceptive
phenomenon.
6.8.15 A built-in barrier shall prevent entry of insects into the sensor.
6.8.16 The information shall be stored in the integral processor and transferred to the
analog loop controller for retrieval using a laptop PC or Program/Service Tool.
6.8.17 The detector shall be designed for fast and simple laboratory cleaning.
6.8.18 The detector shall be inserted into or removed from the base by a simple push-
twist mechanism to facilitate exchange or cleaning and maintenance.
6.8.19 The detector shall be connected to the Fire Alarm Panel via fully supervised two-
wire circuits (Class "A" wiring).
6.8.20 During maintenance, interchanging of detectors a system failure should not occur
on removal of the detectors from bases.
6.8.21 Detector should be accessible for maintenance.
7.0 Fire Alarm System
7.1 General
7.1.1 The Fire Alarm System shall conform to BS: 5839 in respect of design and
installation, and it shall give Audio / Visual Alarm signals when the temperature in
case of Heat Detector or smoke density in case of Ionization Detector exceeds the
pre-set limit. The system shall give zone wise location of fire with warning system
zone wise, two tones for alert and voice communication for commands and
instruction if required.
7.1.2 The system shall be suitable to operate 230 V, AC ± 10 % (incoming supply) or 24
Volts DC. The design shall be modular so that additional zones can be added to
cater for future expansion. It shall have inbuilt power break and sequence logic
hardware.

7.1.3 The system shall be fully supervised for all fault conditions with distinctive alarms
operated for fault and fire conditions. All audible alarms either for fire or fault
conditions shall have push button cancellation arrangement with re-set feature, to
ensure that no alarm is inadvertently switched off. The fire or fault lamp shall
however continue to glow until the fault condition has been corrected or the fire
extinguished. Test push buttons shall be provided to test the electronic circuits in
each zone. These Test Push Buttons are to be provided on the Main Control
Panel.
7.2 Hooter cum speaker / piezo sounder
7.2.1 Dual Tone hooter shall be of electronic type and shall give discontinuous /
intermittent audible alarm automatically whenever smoke detector or heat detector
operates. Hooter shall be complete with magnetic coil (sound coil) and
accessories, ready for mounting. The hooter should also have facilities for speaker
announcement. Hooter should also have capability of adjusting the sound output.
7.2.2 Hooter casing shall be fabricated from 16 gauge MS sheet stove enameled to a
smooth finish. The Line Matching Transformer shall be as per Approved Makes
given.
7.2.3 As an alternative, piezo sounder with minimum output of 100dB at 10m distance
may be used as specified in BOQ.
7.3 Response indicator (RI)
7.3.1 Response Indicator shall be fabricated from 16-gauge MS fabricated box or in
aluminium casing. The Response Indicator shall glow clearly in case the detector
to which it is connected gives an alarm signal. The word "FIRE" shall be clearly
written on the visible face of the box. There shall be two numbers of red LEDs to
compensate for fusing of either LED.
7.3.2 No Company logo shall be printed on it. The Response Indicator shall also have the
words “ROOM” or “ABOVE FALSE CEILING “screen printed on it, as the case
may be. RI should be separate for each level i.e. detectors in false ceiling, flooring
should not be provided with common RI.
7.4 Amplifier (as applicable)
7.4.1 The Amplifier shall be of 240 Watts and pre wired. All terminals should be soldered
firmly on to solder tags or terminated on good quality connector strips. The
Amplifiers shall be Multi Channel Mixing type and capable of running on 240 V AC
or 12 / 24 V DC. The Amplifier shall have Dual Tone Control, Level Indicators and
cater to complete frequency range.
7.4.2 The Amplifier shall be Rack Mounted within the housing of the Fire Alarm Panel. It
shall have Microphone Channel Volume Control, Microphone / Auxiliary Selector,
Volume, Bass and Treble Control with LED type level Bar graph.
7.4.3 The Audio Signal Quality shall have a Frequency Response from 80 Hz to 20,000
Hz. Distortion shall be less than 5 %.
7.4.4 Output for Loud Speakers should be operable from a 100 V Terminal for Line
Matching Transformer type Speakers. The Amplifier shall also have the facility of
direct dial-in and talk for certain restricted office telephones.
8.0 Fire Alarm System Cabling & Wiring
8.1 Conduits shall generally conform to the specification under section “Conduit Wiring”.
The type of conduit and the service shall be as shown below:
(i) Embedded in walls & slabs : Heavy gauge hot dip galvanized

steel
(ii) Exposed/surface run : -Do-
8.2 Multi core cables shall be PVC insulated FRLS-H type with copper conductors to
relevant standard.
8.3 Single core wire should be FR type.
9.0 Installation
9.1 The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the specifications and drawings
and complying with local codes and proprietary manufacturers’ instructions.
9.2 Power cables as specified in the schedule of work. Power cables for 400/230V system
shall be drawn in separate conduits. All junction boxes and conduit accessories shall
be galvanized steel.
9.3 The conduit installation shall be carried out generally in accordance with “Conduit
wiring”. All conduits shall be concealed above false ceiling or run on surface wherever
permitted and shall be of steel, black enameled or galvanized as specified. Conduit
drops and junction boxes shall be concealed in partitions by chasing the walls, which
shall be made good by bidder at no extra cost.
9.4 Smoke detectors shall be installed last after the system is programmed and the
installation is tested and witnessed by Engineer-in-charge.
9.5 All wires shall be drawn inside the conduit and terminated in junction boxes with
connectors having sufficient number of ways suitable for the incoming/outgoing wires.
9.6 The maximum capacity of the conduits shall be as follows:
No. of wires (maximum)

Conduit dia (mm)
1.0 sqmm 1.5 sqmm
20 8 6
25 12 10
32 20 18
9.7 All cables shall be laid generally as specified under “Medium Voltage Cabling”. All
cables shall be laid on cable trays.
9.8 All cable wire terminations shall be through terminal connectors.
10.0 Testing
10.1 The system shall be tested and commissioned by a qualified specialist technician to
establish system performance in all its aspects and as required by authority and all
such tests shall be witnessed and test readings attested by the engineer in charge.
10.2 All wiring shall be checked for proper connections and tested for
(i) Continuity
(ii) Ground faults

(iii) Short circuits
(iv) Insulation resistance by a 1000V meggar
All wiring shall be tested segment by segment and readings and findings recorded. No
wiring installation offering a resistance of less than 1.0 mega-ohm shall be energized.
10.3 Test all circuits and device for verification trouble/fault signals in the FACP and
performance compliance as under:
i) Initiate device circuits
a) Open circuit
b) Short circuit
c) Ground fault
10.4 All test results shall be verified and authenticated by the engineer-in-charge and shall
be included as part of the operation, maintenance and instruction manual.
10.5 During the period of verification and testing the contractor should associate at least 3
engineers from the owner's side for training in all aspects of system operation and
maintenance, and fire drill etc as per the code requirement and as approved.
11.0 Mode of measurement
11.1 The mode of measurement shall follow the schedule of work.
11.2 All cables / wires shall be measured per unit length and shall include laying, clamping,
dressing, terminal connections etc.
11.3 Bare conduit laying shall be paid for at unit length and shall include all fittings, junction
boxes etc.
DATA SHEET
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
1.0 SYSTEM
1.1 General Stand-alone Fire Alarm System
1.2 Capacity & Architecture a. Number of zones as shown in drawings

b. Signal initiating devices per zone as shown in
drawings.
c. Control devices per zone as shown in drawings
d. Auto dialing facility to the nearest fire brigade
station.

1.3 Panel display Adequate LED alarm display - Minimum requirements

are as under:
- Type of point/zone in alarm
- Alarm acknowledge
- All-clear, clear acknowledge
- Trouble / disable condition
- Trouble acknowledge
- Zone location
- System location
- Zone activated
- Open circuit
- Short circuit
- Wire grounding
- Maintenance need
1.4 System testing (i) Manual test switch

(ii) Re- commissioning testing as specified.
1.5 System power (i) System power with 24V DC sealed lead-acid
batteries with 220 VAC 50 Hz battery charger
with trickle and quick charge capability of 24
hours from fully discharged to fully charged
condition
(ii) Batteries to be capable of maintaining the
system for 12 hours and then for 1 hour in alarm
mode
(iii) Fault indication in panel
a. Low cell voltage
b. High cell voltage
c. Charger faulty
(iv) Charger – metering as follows:
a. AC voltage & amps
b. DC charge voltage & amps
c. DC discharge voltage & amps
(v) Power supply for notification appliance circuits
shall be independently supervised 24 Volt DC as
required.

SECTION: S.52
FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
1.0 Scope of Work
1.1 The scope of work shall cover supply, fabrication, installation, testing and commissioning
of the fire hydrant system covering the following but not limited to:
a. Fire Hydrant electric pumps as shown in the BOQ, drawings and as required.
b. Jockey pump, electric driven as shown in the equipment schedule, drawings
and as required.
c. Deleted.
d. Hydrant mains, external ring and yard hydrants.
e. Wet risers in the building as specified and shown on drawings.
f. Landing valves, hose reels, hose cabinets etc.
g. Fire brigade breaching, siamese connections and connections to pumps and
appliances.
1.2 The contractor shall get the Fire Fighting System approved by the Fire Authority having
Jurisdiction.
2.0 Standards
2.1 The fire hydrant installation shall conform to and meet with the requirements set out by the
following:
1. BNBC Bangladesh National Building Code
2. BS 5041: Part Fire hydrant systems equipment - Specification for

2: 1987 landing valves for dry risers
3. Compliance with the local fire brigade and the fire

enforcing authorities as specifically laid down by them.
4. BS 5306: Part Fire extinguishing installations and equipment on

1: 1976 (1988) premises - Hydrant systems, hose reels and foam
inlets
2.2 All the standards mentioned above as well as referred to in the document elsewhere
shall be latest
3.0 Fire Pump
3.1 The fire pump shall be single stage / double stage suction centrifugal type with split
casing type and direct driven by electric motor or diesel engine as specified. The pump
rating and performance shall conform to the equipment schedule and meet the TAC
duty requirements. The pumps should be with mechanical seal of reputed make.
3.2 Pump casing shall be of close-grained cast iron with bronze impeller. The shaft sleeve
shall be brass or SS 304 and the trim shall be brass or bronze.
3.3 Pump shall be capable of delivering 150% of the rated capacity at 65% of the rated
head and the no-delivery head shall be not more than 140% (150% in case of end
suction type) of the rated delivery head. The pump casing shall withstand 1.5 times the

no-delivery pressure or 2 times of the duty pressure whichever is higher.

3.4 The pump shall be electrically driven with direct flexible coupling.
3.5 The electric drive motor shall be squirrel cage induction conforming to IEC 60034-
1(1983) and rated for continuous duty (S1). Motor shall have not less than class F
insulation and minimum enclosure of IP22. The starter shall be air-cooled fully
automatic star delta or autotransformer type. Starters shall conform to relevant
standard and rated for AC-3 duty conditions.
3.6 Drive rating shall be based on the largest of the following:
a. Rated pump discharge at rated head
b. 150% of rated discharge @ 65% of rated head
c. Maximum power absorbed by the pump in its operating range i.e. no-delivery to
free discharge.
4.0 Pump Foundation - Foundation of pumps in Fire Pump rooms should be of
considerable height so that these are not submerged in case of overflow.
5.0 Accessories
5.1 The Fire Pumps shall be complete with the following accessories:
a. Suction and discharge eccentric reducers
b. Pump coupling guard
c. Common base frame, fabricated mild steel or cast iron.
5.2 Each pump shall have independent set of pressure switches. The pressure switch shall
be snap action SP DT switch rated 10A @ 230 V operated through a stainless steel
diaphragm. The switch shall have a pointer for manual adjustment of set point, and all
electrical connections shall be terminated in a screwed terminal connector. The entire
unit shall be encased in a cold drawn steel (heavy gauge) enclosure. The diaphragm
shall be designed for a maximum operating pressure of the system. Each pressure
switch shall be provided with a pressure gauge in parallel as shown on the drawings and
all gauges and pressure switches shall be mounted in an instrument panel with
necessary control piping and drainage facility.
6.0 System operation and control panels
6.1 The fire pump shall be started automatically on loss of pressure and the operation
sequence of the booster and fire pumps shall be as follows:
a. Jockey Pump shall start when the system pressure drops by 5 kg and stop
when the system pressure is re-established.
b. The Fire Pump shall start when the system pressure drops by 3 kg and shall
continue to run till manually switched off.
c. Standby Fire Pump shall start when main pump will not started the system
pressure drops further from 3 kg and shall continue to run till manually switched
off.
d. Control scheme should be such that both (main and StandBy pump) should not
run together.
6.2 The motor starters (direct on line or star-delta) shall consist of electrically actuated
contactors. The starter shall be complete with ON-OFF push buttons, timers and
auxiliary contacts and shall be fully automatic. There shall be an indicating lamp with
each of the pumps and an ammeter and selector switch with the fire pumps. Fire pump
starting shall be annunciated through an electric siren.

6.3 The starter along with isolator shall be housed in a 14 SWG MS box duly rust inhibited
through a process of degreasing and phosphating.
6.4 All cabling to and from the pumps to starter and control switch shall be carried out
through armoured PVC cables of approved makes. Cables shall be laid in accordance
with section "MV CABLING". The pump motors and panels shall be double earthed .
7.0 Fire hydrants and hose reels
7.1 Hydrants shall be provided internally and externally as shown on the drawings. Internal
hydrants shall be provided at each landing of and escape staircase and additionally
depending on the floor area as shown on drawings. Landing valve shall be single
headed SS (stainless steel) valve with 63 mm diameter outlets and 80mm inlet
conforming to BS 5041 1987. Landing valve shall have flanged inlet and instantaneous
type outlets and mounted at 1.0m above the floor level. Instantaneous outlets for the
hydrants shall be of standard pattern approved and suitable for 63mm diameter fire
brigade hoses. Wherever necessary, pressure reducing orifices plate shall be provided
so as to limit the pressure to 3.5 kg/cm 2 or any other rating as required by the Local
Fire Authority.
7.2 Each landing valve shall have a hose reel cabinet as shown on drawings.
a. Landing valve with single 63 mm diameter outlet and 80 mm diameter inlet.
b. First-aid hose reel with 45 m long 25 mm diameter high pressure thermo plastic
(EN 694 marked) with 25 m diameter Ball Valve.
c. 2 nos. 15-meter long 38 mm diameter synthetic hoses of UL listed with SS
instantaneous couplings.
d. One SS branch pipe.
7.3 The First Aid Hose pipe shall conform to EN 694 and be wound on a heavy-duty
circular hose drum confirming to BS EN 671-1:2001 with a bracket. The hose shall be
permanently connected on one end to the Wet Riser through a 25m Ball Valve with
necessary hose adapter and a SS nozzle at the other end.
7.4 Hoses shall be in two lengths of 15 m each, of synthetic type ( UL listed ) with
instantaneous couplings, neatly rolled into bundles and held in position with steel
brackets. Hoses shall be tested and certified by the manufacturer to withstand an
internal water pressure of not less than 35 kg/cm2 without bursting. The hose shall also
withstand a working pressure of 7-kg/ cm2 without leakage.
7.5 The hose cabinet shall be fabricated from mild steel sheet / stainless steel sheet /
aluminium sheet. The cabinet shall have double flap-hinged doors with 5.5 mm clear
glass and shall have necessary openings for riser main and brackets for all internals.
The cabinet shall be provided with suitable and robust locking arrangement.
7.6 The Hose Cabinet shall be fabricated from any of the following ( as per BoQ ):
A 2 mm thick MS sheet duly rust inhibited through a process of degreasing and
phosphating and painted in red colour.
B 2 mm thick stainless steel sheet.
c. 3mm thick aluminium sheet powder coated to red colour.
7.7 External hydrants shall be as per BS 5041: Part 2: 1987 with hand wheel control and
an 80 mm diameter pipe stand post. Hydrants shall be located at least 2m away from
and within 15m from the building wall.
7.8 Each hydrant shall be provided with a hose cabinet containing 2 x 15m 38 mm
diameter synthetic hoses with couplings. The cabinet shall contain a branch pipe and
nozzle. The cabinet shall be 600 x 450 x 300 mm fabricated out of 2 mm stainless steel

steel sheet or powder coated 3 mm thick aluminium sheet. The cabinet shall be wall-
mounted or freestanding with its own steel legs depending on the site conditions and
as shown on drawings and as approved.
7.9 The fire brigade connection shall consist of four headed inlets, as specified in BOQ,
63mm diameter outlets with built-in check valve and drain plugs connected to a 150mm
diameter outlet connection to the water reservoir or to the hydrant main.“Specification
for 2-way and 3-way suction collecting heads for fire fighting purposes”.
8.0 Testing and commissioning
8.1 The Jockey & fire pump starting and stopping shall be tested by opening the test valve
and record the following and the valves should be as furnished below:
1. Jockey pump start / stop
System pressure at start-up
System pressure at stop
Time elapsed from start to stop
2. Hydrant / Sprinkler Main Pump
System pressure at start-up
8.2 Maintained system pressure while discharging the landing valve at the highest point.
a. Highest outlet 3.5 kg/cm2
8.3 All the operating tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction of Authority having
Jurisdiction.
9.1 Hydrant pump with mounting frame excluding concrete foundation shall be measured
per unit.
9.2 Jockey pump - same as hydrant pump.
9.3 Instrument panel with pressure gauges, pressure switches, control piping etc. shall be
measured as one unit.
9.4 Control cabling from pressure gauge panel to the respective starters shall be
measured in running meter and paid at unit rates.

SECTION S.53
PIPING FOR FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work covers supply, fabrication, laying, testing, painting and
commissioning of the entire piping system for the fire fighting installation i.e. fire
hydrant and sprinkler systems.
2.0 Standards
2.1 The following standards shall be applicable:
i. BS 336 Couplings, double male and double female,

instantaneous pattern for fire fighting
ii. BS: 1387 Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought (Part I
& II) steel fittings.
iii. BS EN 671- Specification for first-aid hose reel for fire fighting
1:2001
iv. BS 5041 - 1987 Landing valves

BS 4164 : 2002
v. Code of practice for coating and wrapping of
underground mild steel pipelines
vi. BS EN 12334 Swing check type reflux (non-return) valves.

( BS 5153)
vii. Rules for Automatic sprinkler installation & Tariff

Advisory Committee
2.2 All the standards mentioned above as well as referred to in the document elsewhere
shall be latest
3.0 Hydrant Mains
3.1 External
3.1.1 Mild steel pipes, when laid underground, shall be protected against corrosion by a 4
mm thick bituminous tape with minimum 12 mm overlap over the entire length including
fittings. Fittings shall be weldable wrought iron; suitable for butt-welding and 10% of the
welded joints shall be radiographically tested and found in order. The welded joints
shall be random selected for testing in consultation with the Engineer-in-charge. All
flanges shall be slip-on welded type to BS 4504: 1969 with a 3mm fiber-reinforced
EPDM gasket and rated for 2.0 N/ mm2.
3.1.2 Underground mains shall be laid not less than 750 mm below the ground level. All
excavation for pipe laying shall be carried out with sufficient width for making proper
joints. Backfilling shall be done only after the piping is hydro-statically pressure tested.
Piping shall be constantly kept clean till tested.
3.1.3 All valves shall be housed in brick masonry chambers over 150mm cement concrete
(1:3:6) foundation. The brick walls of the chamber shall be plastered inside and outside

with 20mm cement sand plaster 1:4 with a floating coat of neat cement. Chambers
shall be 650 x 650 mm clear for depths up to 1200 mm and 1000 x 1000 mm for
depths beyond. Each chamber shall have a cast iron surface box approved by the
Engineer incharge.
3.1.4 Piping laid above ground shall be supported on cement concrete (1:2:4) pedestals
raising the bottom of the pipe at least 150mm over the ground level and held to the
pedestals with galvanized clamps. Pedestals shall be made at 3.0m centre to centre
and as shown on drawings. Cement concrete 1:2:4 thrust anchors shall be provided at
all tee-off points and change of direction as shown on drawings and as required. Pipes
laid on walls and ceiling shall have galvanized steel brackets.
3.2 Internal
3.2.1 All internal pipes shall be, unless otherwise specified, heavy quality mild steel tubes to
BS-1387 or ASTM A-53, using wrought steel heavy-duty fittings. Flanges shall be provided
to mate with valves and other equipment and shall conform to BS 4504: 1969. Flanges
shall be rated for 2.0 N/ mm2.
3.2.2 Valves shall be suitable for external piping.
3.2.3 All pipes shall be of approved make and best quality without rust marks. Pipes and
fittings shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair,
maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc. Pipes and fittings
shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat workmanship
manner. Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable supports at
intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC
ceiling and walls.
3.2.4 All pipes shall be adequately supported from ceiling or walls through structural
supports fabricated from mild steel support structures e.g. rods, channels, angels and
flats generally as shown on drawings. Fasteners shall be shear type anchor fasteners
in concrete walls and ceilings and wrought steel spikes of at least 75mm long in brick
walls. All pipes supports shall be painted with 1 coats of red oxide primer and two coats
of black enamel paint.
3.2.5 All low point loops in the piping shall be provided with 25mm Ball Valves with rising
spindle for draining the system. All valves shall have screwed brass caps. Likewise
25mm gunmetal air vents shall be provided at all high point loops to prevent air locking.
3.2.6 All piping shall have flanged joints at about 25m intervals to facilitate easy
maintenance.
4.0 Pipe Jointing
4.1 All pipes shall be provided with threaded / welded joints. Hold tite shall be used for
sealing for threded joints.
4.2 Joints between valves and MS pipes shall be made by providing a suitable flange.
Flanges shall have appropriate number of holes and shall be fastened with nuts, bolts
and 1.5mm thick EPDM gasket.
5.0 Valves and other accessories
5.1 Gate Valves
5.1.1 Sluice / Gate valves shall be used for isolation of flow in pipelines. For sizes up to 65
mm, gate valves shall be outside screw non rising spindle type and shall be as per
BS 5150/5163, as applicable. For sizes 80 mm to 300 mm, gate valve shall be as per
relevant BS, PN=1.6 and shall be of inside screw and non rising type and cast iron
double flanged.
5.1.2 Gate valves shall be provided with a hand wheel, draining arrangement of seat valve

and locking facility (as required). Gate valves shall have back setting bush to facilitate
gland renewal during full open condition.
5.1.3 The Body, bonnet, Stuffing Box, cap and hand wheel shall be of cast iron to ISO 185-
200 or ASTM A48 No-30. The non-rising spindle shall be of solid forged high tensile
brass or carbon steel to AISI 304 construction. The Body seating and wedge ring
shall be of solid leaded gunmetal. The Bonnet gasket shall be of high quality rubber.
5.1.4 The Valve shall be PN 1.6 rated but shall withstand tests of up to 20 kg / cm2. The
ends shall be flanged. The batch number of the valve shall be punched on the top of
the flange. The spindle shall be removable type, and shall be easily rotated.
5.2 Pressure Switch
5.2.1 The Pressure switches shall be employed for starting and shutting down operation of
pumps automatically, dictated by line pressure. The Pressure Switch shall be
diaphragm type. It shall be suitable for line pressures up to 15 kg / cm2. The scale
range for cut in and cut out shall be from 0 to 10 kg / cm2.
5.2.2 The Switch shall be suitable for consistent and repeated operations without change in
values. It shall be provided with IP: 66 water and environment protection.
5.2.3 The enclosure shall be of aluminium and pressure element and wetted parts shall be
of stainless steel. The switch shall be snap acting type with 1 number NO / NC
contact.
5.3 Air Vessel and Air Release Valve
5.3.1 Air vessel shall be fabricated from 6 mm thick, 300mm x 1000mm MS plate suitable
for 7kg/cm2 working pressure complete with air release valve, safety valve, pressure
gauge etc. as required. The air vessel shall be continuous welded construction and
painted with two coats of Postal red enamel outside over a coat of primer and epoxy
paint inside.
5.3.2 Air Release Valve shall be gun metal and minimum test pressure of 20 bar.
5.4 Pressure Vessel
5.4.1 The Pressure Vessel shall be provided to compensate for slight loss of pressure in
the system and to provide an air cushion for counter acting pressure surges
whenever the pumping set comes into operation. It shall be normally partly full of
water, the remaining being filled with air, which will be under compression when the
system is in normal operation.
5.4.2 Pressure vessel shall be fabricated from 8-10 mm thick MS plate with dished ends
and suitable supporting legs. It shall be provided with a 50 mm diameter flanged
connections from pump, one 25 mm drain with ball valve, one water level gauge and
25 mm sockets for pressure switches. The pressure vessel shall be hydraulically
tested as required.
5.4.3 The Pressure Vessel shall be for Hydrant Systems. The Pressure Switches shall be
mounted on the drain end of each Vessel. The Vessel shall also be provided with an
air release valve mounted at the top.
5.5 Pressure Gauge
5.5.1 The Pressure Gauge shall be constructed of die cast aluminium and stove enameled.
It shall be weather proof with an IP 55 enclosure. It shall be a stainless steel Bourden
tube type Pressure Gauge with a scale range from 0 to 16 Kg / cm 2 and shall be
constructed as per BS EN 837. Each Pressure Gauge shall have a siphon tube
connection. The Shut off arrangement shall be by Ball Valve.
5.6 Ball Valve

5.6.1 The Ball Valve shall be made from die cast brass and tested to 14 Kg/cm 2 pressure.
The valve shall be internally threaded to receive pipe connections.
5.6.2 The Ball shall be made from brass and machined to perfect round shape and
subsequently chrome plated. The seat of the valve body- bonnet gasket and gland
packing shall be of Teflon.
5.6.3 The handle shall be of chrome-plated steel with PVC jacket. The handle shall also
indicate the direction of `open' and `closed' situations. The gap between the ball and
the teflon packing shall be sealed to prevent water seeping up to 14 Kg / cm2
pressure.
5.6.4 The handle shall also be provided with a lug to keep the movement of the ball valve
within 90 degree. The lever shall be operated smoothly and without application of any
unnecessary force.
5.7 Non Return Valve
5.7.1 Non-return valves shall be cast iron spring action swing check type. An arrow mark in
the direction of flow shall be marked on the body of the valve. The valve shall be as
British standard.
5.7.2 The Valve shall be of cast iron body and cover. The internal flap in the direction of
water shall be of cast iron and hinged by a hinge pin of high tensile brass or stainless
steel. Cast iron parts shall conform to ISO- 185-200 or ASTM A48 No-30.
5.7.3 The gasket shall be of high quality rubber and flap seat ring of leaded gunmetal. At
high pressure of water flow the flapper shall seat tightly to the seat. The Valve shall
be capable of handling pressure up to 15 kg / cm2.
5.8 Butterfly Valve
5.8.1 The Butterfly Valve shall be suitable for waterworks and tested to minimum of 16 kg /
cm2 pressure. The Valves shall fulfill the requirements of BS 5155, AWW C-50A.
5.8.2 The body shall be of cast iron to ISO- 185 or ASTM A48 in circular shape and of high
strength to take the minimum water pressure of 10 kg / cm 2. The disc shall be heavy-
duty cast iron with anti corrosive epoxy or nickel coating.
5.8.3 The valve seat shall be of high-grade elastomer or nitrile rubber. The Valve in closed
position shall have complete contact between the seat and the disc throughout the
perimeter. The elastomer rubber shall have a long life and shall not give away on
continuous applied water pressure. The shaft shall be of EN 8 grade carbon steel.
5.8.4 The Valve shall be fitted between two flanges on either side of pipe flanges. The
Valve edge rubber shall be projected outside such that they are wedged within the
pipe flanges to prevent leakage.
5.8.5 The Valves shall be supplied with manual gear operated opening / closing system by
lever.
6.0 Pipe supports
6.1 All pipes whether horizontal or vertical shall be suitably supported using GI clamps /
painted MS angles as approved by Engineer in Charge.
6.2 Vertical Pipes
6.2.1 The pipes running vertical shaft shall be supported by galvanized mild steel rigid
clamps fixed to wall with anchor bolts and studs.
6.2.2 Deleted.
6.3 Horizontal Pipes

6.3.1 Pipes running horizontal shall be supported from structural beam/slab by using
appropriate GI clamps / MS angles with anchor fastener, bolts etc as approved by
Engineer in Charge.
6.3.2 The spacing of supports shall be as follows:
GI Pipes/MS Pipes CI Spun Pipes
Internal Dia (mm) Spacing (mm) Internal dia (mm) Spacing (mm)
15 1800 75-150 2700
20,25 2400 200-250 3000
32 2700 300 3600
40-50 3000
65-80 3600
100 4000
150 4500
Supports for horizontal piping longer than 15m in a stretch shall be provided with swivel
clamps. Otherwise, the clamps shall be universal clamps or rigid clamps as required by the
project engineer-in-charge.
6.4 Fixing of clamps/rails etc. - All clamps, rails and accessories shall be fixed to the
structure (beam, slab, walls etc.) by using approved good quality anchor fasteners of
appropriate size.
7.0 Painting
7.1 All exposed piping for fire fighting shall be distinctly painted `Fire red' shade. Pipes
shall first receive two coats of red oxide primer uniformly applied and two coats of oil
paint applied thereafter. All pipes supports shall be painted black as specified for
support & clamps.
7.2 Painting Schedule - All equipment and piping shall be painted in accordance with the
following colour code:
S Equipment Colour Distinguishing Mark

N
a. Pump motors Fire Red Shade
b. Internal piping - do -
c. Landing valves & Hose reel - do -

cabinets
d. External Hydrants - do -
e. Fire brigade connection - do -
f. Priming tank - do -

g. Air vessel - do -
h. Electric panels Black & Red
i. Fire Alarm Panel Black & Red
j. Repeater panel Black & Red
k. Break Glass Unit Fire Red
l. Hooters/Speakers Fire Red
m. Sprinkler pipes Fire Red
7.3 All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush to remove
completely rust and other extraneous substances. Over the cleaned surfaces one coat
of red oxide primer shall be applied completely covering the exposed surfaces.
Finishing coat of enamel paint shall be applied one day after the prime coat, after
ensuring that the paint is dry. The second coat shall be done before the installation is
handed over and after approval to do so from the Engineer-in-charge.
8.0 Testing & commissioning
All piping after installation shall be tested for a hydrostatic test pressure of 10.5 kg/cm 2
or 1.5 times the working pressure (whichever is less) maintained for 24 hours. All joints
and valves shall be checked for leaks and rectified and retested. During testing all
valves except drain & air valves shall be kept fully open.
9.0 Makes of materials
For makes of materials refer to list of approved makes of material.
10.1 All external piping shall be measured along the centre line of the pipe and paid per unit
length and shall include:
a. All pipes & fittings
b. Bituminous coating
10.2 All internal piping shall be measured similarly but shall include for the pipe supports
and clamps.
10.3 All valves, air valves, drain valves together with flanges or tail pieces shall be
measured per unit.
10.4 All excavation and concrete supports and thrust blocks shall be measured as per
drawing and paid for per cum.
10.5 The cost of pipe supports described above form part of the rate quoted for piping and
no extra shall be payable on the account.
10.6 All painting shall form part of the cost of equipment piping etc. No separate payment
shall be admissible.

SECTION: S.54
SPRINKLER SYSTEM
1.0 Scope of work
1.1 The scope of work shall cover supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the
sprinkler system.
1.2 The contractor shall get the Sprinkler System approved by the Authority having
Jurisdiction.
2.0 Standards
2.1 The sprinkler system shall conform to and meet with the requirements set out by the
following:
NFPA 13/2002 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
BNBC Bangladesh National Building code Fire Protection
3.0 Sprinklers
3.1 Sprinklers shall be provided internally in the commercial area depending on the floor
area as shown on the drawings.
4.0 Pendant type Sprinkler Head
4.1 Sprinkler heads shall be of quartzoid bulb type with valve assembly, yoke and the
deflector.
4.2 The bulb shall be made of corrosion free material strong enough to withstand any
water pressure likely to occur in the system. The bulb shall shatter when the
temperature of the surrounding air reaches at 68oC/79oC.
4.3 The sprinkler shall be of approved make and type with 15mm nominal diameter outlets
and colour of liquid shall be Red/Yellow.
4.4 The sprinkler head shall be approved by UL/FM.
5.0 Upright type Sprinkler head
5.1 Upright sprinkler heads shall be similar to Pendent type in material construction and
performance but designed to throw water droplets upwards in umbrella fashion, to cool
the underside of ceiling and extinguish any fire involving combustibles on the floor
below.
5.2 The sprinkler head shall be approved by UL/FM. The nominal bore shall be 15mm dia
and the co lour of the liquid shall be red.
6.0 Installation Control Valve for Sprinkler
6.1 The installation control valve shall be double-seated clapper type check valve. The
body and cover shall be made from cast iron to ISO 185-200 or ASTM A48 No -30. The
seat and seat clamp shall be made from bronze to BS 1400 LG-2 grade. The sealing to
the seat shall be neoprene gasket. The hinges pin and ball shall be from stainless
steel.
6.2 It shall be vertically mounted and the direction of water travel shall be indicated on the
surface. It shall be rated to 12 Kg / cm2 and tested to 25 Kg / cm2 pressure.
6.3 A Bye-pass check valve shall be fitted to adjust minor and slow variations in water
pressure for balancing so as to avoid any false alarm.

6.4 The valve shall also be provided with a Test Control Box. The Box shall house a lever
to test and operate the ICV. A brass strainer shall also be provided at the point of water
supply to the alarm gong. A Retarding Chamber shall also be provided. The Chamber
shall be able to balance the water pressure in case of water line surges.
6.5 Each installation control valve shall have two sets of Pressure Gauges with brass ball
type shut off.
6.6 Water Motor Alarm shall also be provided. This shall be mechanically operated by
discharge of water through an impeller. The drive bearing shall be weather resistant. A
strainer shall be provided on line before the nozzle. The Gong piece shall be
constructed from bronze to BS 1400 LG-2 Grade and base of cast iron. The Motor
Housing, rotor and Housing cover shall be pressure die cast aluminum.
7.0 Flow Switch
7.1 Flow switch shall have a paddle made of flexible material of the width to fit within the
pipe bore. The terminal box shall be mounted over the paddle / pipe through a
connecting socket. The switch shall be potential free in either NO or NC position as
required. The switch shall be able to trip and make /break contact on the operation of a
single sprinkler head. The terminal box shall have connections for wiring to the
Annunciation Panel. The seat shall be of stainless steel. The Flow switch shall have IP:
55 protection
7.2 The Flow switch shall work at a minimum flow rate of 100 LPS. Further it shall have a
Retard to compensate for line leakage or intermittent flows.
8.0 Test & commissioning
8.1 The Sprinkler pump starting and stopping shall be tested by opening the test valve.
8.2 All the operating tests shall be carried out to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge.

SECTION: S.55
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1.0 Scope
1.1 The scope of work covers the supply and installation of portable fire extinguishers. The
following types are envisaged in these specifications and provided as shown in the
schedule of portable fire extinguishers.
(1) Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers
(a) Each unit shall have capacity of 4.5 kg and at least TIS 332 rating 6A:20B:C.
(b) Multipurpose Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers shall comply with TIS 332.
(2) C02 Portable Fire Extinguishers
(a) Each unit shall have C02 capacity of 4.5 kg with at least UL 711 rating 10B:C.
(b) C02 portable fire extinguisher shall be UL 154 listed.
(3) Water Fire Extinguisher.
(a) Each unit shall have capacity of 9.4 Liter (2.5 gallon) and UL 711 rating at 2A.
(b) Water Extinguishers shall be UL 626 listed.
(4) Aqueous-Film Forming Foam Fire Extinguishers (AFFF)
(a) Each unit shall have capacity of 9.4 liters (2.5 gallons) and UL 711 rating at
least 1A:20B.
(b) Film-Forming Foam Fire Extinguishers shall be UL 8 listed.
1.2 Installation.
1.2.1 Installation shall be followed instruction manual from manufacturer.
1.2.2 The linear heat detection cables for each detection zone shall be installed in
continuous runs without taps or branches in accordance with applicable sections of
NFPA 70 and NFPA 72.
2.0 Testing and Commissioning
2.1 Hydrant Test
(1) Each hydrant shall be fully opened and closed under system water pressure.
(2) Dry barrel hydrants shall be checked for proper drainage.
(3) The tests shall be completed with the pumps running.
2.2 Control Valves Test
All control valves shall be fully closed and opened under system water pressure to ensure
proper operation.
2.3 Hose Connection and Fire Department Connection Test
All hose connection and fire department connection threads shall be tested to verify their
compatibility with threads used by the local fire department. The test shall consist of threading
coupling samples, caps, or plugs onto the installed devices.
2.4 Manual Valve Test
Each valve intended to be manually opened or closed shall be operated by turning the hand-
wheel crank or wrench for its full range and returning it to its normal position. Hose valve caps
shall be tightened sufficiently to avoid leaking during the test and removed after the test to
drain water and relieve pressure.

2.5 Pressure Reducing Valves

(1) Each pressure-reducing valve shall be tested upon completion of installation to
ensure proper operation under flow and no-flow conditions.
(2) Testing shall verify that the device properly regulates outlet pressure at both
maximum and normal inlet pressure conditions.
(3) The results of the flow test of each pressure-reducing valve shall be recorded on
the Contractor's test certificate.
(4) The results shall include the static and residual inlet pressures, static and residual
outlet pressures, and the flow rate.

SECTION: S.56
1.0 CLEAN AGENT BASED PANEL FLOODING SYSTEM FOR ELECTRICAL( LT )

PANELS.
2.0 Standard and reference hdgh
3.0 Scope
3.1 Supply, fixing, testing and commissioning of Automatic linear pneumatic Tube
Detection based Clean agent System for Electrical Panels ( Firetrace Tube Panel
Protection System), consisting of the following components: Main distribution panel,
Essential power panel, Fire Pump Panel and any other panel as decided by Engineer
in Charge) with fire trace tube, cylinder, valves, integration with fire alarm control
panel for annunciation. The work shall cover:
i. Providing fire trace tube inside the above-mentioned panels.
ii. Arrangement of Clean Agent for flooding of the above-mentioned panels.
iii. Audio-visual annunciation devices for indicating incidence of fire.
iv. Wiring from alarm initiating devices to be above-mentioned panels with
required conduits as per direction of engineer-in-charge.
v. Any other item required to the successful commissioning of the system.
vi. Providing manual arrangement for discharge of gas inside the above
panels.
3.2 The electrical panel fire suppression system shall be complete with Clean agent gas
storage cylinders of required capacities, extinguishing agent as specified, polymer
fire trace tubing, filling and end-of-line adaptors, pressure switches, control
equipment and all necessary accessories and fittings to form a complete and working
installation to protect the specified areas to the approval of the engineer-in-charge.
3.3 The panels to be protected shall be determined as per the approval of the engineer-
in-charge.
3.4 This will have an interface with Main Fire Alarm & Control Panel. In case of fire in the
concerned Panel, indication & alarm should come in Main Fire Alarm & Control
Panel.
4.0 Standards
4.1 The design and installation of Clean agent based Fire Trace tube system is based on
the latest applicable codes and also as per the manufacturer’s recommendations, the
required Clean agent gas quantity is arrived as per the volume of the respective
panels to be protected.
4.2 All standards mean the latest.
5.0 System Features - The system shall generally comply with IEC standard.
5.1 The complete equipment design shall be reliable in operation. All components of the
installation should be located, installed or suitably protected to ensure that no
mechanical, chemical or other damage is possible which may render these inoperative.
5.2 All devices used in the installation shall be capable of functioning satisfactorily between
- 29C and 65C.
5.3 Each cylinder shall be provided with its own valve with a dip tube extending to the

bottom inside the cylinder, and valve discharge head, which shall be connected to a
common manifold through high pressure connecting pipes or tubes.
5.4 Flexible hoses used for discharge bend shall preferably be double wire braided
(perforated) rubber covered hose suitable to withstand a minimum bursting pressure of
420kgf/cm2 at 54C.
5.5 All valves under constant high pressure shall have a minimum bursting pressure of not
less than 42MN/m2 (420kgf/cm2) and those not under constant pressure shall have a
bursting pressure of not less than 35MN/m2 (350kgf/cm2).
5.6 Nozzles shall be sufficient in a number and so located that the gas discharge pattern
shall completely cover the enclosure.
5.7 All sections of pipe having dead ends shall be fitted with suitable pressure relief
devices designed to operate between 16.8MN/m 2 (168kgf/cm2) and 21MN/m2
(210kgf/cm2).
5.8 The nozzles shall be designed and located in such a manner that an even distribution
of gas will be achieved throughout the protected space and at the same time the
discharge from the nozzles shall not cause undue splashing of flammable liquids or
creation of dust clouds that might aid spread of fire.
6.0 Features of Fire Trace system
6.1 The system shall be simple self activating system, specifically designed for
installation inside enclosures, cabinets and machinery housing to detect
automatically and extinguish fire at source, at its very early stage. It should be
suitable for application where the potential fire risk is located within an enclosed or
confined space e.g. electrical panels etc.
6.2 The system should be an automatic self-seeking fire extinguisher, which puts fires
where they start by means of a flexible fire detection and delivery tube. The tube shall
be manufactured from specially produced polymer material to achieve the desired
detection and delivery characteristics. The system shall have capability of linear
detection i.e. detection of fire not only at a single stage point but also at any place
along the tube’s length.
6.3 This extinguishing system should be fully integrated with fire alarm system. The
system should offer early warning of activation and should reduce the risk of damage
to minimum. The system should consist of a valve, connected to a cylinder and to a
flexible detection and delivery system i.e. flexible tube. This tube should be routed
within the equipment to be protected. In case of fire, the tube shall melt and bursts at
the hottest point and the extinguishing agent is then transported through the Fire
trace tube exactly to the origin of fire (i.e. the point of burst).
6.4 The system should be simple self-activating system without human intervention and
suitable for enclosed spaces like engine room, panels.
6.5 The system should have fast response - less than 10 seconds.
6.6 The system should Extinguish fire at early stage and should trigger automatically and
also manually.
6.7 The system should be safe against malfunction and should not need power supply for
detection and extinguishing of fire.
7.0 Technical specifications of fire trace tube.
7.1 The fire trace tube should be a flexible tube made of special polymer.
7.2 The tube should have OD 6mm and ID 4mm or thereabout.
7.3 The fire trace tube should be fire red in colour (or as directed by engineer) to indicate

it is part of fire protection system.

7.4 The tube should be non – conductive, non- corrosive and flexible.
7.5 The tube should be capable of withstanding pressure up to 20 bars.
7.6 The tube under 12 bar pressure should rupture in case of fire between 5 to 45 sec
depending upon the rate of temperature.
7.7 The tube must have approval for using to detect fire from Loss Prevention Council.
7.8 The tube should be routed inside the panel for detecting fire and over heat. No
drilling, soldering or any other damaging activity will be carried out inside the panel
for fixing tube to detect the fire.
8.0 System Operation
8.1 Designed for simple installation, often very near the source of a potential fire, fire
trace is a self-activating detection & suppression system that reliably suppresses fires
in few seconds. In the event of fire contacting the fire trace tube, the tube bursts at
the hottest point. This leads to a rapid reduction of pressure inside the tubing. This
will make the differential high pressure valve fitted on the Clean agent cylinder open
instantaneously and the Clean agent stored in the cylinder will get released through
the tube at the burst point into the panel with alarm in FACP panel.

Annexure-1:
Interface Matrix

SN Issue description Electrical Contractor Other contractors’

responsibility responsibility
1 Cable / bus duct Design Traction contractor

installation
Provide cable / bus duct Provide necessary provision
between
route and cutout / opening of cutout in transformer cage
transformer and
required in the switchgear and terminals for cable / bus
MDB with
panel cage. duct connections.
termination
Supply & Installation Furnish requirement of forced
air cooling.
Supply and install cables /
bus duct including all Provide necessary fixing
hardware for necessary arrangement required for 4
connections on both ends. Nos. 3.5 core x 400 sq.mm
Al.cable terminations at LT
side in transformer cage.
2 ACBs in MDB Provide ACBs requirements Traction contractor Design.

in the design of MDB as per
auxiliary load. Adequate
space for accommodating
the ACBs shall be provided.
Supply & Installation
Supply and Install the
ACBs/Bus coupler in the
MDB. Connection of both
sides of ACBs is also in the
scope of Electrical
contractor.
Construct Traction contractor

Control wiring from ACBs to Design
an earmarked terminal strip
Provide I/O list for SCADA
for accessing these signals
and functional interlocking.
for SCADA connectivity.
Tentative list of I/O list is
provided in table – SCADA
signals.
Provision of scheme in
MDB panel for SCADA as Connections Onwards
per the requirements Terminal Strips are
suggested by Traction Responsibility of Traction
contractor Contractor.
3 MDB testing MDB testing including ACB TRACTION CONTRACTOR

testing in the responsibility
Associate with Electrical
of Electrical contractor
contractor for ACB testing
including coordination with
ACB manufacturer.
4 ASS layout and Installing the LV Traction contractor

cable support equipments in the scope of
Providing of Cable Trays and
infrastructure Electrical contractor as per

the layout drawings its support for requirement of

provided by GC/DDC. HV (33kV) and other cables of
traction in ASS and in other
Interfacing and coordinating
areas within the stations shall
with Traction contractor for
be done by traction
ASS layout.
contractor.
5 Pump room layout Coordinating with GC for Civil contractor

and cabling pump layout.
Confirming / providing
Installing the equipments comments and signing the
under the scope of pump room layout drawings
Electrical contractor viz. as provided by GC and
control panels, fire pumps, Electrical contractor. Install
jockey pump, fire water pumps under the scope
suppression system piping. of civil contractor.
Install all the cables and Final connection of water
termination including cable pumps on pump side and
for water pumps from power testing of pumps.
panels.
6 Cable routing, pipe Provide requirements of Civil contractor

routing and niches, cutouts etc. as
Provide niches and cutouts as
distribution board required for cable / pipe
required by the Electrical
fixing in the station routings and DBs fixing.
contractor.
building
Install cables, pipes and
DBs as required including
support system.
8 Pump room Furnish requirements of CIVIL CONTRACTOR

equipment handling facilities viz. chain
handling facilities pulley etc. and its location Install handling facilities as
required by ELECTRICAL
contractor
9 Alarm in case DG Wiring for display on BMS DG Contractor

is not used for a from designated TB
Facility for alarm to be
week onwards. This should be
provided in the AMF panel.
displayed at BMS
Potential free contacts for
workstation in SCR room
BMS interfacing for this alarm
should be provided. The
contacts should be brought to
one exclusive TB for easy
identification and connection
by the BMS contractor
10 DG fuel level All wiring from interfacing DG Contractor

monitoring and transducers / AMF PLC
Interface with Electrical (BMS)
specific energy onwards.
contractor and make provision
consumption
Connection from RS 485 (supply, installation of
port on DG AMF to BMS. transducers and associated
circuitry) as per requirement
BMS Software and logic
to achieve graduated fuel
development for measuring

and recording specific level monitoring through BMS.

energy consumption.
RS 485 port on AMF panel for
energy measurement /
records on BMS.
11 Air circulation – Exhaust fan in hot air duct DG Contractor

exhaust fan
Nil Exhaust fan in hot air duct –
interlocking
Design, Supply, installation,
Room exhaust fans
testing, commissioning and
Wiring from AMF panel to necessary interlocking with
exhaust fan. Facility running of DG set
(parallel switches) shall also
Room exhaust fans - Provide
be provided to switch-on
scheme of interlocking and
the fans even without DG
necessary provision in the DG
running. This is required
set / AMF panel for the same
during maintenance
including potential free
purposes.
contacts in the panel for BMS
Status of running (ON/OFF) interface
of all exhaust fans
GC/DDC Electrical
Verifying the scheme as
provided by DG contractor
before execution
12 Cabling and cable Provide all power and DG Contractor

support control (BMS) cables from
Provide all cables including
arrangement AMF panel onwards
control and power cabling
including cable support.
between DG set and AMF
panel. The cable support of
these cables also to be
provided by DG contractor.
13 Earthing Provide earthing system / DG Contractor

arrangement arrangement as required up
Provide details of earthing
to Main Earth Terminals in
requirement(earth electrodes,
DG room, ASS and S&T
main earth terminals) duly
rooms.
supported with design
Provide all earthing strips calculations and codal
buried in floor or wall as the provisions. Connection from
case may be. Interface with Main Earth Terminals (MET)
Civil Contractor and furnish to the equipment (DG, body,
requirement for providing AMF panel, etc.)
niches / cutouts for routing
S&T contractor
the earthing strips.
requirements and connection
from MET onwards to their
equipments.
Traction contractor
requirements and connection

from MET onwards to their

equipment equipments.
Civil Contractor
Provide niches / cutouts as
required by Electrical
contractor for earthing strips
GC/DDC Electrical
Verifying the scheme as
provided by DG contractor
before execution
14 S&T cable support Installing cable brackets / S&T and Traction Contractors
and SCADA cable trays as required by S&T
Furnishing their requirement
support contractor in the station
to Electrical contractor
building only.
GC/DDC/Electrical
Providing scheme of cable
support installation
(Combined services drawings)
15 AC Split unit Install outer unit in such a Civil Contractor

way that it is accessible for
Provide suitable location for
maintenance conveniently.
outer unit
Fabrication / installation of
GC/DDC/Arch and Electrical
suitable stand for
installation of outer units. Provide GFC support at
construction stage
Provide suitable location for
A/C outdoor units for easy
maintenance access
16 Drain for Air- Furnish requirement of Civil Contractor

conditioners drainage & drain traps
Provide drains / drain traps as
required to be connected to
station drainage system.
GC/DDC/ELECTRICAL
Provide GFC support at
construction stage
17 ASS ingress / Furnish requirement of Civil Contractor

egress route and handling facilities required
Provide and install handling
handling facilities and ingress / egress sizes
facilities as required, provide
ingress / egress route
including closing / opening
arrangement.
18 Water tank for fire Furnish size and tentative Civil contractor
fighting location to Civil Contractor
Construction as per
including sleeves in the

tank walls as required (to requirement of ELECTRICAL

avoid drilling at a later contractor
stage)
19 Slope and Advise requirement to Civil Civil Contractor

foundation of Contractor for slope
Provide slope, foundation &
pump room & DG
drain as required by
room.
ELECTRICAL contractor
20 FHC cabinet Advise requirement to civil Civil Contractor

construction contractor for size and
Construct cabinets niches as
location
required by ELECTRICAL
contractor
21 Installation of Design Civil contractor

Platform lighting
Electrical contractor shall Provide structure member to
and lighting
interface & GC/DDC shall Electrical Contractor for
arrestor.
furnish the fixture and LA installation of raceway, Cable
location plans & welding tray & LA support as per detail
requirement on the steel furnished by GC/DDC.
structure on platform roof.
Contractor shall install LA &
Light Fixture including
raceways, Cable Support,
fixture support arrangement
& welding to the structure
other fabrication items
required for fixing the lights.

SN Issue Electrical Contractor Other contractors’

description responsibility responsibility
23 Earthing Provide earthing system / Elevator Contractor

arrangement for arrangement as required up to
Elevators & Main Earth Terminals for
requirements and connection from
Escalators & Elevators & Escalators & their
MET onwards to their equipments.
their respective respective panels.
panels Escalator Contractor
Provide all earthing strips buried
in floor or wall as the case may Provide details of earthing
be. Interface with Civil requirements and connection from
Contractor and furnish MET onwards to their equipments.
requirement for providing Civil Contractor
niches / cutouts for routing the
earthing strips. Provide niches / cutouts as
required by Electrical contractor
for earthing strips
24 Cabling and Provide all power cables & Elevator Contractor

cable trays, connections from LT
Provide details of power
support Switchboard upto Elevator main
requirements, routes and
arrangement for power panel, Escalator main
connection from LT Switchboard
Elevators power panel including cable
onwards to their equipments.
trays, support as per the
requirements of respective
contractors.
Provide three phase power with
dual earth duly terminated on a
suitable MCCB of the elevator
as specified by lift contractor.
However MCCB and ELCB is to
be provided by the elevator
contractor.
Provide cable tray from lift

controller room to SCR for data
cable.

SN Issue Electrical Contractor Other contractors’

description responsibility responsibility
25 Cabling and Design Escalator Contractor

cable trays,
Electrical power, control Provide details of power
support
interfaces and system shall be requirements, trunking, conduits,
arrangement for
developed routes and connection from LT
Escalators
Switchboard onwards to their
Install
equipments.
Provide all power cables &
Coordinate details of mounting
connections, trunking, conduits
provisions, power supply, electric
and conduit fittings necessary
load & control requirements
for the power, control and
lighting circuit from LT
Switchboard upto Escalator
main power panel including
cable trays, support as per the
requirements of Escalator
contractor.
Provide three phase power with
dual earth duly terminated on a
suitable MCCB in the Escalator
control room/ enclosure
Provide cable tray from
Escalator control room to SCR
for data cable.
26 Conduits and Provide the conduits and Escalator contractor

trunking for trunking from the Escalator
The Contractor shall coordinate
Escalator control Controller Room to the Station
and interface with Electrical
room Control Room
Contractor and/ or his sub
Provide cast in conduits/race contractor in association with
ways from escalator control conduits / trunking routing and
room to Escalator’s nearest pit sizing requirement.

Table – SCADA Signals
SN Device Description Event text Event text Alarm

normal alarm class
1 ACB-1 Local remote mode Remote Local P1

Incomer
2 Permission for local control Banned Permission P1
3 110 DC control voltage Normal Fail P2
4 CB status Close P5
5 Open P5
6 CB trip Normal Trip P2
7 Thermal O/L protection Normal Trip P2
8 Under voltage protection Normal Trip P2
9 Spring Charged Discharged P1
10 Close command
11 Open command
12 SCADA permissive command
13 ACB-2 Local remote mode Remote Local P1

Incomer
17 Service Test P2
22 Close command
23 Open command

SN Device Description Event text Event text Alarm

normal alarm class
25 ACB Bus Local remote mode Remote Local P1

coupler
29
34 Close command
35 Open command

Annexure-2: Electrical
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES
(i) Contractor shall use the material of approved make as indicated below unless specified
otherwise in BOQ or as approved by the Employer's representative.
(ii) The Contractor shall ensure the correct selection of the approved make meeting the
specifications and application duties. Before placing order for procurement, the sample of
approved make shall be got verified for its suitability to the specification and application
duty. However in case Employer's representative / engineer, whose decision will be final
and binding on both parties, considers that the make / model proposed by the contractor
does not meet the requirement, the contractor will be required to propose an alternative
make acceptable to the Employer’s Representative.
(iii) The Contractor shall quote the rates for material and equipments as per the list of approved
makes. In the event of contractor wanting to use alternate makes other than those
stipulated for any reason, the contractor can send a proposal after ensuring that what he
proposes at least meets both the quality, and safety standard of the stipulated makes and
specifications as stated in the Particular Specifications. He shall also stand full guarantee
to his alternate proposal. The alternate makes can be used only after an approval
accorded by the Employer, whose decision will be final in the matter.
SN Items Approved makes
1 GI conduit pipes As per IEC specification.
2 GI Conduit accessories As per IEC specification.
3 Copper conductor FR PVC insulated wires _______

marked
4 Modular System switches, socket outlets, and Crabtree, MK Electric, CPL-obsession, MDS, Schneider, SSK,ABB
wiring accessories with moulded cover plates
5 Miniature circuit breakers L&T Hager, MDS, Siemens, Schneider, ABB
6 Residual Current Earth Leakage circuit breakers L&T Hager, MDS, Siemens , Merlin-Gerin, ABB
7 MCB Distribution Boards L&T Hager, MDS, Siemens, ABB, INDO ASIAN, Havells, GE, Tricolite,
ECS, Associated Switchgears, Schneider, Unilec, Neptune, Anand
Power, Adlec, Sudhir Genset Ltd
8 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers L&T, Siemens, ABB, Merlin Gerin, MDS Legrand
9 Switch fuse units with HRC fuses L&T, GE, Siemens, Control & Swicthegear Limited, ABB, Merlin-Gerin,
Crompton-Greaves
10 415 Volts ACBs L&T, Siemens, ABB, Schneider
11 Protective relays Alsthom (AREVA), ABB, L&T, Siemens, Schneider
12 APFC relay Enercon, L&T, DUCATI, EPCOS
13 MV/LV Switchboards ECS, L&T, GE, Associated Switchgears, Schneider, Unilec, Neptune, ,
ABB,_________
14 Copper/Aluminium, [Crimping type] Cable lugs for Dowells, Jainson

1100 volt grade cables
15 XLPE Cables (FRLSH) Finolex, Asian/RPG, KEI, Havells, Cords Cable, Scot Innovation,

Bonton.
16 Compression glands for 1100 volt grade cables Peeco, Comet
17 Terminal blocks & cage clamps ELMEXX, PHOENIX, WAGO, Connectwel or equivalent
18 Capacitors Crompton, Mehar(Schneider) , L&T, Siemens, DUCATI, ABB
19 Cast resin current transformers AE, Kappa, Control & switchgear, Precise, G&M (Gilbert & Maxwel)
20 Meters (digital) MECO, DUCATI, Allen-Bradely, Motwane, AE, Enercon, HPL,

Schneider, L&T , Secure
21 Selector switches Kaycee, L&T( Salzer), BCH, Teknic, Schneider, ABB
22 Indicating lamps and push buttons L&T, BCH, Vaishno, Siemens, TEKNIK, RAAS, Schneider
23 Light fittings Philips _______
24 Lamps Philips _____
25 Area Lighting Masts Philips, Bajaj, Crompton, GE, METEL COATS (KLITE)
26 Smoke and heat detectors Edwards, Philips, Appolo, Cerberus, Tyco, Notifier , System Sensor
27 Circulator fans/exhaust fans Crompton Greaves, Orient, Khaitan, Alstom, Almonard
28 Ceiling Fans Crompton Greaves, Orient, Khaitan, Alstom
29 Air conditioning system Amtrax, Carrier, Blue Star,LG, Daikin,Toshiba, Hitachi
30 UPS System Tata Liebert, Numeric, APC, Seimens, Piller, Schneider, GE , Aros-PCI
31 UPS Battery Exide, Farukawa, Standard, Panasonic, Aamaraja , HBL -Nife or

equivalent
32 Cable tray ________
34 Variable refrigerant volume / flow units Daikin, Mitsubishi, York, Hitachi
35 ATS ASCO , Cummins
36 Busduct EAE, Henikwon , Schneider , Siemens, L&T , C&S
For Fire Fighting Works
1 PUMPS KIRLOSKAR / MATHER & PLATT
2 MOTORS KIRLOSKAR / ABB / SIEMENS / NGEF / GEC / ALSTHOM /

JYOTHI / CROMPTON GREAVES
3 STARTERS, SWITCHES / SWITCH FUSE UNITS AS PER ELECTRICAL LIST
4 VOLTMETER & AMMETER AS PER ELECTRICAL LIST
5 PRESSURE SWITCH INDFOSS / SWITZER / MORLEY / SYSTEM SENSOR
6 PRESSURE GAUGE FIEBIG / H.GURU / NEWAGE / SUKAN / WAAREE/ WIKA
7 PIPES (MS & GI) ________
8 FITTINGS

a) MS / GI FORGED STEEL FITTINGS _______
B) MS / GI BUTT WELDED ERW FITTINGS _________
9 SLUICE VALVE KIRLOSKAR / LEADER
10 GUNMETAL/STAINLESS STEEL VALVES (FULL WAY

& CHECK VALVES)
a) CLASS I ZOLOTO / LEADER
b) CLASS II
11 NON-RETURN VALVES
12 BUTTERFLY VALVE
13 HYDRANT VALVE
14 HOSE REEL TUBE (Thermoplastic synthetic reinforced)
15 HOSE PIPE (RRL TYPE)
16 BRANCHPIPE WITH NOZZLE
17 HOSE BOX
18 PAINTS FOR EXPOSED PIPES
19 ANCHOR FASTENERS
20 WRAPING & COATING MATERIALS FOR UNDER

GROUND PIPES
21 PRIMER / PAINTS FOR PAINTING for ABOVE

GROUND PIPES
22 Y-TYPE / SUCTION STRAINER
23 FOOT VALVE WITH STRAINER
24 SPRINKLERS
25 ALARM VALVE (INSTALLATION VALVE)
26 WATER MOTOR GONG & TRIMS
27 FLOW SWITCHES
28 AIR RELEASE VALVE
29 BALL VALVE
30 CAST IRON NON- RETURN VALVE DOUBLE

FLANGED
31 RUBBER GASKET
32 CO2 Gas Fire Trace Tube System
33 Portable Fire Extinguisher

34 Welding Electrode
Vendor Approval
It shall be obligatory for the Contractor to obtain Notice of ‘No Objection’ from the Engineer
for the selection of the vendors for all items of work, even if the name of the vendor is
specified in the Contractor’s Technical Submission and the works to be done including
purchase of materials and equipment is in accordance with the Standards specified in the
Contract.
In case of vendor selected from the approved list provided in the contract,
(a) A list of approved vendors is provided in this contract.
(b) Contractor in general shall use the material of approved make as per approved
vendor list unless specified in BOQ or makes meeting the tender specifications as
approved by the Employer’s representative.
(c) The contractor shall ensure the correct selection of the approved make meeting the
specifications and its application. Before placing the order for procurement, the
sample of approved make shall be verified for its suitability to the specification and
application. In case Employer’s representative/ engineer, (whose decision will be final
and binding on both parties) considers that the make/ model proposed by the
contractor does not meet the tender requirement, the contractor will be required to
propose an alternative make acceptable to the Employer’s Representative.
(d) The contractor will submit a list ‘A’ of vendors for all the items of the BOQ contract
(i) The list should include the items for which the contractor is proposing the product of
the approved vendor.
(ii) The contractor will be advised ‘No Objection’ with following caveat:-
 The model etc. to be supplied will be the latest or superior one.
 The contractor will be required to submit the technical proposal for the
scrutiny
(iii) For the items, contractor desires to propose new vendor, proposal to be submitted in
accordance as List ‘B’.
(iv) The contractor will submit the undertaking that above lists i.e. List ‘A’ and List ‘B’
includes all the items required in the contract.
Vendor to be selected who are capable to provide good after sales services in Dhaka
during DLP and thereafter.

Electrical Specification For CP-03 (08 11 2015)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Specification For CP-03 (08 11 2015)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DHAKA MASS RAPID TRANSIT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT

SPECIFICATION OF SUPPLY, INSTALLATION,

Section Description Page No.

E 00 Electrical Works – General 2

E 05 Indoor Lighting & Fans 67

E 09 Uninterrupted Power Supply System 89

E 10 Air-Conditioning & Ventilation System 96

E 11 Viaduct lighting and Viaduct Power socket 106

E 12 Diesel Generator 109

S 51 Fire Alarm & Annunciation System 139

S 52 Fire Hydrant System 149

S 53 Piping for Fire Fighting System 153

S 54 Sprinkler System 159

S 55 Portable Fire Extinguishers 161

S 56 Clean Agent Based Fire Trace Tube System 163

Annexure 1 Interface Matrix 166

Annexure 2 List of Approved Makes 175

Confidential Page 2 of 185 R-0

 Fire detection and alarm system including conduiting and wiring/Cabling

 Various distribution boards / panels as required with automatic source transfer

 Power supply for signage.

Confidential Page 3 of 185 R-0

 DC control supply system as required

 Exhaust fans and ceiling fans

 Protective earthing and lightning protection

 Uninterrupted power supply system

 Protection and interlocks

 Fire pumps, fire hydrants, sprinklers and fire system piping

 fire trace tube system in electrical panels and fire extinguishers

 interface with other contractor.

 Preparation Of Drawings and Design Verification complete as required.

1.2 Definitions and Abbreviations

Confidential Page 4 of 185 R-0

Confidential Page 5 of 185 R-0

Confidential Page 6 of 185 R-0

Chief Electrical Inspector

IEC 60404-8-4:1998 General requirements for the supply of metallurgical

IEC 60227 PVC Insulated cables for working voltages up to and

IEC. 60502-1, BS 7655. Cross-linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed

IEC 60391(1972) Guide for marking of insulated conductors

IEC 61439-2:2011) Enclosed distribution fuse boards and cutouts for

IEC 60614-1(1978) Conduits for electrical installations: Part 1 General

Confidential Page 7 of 185 R-0

Conduits for electrical installations: Part 3 Rigid plain

Conduits for Electrical Installations - Part 5 : Pliable

Conduits for Electrical Installations - Specification -:

Specification for Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control

Specification for Low-voltage Switchgear and Control

Specification for Low-voltage Switchgear and

Specification for Low-voltage Switchgear and

Specification for Low-voltage Switchgear and

Specification for Low-Voltage Switchgear and

Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear -

Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear -

IEC 60898-1:2002 Electrical Accessories - Circuit Breakers for Over

IEC 60445(1973) Guide for Uniform System of Marking and Identification

Confidential Page 8 of 185 R-0

of Conductors and Apparatus Terminals

IEC 61036:1996 AC Static Watthour Meters, Class 1 and 2 –

IEC 60332 (Various Tests on electric cables under fire conditions

IEC 60439 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies

BS:5839 Fire detection and alarm systems for buildings

1.5 Service Life of the Equipments